€¦ · ALEPH TABLES Version 16 Alephe Tables aleph_start aleph_startup aleph_shutdown alephe/unicode Headers html_template_lng ill_server_defaults jap_euc

© 2004 Ex Libris

Copyright Notice

All of the information in this document is the property of Ex Libris Ltd. It may NOT, under any circumstances, be sent, copied, or reproduced without the written permission of Ex Libris. The information contained in this document has been prepared for the sole purpose of providing information for users of the ALEPH 500™ integrated library system. The material herein contained has been prepared, and is provided, in good faith; however, Ex Libris disclaims any obligation or warranty as to its accuracy and / or suitability for any usage or purpose other than that for which it is intended.

ALEPH TABLES

Version 16

Alephe Tables

aleph_start●

aleph_startup●

aleph_shutdown●

alephe/unicode●

Headers●

html_template_lng●

ill_server_defaults●

jap_euc_to_unicode●

library_relation●

marc_country_codes●

marc_language_codes●

path_convert●

pc_server_defaults●

pc_tab_cat_conv●

tab_character_conversion_line●

tab_ill_unit.lng●

tab_library_group●

tab_location_name.lng●

tab_mime_type●

tab_oclc●

tab_sub_library_address●

tab_tree_view●

unicode_to_8859_6●

user_function.lng●

www_f_heading●

www_server.conf●

Library Tables

bib_format●

check_doc●

check_doc_line●

check_doc_line_contents●

edit_doc_777●

edit_doc_999.lng●

edit_doc_999_aut_<aut_lib>.lng●

edit_field.lng●

form_description.lng●

path_convert●

pc_tab_col.lng●

tab_sub_library_address●

pc_tab_exp_field.lng●

pc_tab_find.lng●

pc_tab_short.lng●

Release Notes - ALEPH Tables - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...589NJ4AU37661EYY-00079/file/n-table-aleph-16 (1 of 39) [3/31/2004 5:14:14 PM]

pc_tab_items_fast_cat.lng●

pc_tab_scan.lng●

permission.dat●

remote_catalog.dat●

tab00.lng●

tab05●

tab10●

tab11_acc●

tab14●

tab15●

tab16●

tab18.lng●

tab20●

tab31●

tab33.lng●

tab34●

tab39●

tab41●

tab43●

tab100 Introduction●

tab100 Release Notes●

tab_attr_sub_library●

tab_aut●

tab_bor_id.lng●

tab_cat_hidden_fields●

tab_cat_own●

tab_check_circ●

tab_checksum●

tab_exp_own.lng●

tab_expand_join●

tab_export●

tab_fast_patron_register●

tab_filing●

tab_filing_call_no●

tab_hld_stmt●

tab_hold_request_form●

tab_late_return●

tab_lssu.conf●

tab_locate●

tab_mapping●

tab_match_script●

tab_move_record●

tab_sc_3m●

tab_sc_lssu●

tab_service●



tab_sfx●

tab_sip2.conf●

tab_sip2_translate●

tab_tag_text●

tab_word_breaking●

tab_xyz●

tab_z30●

tab_z30_sort●

tab_z311●

tab_z701●

taginfo.lng●

Deleted Display Tables

tab_word_breaking

A new entry can be used in tab_word_breaking. Entry 97 is used as the default for the ILL Locate process, unless defined otherwise bytab_locate.

1.

pc_tab_col.lng

PC_ACQ_ITEMS_L has been deleted from pc_tab_col.lng (as it is no longer needed for the new Acquisitions GUI interface).1.

PC_ACQ_COPY_L has been deleted from pc_tab_col.lng (as it is no longer needed for the new Acquisitions GUI interface).2.

PC_ACQ_EXP_DIV_L has been deleted from pc_tab_col.lng (as it is no longer needed for the new Acquisitions GUI interface).3.

PC_ACQ_I_H_L has been deleted from pc_tab_col.lng (as it is no longer needed for the new Acquisitions GUI interface).4.

Two columns were added to the Patron Loan list: Author and Year, in pc_tab_col.lng:

PC_CIR_B_LOAN_LIST L Author 19 000 04 C04 Author PC_CIR_B_LOAN_LIST L Year 20 000 04 C04 Year

5.

The invoice line item note (Z75-I-NOTE) has been added as a new column to both lists:

Invoice List of Order (PC_ACQ_O_I_L)■

General Invoice and Line Items (PC_ACQ_O_H_I_L).■

6.

A new entry has been added: PC_ALL_ITEM_HISTORY, to enable the viewing of all the history of an item. This entry has beenadded to support the addition of a new column (col. 6) to the Item History list which contains the item's barcode.

7.

The following sections are no longer used and have therefore been removed:

ADMIN_LIB_LIST L Library code 01 030 01 C04 Library code ADMIN_L_PERMIT_LIST L Func Desc. 02 030 03 C03 User Function Text ADMIN_PASSWORD_LIST L Permitted libraries 02 068 01 C01 Permitted libraries ADMIN_PERMIT_LIST L Func Desc. 04 020 03 C03 User Function Text ADMIN_PROFILE_LIST L Find limit 02 000 02 C02 Find Limit ADMIN_PROFILE_LIST L Browse limit 03 000 03 C03 Scan Limit CAT_CHECK_TAG L Tag Validation Error 01 100 01 C04 error message list CAT_DOC_ITEM L Barcode 04 025 01 C04 Z30 Barcode PC_ACQ_LIST L Arr St 07 010 01 C01 z68-arrival-status. PC_CASH_CASH_EXPAND L Field 01 040 01 C01 PC_CIR_HOL_SELECT L Holding Record 01 100 07 C07 Back Link

8.

2.



PC_CIR_ITEM_LIST L Circ. Note 18 000 01 C01 Z30-NOTE-CIRCULATION PC_CIR_LOAN_EXPAND L Field 01 040 01 C01 PC_CIR_LOAN_INFO L Data 02 065 01 C04 Data PC_CIR_RETURN_INFO L Data 02 065 01 C04 Data PC_CIR_RR_SUBLIBS L Description 02 070 01 C01 sublibrary text PC_CIR_USER_LIST L Patron Barcode 03 025 10 C01 Patron Barcode PC_COM_DOC_ADMIN L HOL 07 010 02 C02 Has HOL PC_COM_ITEM_SUMMARY L Field Data 02 060 01 C02 Data PC_DISPATCH_DOC L Contents 02 080 02 C02 buf-doc-text PC_DISPATCH_REQ_LIST L Open Date 04 015 01 C03 Open Date

PC_EMPTY_DATA L No Data Available 01 100 01 C01 Data unavailable PC_ERROR_MESSAGE L Errors 01 100 11 C01 error message list PC_ITEM_BIND_L L Description 01 050 01 C01 z30-descrp. PC_ITEM_HOL_INFO L Information 01 100 01 C01 852,866.. PC_ITEM_HOL_SELECT L Holding Record 01 100 01 C01 LKR Text PC_PRINT_HEADING L 01 100 01 C01 Printing Heading PC_SEAR_ACC_HEADINGS L Text 01 100 01 C04 PC_SEAR_FULL_99 L 01 020 03 C01 Document Code PC_SEAR_FULL_XXX L 01 100 03 C03 Document format >003 PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN_L L Barcode 01 015 01 C01 z30-barcode PC_SERIAL_DOC L Contents 02 080 02 C02 buf-doc-text PC_SERIAL_HOL_SELECT L Holding Records 01 100 01 C01 LKR Text PC_SERIAL_ITEM_L L Arrival 02 015 01 C01 01 C02 arrival-dat PC_SERIAL_ITEM_SHOW L Field Data 02 060 01 C02 Data PC_SERIAL_OPEN_SCHED L Cron-i 02 020 01 C02 z17-chronological-i PC_SERIAL_SCHED_L L Arrived 04 010 01 C01 01 C02 no issues arrived PC_TABLE_OVERFLOW L Too many items 01 100 01 C01

The following sections have been added:

CHECK_HOLD_REQ L Error 01 100 04 C01 Error CHECK_PHOTO_REQ L Error 01 100 04 C01 Error PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L Print Date & Format 03 030 01 C03 Z501-PRINT-FORMAT PC_ACQ_LIST L Arr St 07 007 01 C01 z68-arrival-status. PC_CIR_B_ROUT_LIST L Bib Info 01 070 04 C04 PC_CIR_SCHEDULE_LIST L End Date 06 015 01 C01 PC_COM_ADM_SELECT L ADM No. 02 010 01 C01 ADM Sys no. PC_COM_HOL_ITEM_LIST L Call no. 05 000 01 C01 hol-call-no PC_COM_R_USER_LIST L Patron Barcode 02 025 03 C03 Patron Barcode PC_COM_TRANSACTION L Active Sum 14 000 03 C03 PC_SEAR_MARC_OPAC L Text 01 100 04 C04 Document Code Text PC_SERIAL2_ARR_LOG L Barcode 01 020 01 C01 Z30-BARCODE PC_SERIAL_CAPTIONS L Cal Change. 07 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Arrival 09 000 02 C01 02 C02 arrival date PC_SERIAL_CLAIM_L_S L Barcode 04 015 02 C02 z30-barcode PC_SERIAL_DOC_LIST L Doc Library. 01 020 01 C01 05 C02 LKR Library PC_SERIAL_GROUPS L Arrived 02 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_COL L Arrived 02 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_SL L Arrived 02 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_PATTERNS L Copy. No. 04 006 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_ROUT_CL L Group Leader 02 031 03 C03 name of z18-id PC_SERIAL_SCHEDULE L 863/4/5 05 030 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_TEMPLATES L File Name 01 100 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_TMPL_CAPT L Capt. 02 090 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_TMPL_LVLX L Lvl-X. 02 090 01 C01

9.

The "VAT Amount" column has been added to PC_ACQ_O_H_I_L (Line Items List of a general invoice)

PC_ACQ_O_H_I_L L VAT amount 12 000 01 C04 z75-i-vat-amount

10.

The "VAT Sum" column has been added to PC_COM_TRANSACTION (budget information - tab 4:transaction)

11.



PC_COM_TRANSACTION L VAT Sum 15 000 03 C03 z601-vat-sum

ACQ - Claims List - Order Tab | Claims node: The Claims List now has 6 columns instead of 3: ./usm01/tab/pc_tab_col.lng:

PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L Claim Date 01 010 01 C01 Z501-CLAIM-DATE PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L Claim Text 02 030 01 C01 Z501-CLAIM-TEXT PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L Print Date 05 010 01 C03 Z501-PRINT-DATE PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L P. Format 06 010 01 C03 Z501-PRINT-FORMAT PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L Reply Date 03 010 02 C02 Z501-VENDOR-REPLY-DATE PC_ACQ_CLAIM_L L Reply Text 04 030 02 C02 Z501-VENDOR-REPLY

Formerly, there were three columns, each containing two elements: Claim Date+text, Print Date+format, and Reply Date+text.

12.

A new entry has been added: PC_COM_R_USER_LIST. This entry supports the Patron List with two columns for the RemoteRegistration functionality.

PC_COM_R_USER_LIST L Patron Name 01 050 02 C02 Patron Name PC_COM_R_USER_LIST L Patron Barcode 02 025 03 C03 Patron Barcode

13.

The following new entries have been added to PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN in pc_tab_col.lng.

PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Seq. 10 000 01 C04 z30-sequence PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Call number 11 000 01 C01 z30-call-no PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Collection 12 000 01 C03 z30-collection PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Status 13 000 01 C02 z30-item-status

PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Pages 14 000 01 C02 z30-pages PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Loans 15 000 01 C04 z30-no-loans PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Call number 2 16 000 01 C01 z30-call-no-2 PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Hol no. 17 000 01 C01 z30-call-no-2 PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Hol+ 18 000 01 C01 hol+sb+coll+cn PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Sublibrary code 19 000 01 C01 z30-sub-library PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Coll. code 20 000 01 C01 z30-collection PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Item stat. code 21 000 01 C01 z30-item-status PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Enum-a 22 000 01 C01 z30-enum-a PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Copy Id. 23 000 01 C01 z30-copy-id PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Temp Loc 24 000 it map temporary locat PC_SERIAL_CHECKIN L Notes 25 000 it map notes exist

These new entries have been added in order to support new columns in Serials/ Check In list.

14.

The item's call number and second call number have been added as columns that can be displayed in the List of Reading RoomLoans. (This tab is displayed on the right pane when the Reading Room node is selected from the Patrons tab.) They have beenadded as new columns in pc_tab_col.lng, as follows :

PC_CIR_RR_LOAN_LIST L Call no 11 000 03 C03 Call Number PC_CIR_RR_LOAN_LIST L Call no.2 12 000 03 C03 Call Number 2

15.

"Net Amount" and "VAT" have been added to PC_CASH_SUMMARY (patron's cash transactions) in the following format:

PC_CASH_SUMMARY L Net Amount 16 008 05 C04 Net Sum PC_CASH_SUMMARY L VAT 17 007 05 C04 VAT Sum

16.

The following lines have been added to support the new Vendor/Sublibrary tab in the Group List:

PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L No. Items. 01 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L Arrived 02 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L Expected 03 010 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L Desc. 04 040 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L Vendor 07 030 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L Sublibrary 05 030 01 C01 PC_SERIAL_GROUPS_VEN L Coll. 06 000 01 C01

17.

Deleted Display TablesThe display formatting for viewing various records (for example, user-loan, item-return) is now handled by HTML. The HTMLtemplates are located in the library's /pc_display_<lng> directory. These templates replace the formatting tables that were in the library's/tab directory. The deleted files are:

tab_acq_display.lng❍

tab_bor_display.lng❍

3.



tab_cash_display.lng❍

tab_ill_in_request.lng❍

tab_ill_request.lng❍

tab_invoice_display.lng❍

tab_item_display.lng❍

tab_item_loan_display.lng❍

tab_item_summary.lng❍

tab_loan_bor_display.lng❍

tab_loan_display.lng❍

tab_return_data.lng❍

tab_return_display.lng❍

tab_return_in_data.lng❍

tab_subscr_display.lng❍

tab_vendor_display.lng❍

pc_tab_find.lng

The pc_tab_find.lng table has been removed from the pc_tab/catalog directory of the libraries. This table is not used in the newCataloging module. In addition, the pc_tab_find.lng table in the tab directory of libraries is now only used by the ILL module.

4.

pc_tab_scan.lng

The pc_tab_scan.lng table has been removed from the pc_tab/catalog directory of the libraries. This table is not used in the newCataloging module. In addition, the pc_tab_scan.lng table in the tab directory of libraries is now only used by the ILL module.

5.

tab_sfx

The tab_sfx table, found in the BIB library's data_tab, defines which icon is displayed for the SFX link. The table determines what SFXservices are available when a record is found in a specific base.

If one of the services is available, the table also controls which icon will be displayed. This control is done by defining, in column 3, intowhich index on the HTML page, the icon set in column 2 will be inserted. The index has to be used on the HTML page for it to bedisplayed. For example, if the tab_sfx rows state:

USM01 www_f_sfx 11 N getAuthorEmail USM01 www_f_sfx_em 12 N getCitedJournal

then if the SFX service getAuthorEmail is available for a record found in USM01, the www_f_sfx icon will be inserted into index 11.For the HTML page full-set-head to display this icon, use the following definition:

<td class="bar" align="center" valign="bottom" nowrap> $1100 $1200 </td>

instead of :

<td class="bar" align="center" valign="bottom" nowrap>

<a href='javascript:open_window("&server_f?func=service-

sfx&doc_number=$0600&line_number=0000&service_type=RECORD");'> <img src="&icon_path/f-sfx.gif" border=0 alt="SFX services"></a> </td>

If none of the services is available, a dimmed and unavailable SFX link button will be inserted into index 11 of the HTML page.

If the searched base is not found in tab_sfx, the www_f_sfx icon will be inserted into index 11 of the HTML page.

6.



If more than one SFX service is required, column 1-4 do not have to be repeated. For example :

USM01 www_f_sfx 11 N getAuthorEmail getCitedJournal

means that either getAuthorEmail or getCitedJournal have to be available for the www_f_sfx icon to be displayed.

tab14

The structure of tab14 was slightly changed to match all other tables with an hour column. Column 5, which contains hour information(Reshelving time), has been changed from 5 characters (HH:MM) to 4 characters (HHMM).

7.

tab10

The tab10 table has been replaced by the new table tab100.

8.

tab100 Introduction

tab100 is a new table that replaces tab10.

tab100 Variablestab100 variables do not have switch numbers. They are identified solely by the variable name.■

In tab100, the names of the variables no longer start with TAB100-. For example, the tab10 variableTAB10-VENDOR-SHARING is called VENDOR-SHARING in tab100.

■

The names of most variables are the same as in tab10 (but without the prefix TAB10-). The following variables are the onlyones that have different names:

TAB10-HOLD-REQUEST-ITEM-STATUS ---> HOLD-REQUEST-ITM-STATUS TAB10-CREATE-ITEM-FORM-ORDER-M ---> CREATE-ITM-FORM-ORDER-M TAB10-852-ITEM-OVERRIDE ---> X852-ITEM-OVERRIDE TAB10-852-HOLDING ---> X852-HOLDING

■

The following tab10 variables have not been transferred to tab100 because they are no longer in use:

TAB10-DEFAULT-BOR-ID-2 TAB10-DEFAULT-BOR-VERIFY-3

■

Whereas tab10 variables were limited to one character, tab100 variables can be up to 99 characters.■

❍

The tab100 Formattab100 is built in a textual manner. This is similar to GUI .ini files. The format of tab100 lines is:

<variable name>=<value>

For example:

USE-ORDER-UNIT=Y USE-OBJECT-CODE=Y CREATE-Z00R=Y UPDATE-Z30-COPY=N AUTO-TRUNCATE-Z01-FIND=Y AVAILABILITY-ROUTINE=2

❍

The tab100 HierarchyThe new tab100 scheme includes an $alephe_tab tab100 table in addition to the libraries' tab100 tables. There is also infrastructurein place for eventually setting up tab100 tables per server type. The system reads the alephe tab100 table first, then the tab100library table. The last value read is the value used.

For example, if in $alephe_tab/tab100, ADDRESS-ZIP-STYLE=2, and in $data_tab/tab100 of USM50,ADDRESS-ZIP-STYLE=3, the final value of ADDRESS-ZIP-STYLE will be "3".

❍

9.



The tab100 HeaderThe tab100 header provides valuable information about each variable. This includes the available values; the default value; thetype of variable (Text or Number); the maximum length of text variables (01 - 99). For example:

USER-ADDR-PERMISSION Values:0 1 2 3 Default: 0 Type: Text; Max Length: 01 tab100 of library: Yes; tab100_: No. 0 = No Check - Can update user Addresses 1 = Can update its Addresses only if it has any Z305 records. 2 = Can update its Addresses only if it has Z305 records other than ALEPH. 3 = The staff user can update Addresses only if he is connected to a library that includes the patron's home library. If the USER-ADDR-PERMISSION flag is set to 3, the home library is a mandatory field when creating a new global patron.

The variables are organized in the header according to modules. In other words, all the variables that relate to Acquisitions appeartogether under the Acquisitions title in the header.

❍

Default Values and Validationtab100 has a mechanism for assignment of default values and validation of values. The header file specifies the default value andthe permitted values.

❍

Editing and Checking tab100 with UTIL G/4/100UTIL G/4/100 can be used to edit or check and display tab100.

In check mode, full validation is performed on all tab100 values before display; it is checked whether or not:

The tab100 line contains a "=" sign (e.g. CREATE-Z30H=Y); a line without a "=" sign is ignored.1.

The tab100 variable is allowed for the specific tab100 that is being loaded (e.g. variables which are not allowed for tab100of $data_tab must NOT be set there, only in tab100 of $alephe_tab).

2.

The value of a variable does not exceed its maximum length.3.

The value of a variable receives one of the permitted values only (if defined).4.

Numeric variables indeed receive a numeric value, which is also in the permitted range (if defined).5.

Whenever an invalid value is encountered, an error message is displayed and the predefined default is used.

❍

tab100 in ALEPHADMtab100 can be accessed from ALEPHADM, by adding it to the table tab_alephadm.lng:

tab tab100 N L Library settings for various options

❍

tab100 Release Notes

The User Sharing variable determines whether the patron records participate in the shared or non-shared section of the database(USR00).

Possible values are: Y or N.

Y = If the ADM library is defined as USER-SHARING=Y, then the patrons created by this library will be displayed in the PatronList when a staff user is connected to ANY library that is defined as "Y" in the USER SHARING variable.

N = Patrons belonging to an ADM library which defines the variable USER-SHARING=N in tab100 will not be included in this

1.

10.



Patron List. If the ADM library defines USER-SHARING=N, then the patrons created by this library will be displayed in thePatron List only when a staff user is connected to this specific library.

The default value is N.

The variable OFFLINE-CASH-TRANS has been added to tab100. This variable determines whether or not offline circulationregisters cash transactions. This depends on the OFFLINE-CASH-TRANS variable.


Y = The system registers cash transactions triggered by circulation transactions effected through offline circulation.

N = The system does not register cash transactions triggered by circulation transactions effected through offline circulation.

The default value is Y.

2.

DEFAULT-ITEM-BARCODE has been removed (it is available as a fix in 12.2, 14.2, but not in 15).

The system has retained the functionality, but it is now set in the ADM library's /tab/tab_checksum table. One of the followingtwo routines must be listed for the CSCR-Z30-BARCODE instance:

checksum_create_z30_by_seq■

checksum_create_z30_by_doc■

3.

The CATALOGER-IP variable determines whether the staff name or the station ID is used.

The station's IP address is taken from the network setup.

If CATALOGER-IP is "Y", either the station ID is used, or the station's internal IP address is registered.

If CATALOGER-IP is "N", the Staff User ID is used.

4.

A new variable, PHOTO-SLIP-STYLE, has been added to tab100. This is used for printing photocopy request slips (cir-22). If asuitable item is available, a pickup slip is printed. Otherwise, a wait letter is printed. This variable relates to the list of items thatare included in the print slip.

Possible values are: 1, 2 or 3.

1 = list all "like" items in the photocopy request slip. This means that availability is not checked.

2 = list only available "like" items in the photocopy request slip. This implies that availability is checked.

3 = list the first of the available "like" items in the photocopy request slip. This implies that availability is checked.

The default value is 1.

The Check Available parameter for b_cir_22 has been removed as a result of this flag.

5.

A new variable, RECALL-METHOD, has been added to tab100. It determines whether or not renewals and recalls will updatethe due date.


1 = Let renewals update the z36_due_date and let recalls update it, if the recall-due-date is earlier. Use the z36_original_due_dateas the "due-date-before-recall". (Let renewals update it.)

2 = Let renewals update the z36_due_date. Do not actually update the z36_due_date to the recall-due-date. But, if the latter isearlier than the z36_due_date, use the latter as the "effective due date". Leave the z36_original_due_date as the actual, original

6.



due date. (Do not let renewals update it).

3 = Same as "2", except always use the recall-due-date as the effective due-date, even if it's later.


The variable VENDOR-STRUCTURED-ADDR has been deleted. It is no longer needed now that XML/XSL printing is beingused.

The GUI form always contains 5 fields + Z72-VENDOR-STRUCTURED-ADDRESS.

7.

A new variable, TIMEZONE-ADJ, has been added to tab100. This variable is used to set the "current time" of a library inrelation to the server time, where a plus sign (+) adds one hour and a minus sign (-) subtracts one hour. This adjustment affectscirculation-related activities in an ADM library.

Possible values are: 0, + or -.

+ = adds one hour and a minus sign.

- = subtracts one hour. This adjustment affects circulation-related activities in an ADM library.


8.

A new variable, LOST-LOAN-CREDIT-METHOD, was added to tab100.

Determines which cash transactions are credited when a lost loan is returned.

Possible values are: 1 or 2.

1 = when a lost loan is returned (that is an item which has a Z36 record with status "L"), all associated cash transactions exceptthose with "waived" status are credited. This means "C"losed, "T"ransferred or "O"pen transactions are credited.

2 = when a lost loan is returned, all "T"ransferred or "O"pen transactions are credited. Closed transactions are not creditedautomatically.


9.

A new variable, PHOTO-SLIP-STYLE, was added to tab100, for printing photocopy request slips (cir-22). If a suitable item isavailable, a pickup slip is printed. Otherwise, a wait letter is printed. This variable relates to the list of items that are included inthe print slip. For printing photocopy request slips (cir-22). If a suitable item is available, a pickup slip is printed. Otherwise, await letter is printed. This variable relates to the list of items that are included in the print slip.


1 = list all "like" items in the photocopy request slip. This means that availability is not checked.

2 = list only available "like" items in the photocopy request slip. This implies that availability is checked.

3 = list the first of the available "like" items in the photocopy request slip. This implies that availability is checked.


10.

A new tab100 variable, FORCE-USE-Z07, determines whether or not a Z07 record is triggered for a record when the linkedrecords from other libraries are updated. For example, if the variable is set to Y in the administrative library, a Z07 will betriggered for the administrative record when the linked bibliographic and/or holdings records are modified. This new feature doesnot affect the previously (and continuing) automatic creation of a Z07 record in the BIB library when a linked Z30 record isupdated.


Y = A Z07 record will be created in the library (e.g., ADM or HOL) although the document being updated does NOT belong to it

11.



(e.g., a Z07 will be created in an ADM library when a record in a BIB library to which it is linked, is updated).

The default value is N.

A new variable, HOLD-REQ-PROCESS-STATUS, determines which "like copies" can satisfy a hold request.


Y - Only items with the same process status as the item on which the hold request was made can satisfy the request.

N - All items can satisfy the request, regardless of their process status.


12.

A new variable, VENDOR-SHARING, has been added to tab100. This variable, in tab100 of each ADM library, is used to definewhether vendors who haven't been assigned a relevant sublibrary/order unit will be displayed in the vendor list when a filter isactive on the vendor list.

Possible values are: 0 or 1.

0 = this is the default if this parameter is not defined;

When a filter is active on the vendor list, vendors that have not been assigned a sublibrary/order unit are considered"general use" vendors and are therefore displayed in the list.

1.

When a vendor is assigned to an order, the vendors that do not have any sublibrary/order unit are considered "general use"vendors and therefore can be assigned to the order; if the vendor has even one sublibrary/order unit, it must have asublibrary/order unit that matches the sublibrary/order unit of the order.

2.

1 = this can be useful for sites that have many vendor records that are irrelevant to a particular library. This can happen when thesite is sharing a single vendor table for multiple ADM libraries, or the site has done a batch load of general


13.

USER-ADDR-PERMISSIONThis new variable defines which types of patrons can have their addresses updated by the staff user.

Possible values are:

0 - Update of patron's addresses is based on standard permissions. Any staff user that has privileges to update and view a patron'saddresses can view and update the patron's address.

1 - The staff user can update the patron's address only if the patron already has local information records.

2 - The staff user can update the patron's address only if the patron has local information records other than ALEPH.

3 - The staff user can update the patron's address only if is he connected to a library that includes the patron's home library. If theUSER-ADDR-PERMISSION flag is set to 3, the home library is a mandatory field when creating a new global patron.


Note that the patron's address can be viewed even if it can not be updated.

14.

USER-IDS-PERMISSIONThis new variable defines which types of patrons can have their additional IDs viewed and updated by the staff user.


0 - Update of patron's IDs is based on standard permissions. Any staff user that has privileges to update and view a patron's IDscan view and update the patron's IDs.

15.



1 - The staff user can view and update patron's IDs only if the patron already has local information records. If the patron does nothave any local information records, his IDs can not even be viewed by the staff user.

2 - The staff user can view and update patron's IDs only if the patron has local information records other than ALEPH. If thepatron does not have such local information records, his IDs can not even be viewed by the staff user.

3 - The staff user can view and update the patron's IDs only if is he connected to a library that includes the patron's home library.If the USER-IDS-PERMISSION flag is set to 3, the home library is a mandatory field when creating a new global patron.

4 - The staff user can view and update the patron's IDs only if he is connected to a library that includes one of the sublibraries inthe patron's list of locally privileged libraries.


Note that if the patron's IDs can not be updated by the staff user, they will not be viewable either.

USER-PERMISSIONThis new variable defines which types of patron records are updateable by the staff user.


0 - Update of global patron records is based on standard permissions. Any staff user that has privileges to update global patronrecords can update the patron's record.

3 - The staff user can update global patron records only if he is connected to a library that includes the patron's home library. If theUSER-PERMISSION flag is set to 3, the home library is a mandatory field when creating a new global patron. The global patronrecord can be viewed by the staff user even if it can not be updated.


Note that patron records are viewable even when they are not updateable.

16.

CENTRAL-LIBRARYThe variable CENTRAL-LIBRARY has been removed. Whether or not the library is the central library is indicated by theexistence of the Z300 table in the library.

17.

RLIN input and output directories now reside in tab100 and not in the prof_library table as before.18.

INVENTORY-NUMBERThis new variable defines how the item's inventory number is handled.

Z52 - The inventory number is not mandatory and can be left blank. However, if it is used it can be assigned from a systemcounter. If ? followed by a Z52-sequence is entered (e.g. ?inventory-number or ?inventory-number-2), an inventory number isallocated by using the relevant Z52-sequence (e.g inventory-number inventory-number-2). If text is entered into this field, the textwill be used as the inventory number.

Clicking the Refresh button in the Item Form (Cataloging / Items tab / Items List root / lower pane) can be used to allocate a newinventory number.

Z311 - The inventory number is not mandatory and can be left blank. If it is used then it is based on Z311 and on the tabletab_z311.

Clicking the Refresh button in the Item Form can be used to allocate a new inventory number.

Z313 - The inventory number is not mandatory and can be left blank. If it is used then it is based on Z313 in the followingmanner:

If a mere question mark (?) is entered in the Inventory Number field, a Z313 record with Z313-USED = N, a blankZ313-SUB-LIBRARY and a blank Z313-SERIES is searched for. Once found, only the fieldZ313-INVENTORY-NUMBER is copied to Z30-INVENTORY-NUMBER.

■

19.



If a question mark (?) followed by a series name is entered in the field Inventory Number, a Z313 record with Z313-USED= N, Z313-SUB-LIBRARY = Z30-SUB-LIBRARY and Z313-SERIES = <Series> is searched for. Once found, thecombination Z313-SUB-LIBRARY + Z313-SERIES + Z313-INVENTORY-NUMBER is assigned toZ30-INVENTORY-NUMBER.

For example, if ?SER1 is entered in the field Inventory Number for an item of sublibrary UEDUC, and a Z313 record withZ313-USED = N, Z313-SUB-LIBRARY = UEDUC, Z313-SERIES = SER1 and Z313-INVENTORY-NUMBER =000000095 is found, Z30-INVENTORY-NUMBER will receive the value "UEDUCSER1 000000095".

■

If text that does not begin with a question mark is entered in the Inventory Number field, an error message is displayed.■

When clicking the Refresh button in the Item Form (Cataloging / Items tab / Items List root / lower pane), an inventory number isnot assigned, in order not to use a Z313 record in vain (for example, if Cancel is used later on).

It is important to note that once an inventory number has been assigned to an item it can not be changed or reverted.

When an item that has a Z313 based inventory number is deleted, the behavior of the Z313 record depends on the contents of theitem's internal note.

If one of the values "recover", "RECOVER" or "Recover" is found there, the Z313 record will be freed. This means that theZ313-USED field will revert to N and the item related fields will be cleared, making this Z313 record re-assignable to any otheritem.

If none of these values is found in the internal note field, the Z313 record will remain "in use", and only the withdrawal date thatwill be added to the record will mark that the record's item no longer exists. The Z313 will not be assignable to another item.

Note that in order to use the Z313 option, the triggers Z313_TRIGGER and Z313_TRIGGER_1 must exist in the ADM library'sfile list, and must be activated using UTIL A/17/6/2 Enable Trigger.

The default value is Z52.

REFUND-RATE <x> <y> <z>This new variable determines the refund-rate for lost item handling/replacement/notice charges.

When an item that has been declared lost is returned by the patron, the charges that were made when the item was declared lost arerefunded. Using this variable can set what percentage of each charge will be refunded.

Possible values are three numbers separated by a single space, each one up to three digits long. The numbers are the refund ratesof the handling cost (transaction number 40), the replacement cost (transaction number 41) and the notice cost (transaction number42) respectively. A value of 0 means that no refund will be made, and a value of 100 means that a full refund will be made.

Default values are 100 100 0.

20.

ADDRESS-ZIP-STYLEThe format of patrons' zip codes in printouts is now defined in the XML translation file global.trn in the form_eng directory. Thisused to be defined in the tab100 variable ADDRESS-ZIP-STYLE. This variable has been removed from tab100.

21.

OWN-FILTERA new variable, OWN-FILTER, has been added to tab100. It activates the display filter based on tab_own. OWN-FILTER hastwo possible values:

Y - The display filter of holding records in the Cataloging Overview tree, record manager and HOL records tab in the Catalogingmodule lower pane, based on tab_own, is activated.

N - The filter is not active. This is the default value.

22.

CHANGE-DUE-HOUR and RecallsWhen CHANGE-DUE-HOUR is set to Y, the recall due hour will now also be adjusted according to the library's opening hours.

23.



ITEM-BARCODE-OR-CALL-NOA new tab100 variable, ITEM-BARCODE-OR-CALL-NO, disables or enables item retrieval by call number when using the ItemBar (Circulation and Cataloging GUI).


Y - Item retrieval by call number is enabled (in the Item Bar in Circulation or Cataloging GUI).

N - Item retrieval by call number is disabled (i.e. there is an attempt to retrieve the item by barcode; if it fails, no further attempt ismade to retrieve by call number).


24.

pc_tab_cat_conv

This new table has been added to the UTIL Q menu.

11.

aleph_start

This ALEPH table has been renamed. It was previously called aleph_start_505.1.

Commencing with version 16, the Oracle database is created with the UTF8 character set. Previous versions used US7ASCII.Therefore, in the /alephe/aleph_start file:

setenv NLS_LANG American_America.US7ASCII

has been changed to

setenv NLS_LANG American_America.UTF8

and the following lines have been added:

setenv NLS_SORT BINARY setenv NLS_COMP BINARY setenv LC_COLLATE C

2.

The ORACLE_ALERT_LOG variable has been added to aleph_start to point to the Oracle alert log.3.

An environment variable has been added to aleph_start, to set the path where a Course Reading file is saved (this refers to the"Send by mail to Course Reading administration" option on the Basket page in the Web OPAC). If the variable is not defined, thefile is saved in alephe_scratch (as it was until version 16).

4.

A new line for setenv due_date_format has been added.

This environment variable controls which date displays in the Web and GUI when there is a single Due Date column. This settinginteracts with the RECALL-METHOD setup, which sets which dates in the loan record change because of a recall.

The possible values are:

"1": Display a single "effective due date", based on RECALL-METHOD.

"2": Display the recall-due-date, if there is one (even though it might be later than the regular due date); otherwise, displaythe z36_due_date.

"3": Always display only the z36_due_date; (for recall methods 2 and 3 for RECALL-METHOD this would mean that therecall-due-date will never be displayed).

"4": Display both: the regular due date and, if there is one, the recall-due-date.

Note: value "1" is recommended. If this line is set in aleph_start (and it must be set there for batch jobs), there is no need to setthis line in www_server.conf or pc_server_defaults.

5.

The variable SIP2_SERVER_PORT has been added to determine the server for the SIP2 Self-check.6.

12.



The standard port for the SIP2 server is: 533${ALEPH_SUB_PORT} but the port can be defined individually using theenvironment variable SIP2_SERVER_PORT in aleph_start.

The variable SIP2_STARTUP_LIBS has been added to determine the default ADM library for the SIP2 Self-check.7.

The following variable was added to support Patron verification type 02 based on LDAP lookup:

setenv aleph_authen $alephm_dev/alephm/source/authen

8.

There are new environment variable settings which define the library which is used for staff user and patron Oracle tables, and thelibrary which handles "messages" (z105 and ue_11). These are not necessarily the same libraries, and in installations that have oneBIB and one ADM, these will probably be the ADM library. The environment variables must be defined in aleph_start:

setenv pw_library USR00 setenv usr_library USR00 setenv z105_library USR00

9.

The variable setenv icelandic_name_support has been removed from aleph_start. This variable was used for Icelandic namesorting, which is now defined in section 55 of tab_filing.

10.

A directory on the server for saving items from the basket can now be defined in /alephe/aleph_start.

In the following example, the basket items will be saved under /tmp/save_cr:

setenv TMPDIR ${ALEPH_MOUNT}/a${ALEPH_VERSION }_$ALEPH_COPY/tmp setenv FILE_TMPDIR $TMPDIR setenv SAVE_FILE_TMPDIR ${ALEPH_MOUNT}/a16_1/tmp/save_cr

If a directory is not set in aleph_start, the items will be saved in alephe_scratch.

11.

In order to facilitate the use of Sun utilities (for example, top) within the ALEPH environment, the following line has been addedto the aleph_start file of the alephe directory:

setenv PATH "$PATH/opt/SUNWspro/prod/bin:/usr/X/bin:/usr/local/bin:"

12.

A new environment parameter, include_all_aut, was added to the table:

setenv include_all_aut Y

If the parameter is set to "Y", all entries which are connected to authority records will be displayed in the browse list of the WebOPAC, even if there are no records connected to this access. This applies only to codes using Z01 and not to those using Z0102.Z0102 continues to use the XYZ mechanism.

If the parameter is set to "N", the entries will not be displayed. For example, the following will not be displayed:

450 0 L $$aFolk$$xCollectors and collecting$$xFolk and stories

This variable is optional and its default is N.

13.

The MESSAGE_STARTUP_LIBS line in aleph_start has been updated from:

setenv MESSAGE_STARTUP_LIBS "usm01 usm50"

to

setenv MESSAGE_STARTUP_LIBS "$z105_library"

14.

The following new switch in aleph_start determines the ILL mode of operation:

setenv ill_mode EXTERNAL

This switch, when set to EXTERNAL, will cause the Web OPAC to use external ILL modules. If ALEPH's ILL capabilities are tobe used, this parameter must be set to INTERNAL.

15.

The following new switch in aleph_start determines the host and port number on which an external ILL module can be found:

setenv ill_ext_server ram47:12001

The switch is used only if ill_mode is set to EXTERNAL.

16.

aleph_shutdown

This ALEPH table has been renamed. It was previously called aleph_shutdown_505.

13.



aleph_startup

This ALEPH table has been renamed. It was previously called aleph_startup_505.1.

Parameters can now be defined for Z07 and Z01012 creation in the indexing process (ue_08).2.

The variable SIP2_STARTUP_LIBS has been added to determine the default ADM library for the SIP2 Self-check.3.

The WWW_SERVER_M_PORT port definition was changed to WWW_SERVER_PORT. The related variable l_server_m_portwas renamed to l_www_server_port.

4.

14.

tab_tree_view

This table has been removed. It is not required by the Version 16 GUI interface.

15.

tab_aut

The limit of lines in the tab_aut table has been increased from 50 to 100.1.

In order to enable partial matching (without subdivision) of BIB headings with AUT records, "XYZ" lines have been added totab11_acc, tab00.lng, tab20 and tab_aut. See section on Subdivisions in Indexing for fuller details.

2.

16.

tab_sub_library_address

From this version, the tab_sub_library_address table can be defined either in the tab directory of alephe library or in the tab directory ofeach ADM library. The system checks first for the table in the tab directory of the ADM library. If no table is found it checks for thetable in the tab directory of the alephe library.

17.

marc_country_codes

From this version, the marc_country_codes table has been moved from the library's tab directory to the alephe/tab directory. Thistable is the same for the various types of libraries (bibliographic, authorities, and so on) and there is no need to have it at the tabdirectory level of all libraries.

1.

The code mh (Macao) has been removed from the marc_country_codes table. This code has been discontinued.2.

18.

check_doc_line_contents

From this version, the check_doc_line_contents table is indicators-sensitive. Column 2 can now contain five characters instead of three.

19.

tab16

A new fine method, F ("Total days by intervals"), has been added to col. 14 of tab16. The method uses the intervals set up in thenew tab_late_return table to calculate fines.

1.

A new fine method, R ("First day fixed, then open days"), has been added to col. 14 of tab16. The fine for the first overdue day isa fixed sum of 2.00 (hardcoded). No other fines are added for the first day. From the second day onward, the calculation is likefine method 2 (open days).

2.

Two columns have been added to tab16. Column 24 determines the lower threshold, under which the fine will be treated as a zerofine. Column 25 allows for the addition of a fixed amount to any calculated fine.

3.

The setup in tab16 can now include up to 500 combinations of due dates or hours per sublib/item status/patron status instead of200 as previously.

4.

20.



tab_late_return

A new table, tab_late_return, has been added. It defines late return periods and amounts for late return fines, when fine method "F" isset in col.14 in tab16. Using method "F", a set rate is charged for a time period. The sums set up in this table, are treated as an actualamount and not as a ratio per day.

21.

tab_check_circ

A new entry, b-cir-77, was added, using the program check_circ_1_b. This entry was added to enable the service cir-77 to search forZ305 records containing delinquencies. If any Z305 record containing delinquencies was found, the service updates the z303_delinq_n_3field with the value 99.

22.

tab_checksum

New item barcode create routines have been added:

Item barcode - works in conjunction with the last-barcode-number counter in UTIL/G/2 (checksum_create_z30_by_seq)■

Item barcode - by Z30-REC-KEY (ADM+Seq. - checksum_create_z30_by_doc_no)■

Item barcode - site-specific ICL (works in conjunction with barcode-sequence counter in UTIL/G/2 -checksum_create_z30_icl)

■

1.

A new entry for the creation of Issue-Item Barcode, CSCR-Z30-BARCODE-ISS, was added. This entry is used for Issue-Itemsgenerated by Prediction Patterns.

2.

The OCLC server creates Z30-BARCODE using the checksum mechanism. It uses the CSCR-OCLC-Z30-BARCODE routine.3.

23.

tab_filing

For more information on new or updated filing routines, see the Indexing Release Notes, Filing Routines section.1.

A new section, 55, has been added to tab_filing to support Icelandic style name sorting:

55 icelandic_z303_name 55 char_conv BORROWER-NAME-KEY 55 to_lower 55 pack_spaces

2.

24.

tab_word_breaking

Procedure 90 is used when a Word search query is parsed.1.

A new word breaking routine has been added to tab_word_breaking - compress_h_quote. The routine strips the Hebrew " -inverted commas between two Hebrew letters, in words used as abbreviations (such as Tana"kh - The Bible).

2.

The word breaking routine dl_sf_frce_dlmtr was renamed to force_delimiter.3.

25.

tab05

The tab05 table - used to define the captions for links between records, when the links are defined using the LKR field with subfield 'r' -is now language-sensitive. The appropiate language code should be suffixed to the table, for example, tab05.lng.

26.

tab_service

Information about the 856 field has been discarded from tab_service.1.

27.



There is a new service in tab_service, www_f_service_find_m_acc, which activates find-m on bases which are defined in theenvironment variable www_parallel_search_base (www_server.conf) separated by "-".

2.

tab31

The new column 19 in tab31 defines the default priority for hold requests. As a result of this addition, the following environmentvariables have been removed from the alephe pc_server_defaults and www_server.conf tables.

z37_priority_circ❍

z37_priority_xml_circ❍

www_z37_priority❍

z37_priority_opac❍

28.

path_convert

The path_convert table is now located in the library's tab directory, and includes only the section relevant to the particular library. Forease of backward compatibility, the table can still be located in alephe/tab; the system checks the library/tab directory first, and ifpath_convert is not found there, then the system checks the alephe/tab directory.

29.

tab_z30_sortA new sorting procedure for Issue Sort 04 has been implemented:

This routine sorts the issues by sublibrary, then by enumeration and chronology. If chronology or enumeration data is missing,then the routine sorts the issues by sublibrary, description and item sequence number.

1.

A new sorting routine, sort 06, for issues and non-issue items has been implemented:

For issues: This routine sorts the issues by sublibrary when the preferred sublibrary is according to its IP. tab_attr_sub_librarytype 7 defines which sublibrary will be first in the list.

In addition the sort is built according to: sublibrary name, collection code, chronological-i, chronological-j, chronological-k,description and copy-id.

For non-issues: This routine sorts the non-issues items by sublibrary when the preferred sublibrary is according to its IP.tab_attr_sub_library type 7 defines which sublibrary will be first in the list. In addition the sort is built according to sublibraryname + collection code + item description + copy number.

2.

A new sorting routine, sort 08 for issues, has been implemented:

This routine sorts the issues by 85x, like routine 07, with the addition of Z30-COPY-ID. The sort parameters are: 85x-type,sublibrary, collection, linking-number, copy-ID.

If 85x-type is 4 or 5, the sort parameter is supp-index-o.

If one of the chronological fields is not blank and one of the enumeration fields is not blank, then the sort parameters arechronology and enumeration.

If all the chronological fields are blank, the sort parameter is description.

3.

The header of tab_z30_sort was updated. Routines 07, 08 for ISSUE items are sorted as follows:

------------------------------------------------------ ! 07 - by 85x ! ------------------------------------------------------ ! 85x-type+

4.

30.



! sublibrary+ ! collection+ ! linking-number+ ! if 85x-type is 4 or 5 then ! supp-index-o+ ! if enumeration not spaces then ! enumeration+ ! if chronology not spaces then ! chronology+ ! if enumeration not spaces or ! chronology not spaces then ! description. ! ------------------------------------------------------ ! 08 - by 85x [like 07, with addition of Z30-COPY-ID] ! ------------------------------------------------------ ! 85x-type+ ! sublibrary+ ! collection+ ! linking-number+ ! copy-id+ ! if 85x-type is 4 or 5 then ! supp-index-o+ ! if enumeration not spaces then ! enumeration+ ! if chronology not spaces then ! chronology+ ! if enumeration not spaces or ! chronology not spaces then ! description.

A new sorting routine, sort 09, for issue items has been implemented. The routine sorts the issue items by vendor then bysublibrary. To support this change, the following line has been added:

ITEM-6 A 09 A 09

5.

tab_filing_call_no

A new filing routine has been implemented: None. This routine builds the call number key as the call number itself.

31.

pc_server_defaults

A new variable has been added to pc_server_defaults: pc_z37_date_to. Its format is <x><nnn>, where the first position is thetime unit code, [M]onths, [D]ays or [Y]ears, and the second is the numneric value. For example: M006 for six months.

The variable determines the default period between the placing of a hold request from the GUI and the end of interest.

1.

A new varialble, pc_item_schedule, was added to pc_server_defaults. This variable controls the number of days displayed in theAdvanced Booking schedule that is now available from the GUI.

2.

The line setenv MTS Y, which was added to pc_server_defaults in version 15, has been removed.3.

The following lines have been removed:

setenv gui_hol_Z103_sort_order

setenv gui_hol_Z103_sort_routine

The functionality is now included in the BIB library's tab_fix_z103 table.

setenv z37_priority_circ

setenv z37_priority_circ

The functionality is now included in the ADM library's tab31 table, and is dependent on item sublibrary and patron status.

4.

32.




This environment variable controls which date displays in the Web and GUI when there is a single Due Date column. This settinginteracts with the RECALL-METHOD setup, which sets which dates in the loan record change because of a recall.







5.

There are new lines in pc_server_defaults:

setenv call_no_support N

This line defines whether or not the system uses the call number instead of the barcode for item identification for Circulation.Libraries that use this setup must have a unique Z30_CALL_NO value for each item, and must have an index on this field. Thisfeature was added in a later release of 14.2, and was not present in 15.2.

setenv ext_bind_ref_no_1 LCNum,010,a setenv ext_bind_ref_no_2 ISBN,020,a

setenv ext_bind_ref_no_3 ISSN,022,a

These lines support the external binding API function that uses service (1602), used by some external binding applications tointerface with ALEPH to retrieve detailed item information.

Note: This feature was added in a later release of 14.2, and was not present in 15.2.

setenv item_hol_tree_style 3

This line defines the display of the ITEM-HOL connection in the Cataloging navigation tree and overview trees :

1 = Do not display the connection between item and HOL record.■

2 = Display items under both the ADM record and under the linked HOL record.■

3 = Display items only under linked HOL record, and display HOL libraries before ADM libraries.■

setenv expand_tree_style 2

This line defines if nodes display open or closed in the Overview tree and in the Cataloging navigation tree:

1 = Do not open, only the selected record node will be visible.■

2 = Open only the record nodes (ADM,BIB and HOL).■

3 = Open all tree nodes (ADM,BIB,HOL,items, order, subscriptions, and so on).■

setenv pc_tree_view_max_branch 10 setenv pc_filter_tree_view_max_branch 99

These lines define the number of leaf nodes (records) that will display in the GUI Navigation Tree; trees are limited to a maximumof 800 lines.

6.



setenv hold_pickup_from_all_items N

If this line is set to Y, when a request is made on an item, the pool of pickup locations will include all the pickup locations intab37 that are defined for all the "like items"; otherwise, the pickup locations will be only those that are defined for the location ofthe item; "like items" are items that have the same enumumeration fields, and are part of the grouping defined in tab100 in thefollowing variables: item status, collection, and sublibrary.

setenv ill_expected_return_date 028

This line is used for setting the default due date when an item is loaned from the ILL service to an ILL partner.

setenv pc_z37_date_to D090

This line defines the default value for the to date (date of last interest) for the Create Hold Request function in the Circulationinterface. The format is <x><nnn>, where x can be D (days), M (months) or Y (years).

# setenv default_recall_type "01"

This line defines the default value for the Recall Type for the Create Hold Request in the Circulation interface.

A new variable has been added: setenv pc_<lkr>_link_format <format-no>.

It allows you to define a short list format for linked records that should not be displayed within the record but in a separate shortlist.

Example:

setenv pc_dn_link_format 01

If the selected format is not defined in the table, the program sets the display to the default type format (usually 00).

7.

The following lines were deleted from the pc_server_defaults table since from now on, the default result limit and the sort limit is1000:

setenv set_result_set_limit 800 setenv pc_sort_limit 800

If the query retrieves more than 1000 records, only the first 1000 will be shown.

8.

The PC_SERVER_MAX_RESPONSE_TIME setting was removed from pc_server_defaults as it was obsolete. The functionalityis already determined by the existing variable:

setenv PC_SERVER_TIMEOUT 60

9.

bib_format

The entries ill-drop-letter-c- and ill-drop-letter-l- were removed.1.

A new entry has been added to bib_format: ill-clear-list (the output form of the new ill-service: ILL Shelf List -ill-12).2.

bib_format defines formats for various administrative printouts. default is a new template name which has been added. If aprogram does not find a specific template (for example, hold-delete-letter), default is used. It is highly recommended that a defaulttemplate be created.

3.

A new entry, cash-export, is required in bib_format. cash-export controls the content of the bibliographic citation in the report thatis created by the service Export Cash Transactions (cash-10).

4.

33.

tab_z701

A new ADM table, tab_z701, which is only available in systems using the ISO ILL Web Interface, has been added as UTIL K/13. Thistable is used to define the potential suppliers list for outgoing ILL requests.

34.

user_function.lng

The user_function.lng table was updated for Serials. The following lines were deleted:

SERIAL L Serials CHECK-IN-LIST L Display fast check-in list

1.

35.



SERIAL L Serials SUBSCR-SHOW L View Copy SERIAL L Serials ITEM-SHOW L Expand item information SERIAL L Serials OPEN-NEXT-ITEM L Open next item SERIAL L Serials SCHEDULE-OPEN-PREV L Open schedule (preview)

The following lines were added to support authorization control in the new Serials interface.

SERIAL L Serials L Group Arrive SERIAL L Serials GROUP-GET L Display Group SERIAL L Serials GROUP-PUT L Update Group SERIAL L Serials GROUP-DELETE L Delete Group SERIAL L Serials GET-SCHEDULE-LIST L Display Preview (Pattern + Level-X) SERIAL L Serials GET-PATTERN-LIST L Display Pattern Level-X SERIAL L Serials CAPTION-GET L Display Caption field SERIAL L Serials CAPTION-TEMPLATE L Get Caption template SERIAL L Serials CAPTION-PUT L Update Caption field SERIAL L Serials CAPTION-DEL L Delete Caption field SERIAL L Serials PATTERN-GET L Display Pattern Level-X field SERIAL L Serials PATTERN-TEMPLATE L Get Pattern Level-X template SERIAL L Serials PATTERN-PUT L Update Pattern Level-X field SERIAL L Serials PATTERN-DEL L Delete Pattern Level-X field SERIAL L Serials INFO-GET L Control Bar (filter libraries)

2.

The user_function.lng table has been updated to support the permission control for the Patron picture functionality. The followingline was added:

USR L User Registration UPDATE-PIC L Update / add new patron's picture

3.

The entries for NAV-MAP are currently only relevant to the ILL module.

Lines that related to the handling of records, are now only relevant for view. For example, the following line:

NAV-MAP L Navigation Map Z30 L Handleitem (Show, Move)

was changed to:

NAV-MAP L Navigation Map Z30 L Viewitem

■

The following entry was removed:

NAV-MAP L Navigation Map VIEW-TREE L Viewtree

This permission controls the view of the Overview trees in all modules and it is controlled by the following new line:

OVERVIEW-TREE L Overview Tree VIEW-TREE L ViewOverview tree

■

4.

The following new entries were added:

Permission to view the Record Manager:

CATALOG L Cataloging VIEW-NAV-TREE L ViewRecord Manager

■

Permission to move records in the Overview Tree of the Cataloging module:

CATALOG L Cataloging MOVE-Z16 L Movesubscription records CATALOG L Cataloging MOVE-Z68 L Moveorder records CATALOG L Cataloging MOVE-Z30 L Moveitem records

■

5.

The following line was deleted

SEAR L SEAR NAVMAP MOVE-TREE-ITEM L Movetree item (order, item...) from adm

Global permission for moving records through the Overview Tree in the Cataloging module is controlled by the following line:

CATALOG L Cataloging MOVE-TREE-ITEM L Moveoption in Overview Tree

6.

A new permission has been added to the user_function.lng table, CATALOG/REMOTE-UPDATE. It is used to restrict the remote7.



update of cataloging records.

The following lines, which are related to Course reading services, were changed from:

WWW-R L Course Reserve Interface P-COURSE-01 L Runningp-course-01 WWW-R L Course Reserve Interface P-COURSE-02 L Runningp-course-02 WWW-R L Course Reserve Interface P-COURSE-03 L Runningp-course-03 WWW-R L Course Reserve Interface P-COURSE-04 L Runningp-course-04 WWW-R L Course Reserve Interface P-COURSE-06 LInstructor Summary

To:

WWW-B-COURSE L Course Reserve Interface 01 L 01 PrintCourse Lists report WWW-B-COURSE L Course Reserve Interface 02 L 02 Printpickup list WWW-B-COURSE L Course Reserve Interface 03 L 03 CRrecords linked to inactive course

WWW-B-COURSE L Course Reserve Interface 04 L 04 CRrecords not linked to course WWW-B-COURSE L Course Reserve Interface 06 LInstructor Summary report

8.

The Items control/Expand item information (ITEM-SHOW) permission controls the display of items in the Cataloging Overviewtree, record manager and Full + link in the Search tab. It can be denied for a particular sublibrary.

9.

The following permission was deleted from the user_function.lng table:

RECORD/BIB-INFO

It was no longer in use.

10.

The following lines have been added to user_function.lng to support triggers for viewing and handling:

DOC-TRIGGER L Record Triggers LIST-ALL L Show all triggers- dept. filter DOC-TRIGGER L Record Triggers LIST L Display all triggers of a record

The DOC-TRIGGER/SHOW permission has been corrected as follows:

DOC-TRIGGER L Record Triggers SHOW L Display record trigger

DOC-TRIGGER/LIST-ALL controls the Triggers node in the Acquisitions/Serials, Circulation and Cataloging GUIs, where alltriggers are shown, filtered by module (CAT, ACQ, SER and so on).

DOC-TRIGGER/LIST controls the Cataloging GUI's triggers that can be seem by opening the Edit menu and clicking theRecord's Triggers command.

11.

The following line has been changed from:

WWW-G L Online Guide MAIN L View ALEPH User Guide

to:

WWW-G L ALEPH User Guide MAIN L View ALEPH User Guide

12.

The following lines are inactive and have therefore been removed:

ITEM L Items Control CHECK-DISCARD L Discard action ITEM L Items Control ITEM-SUMMARY L Display item summary ITEM L Items Control ITEM-H-GET L View item history record ITEM L Items Control BIND-VIEW L View Bind summary information ITEM L Items Control BIND-GET L Display bind record ITEM L Items Control BIND-PUT L Update bind record ITEM L Items Control BIND-ARRIVE L Bind item arrival SERIAL L Serials OPEN-NEXT-ITEM L Open next item

13.

The following lines have been removed:14.



NAV-MAP L Navigation Map ADM L View ADM Node WWW-B-CASH L Services - Cash 04 L 04 Delete paid transactions SERIAL L Serials RECORD-GET L Claim - Display claim SERIAL L Serials RECORD-PUT L Claim - Update claim SELF-SERVICE L Self Service GLOBAL L All subfunctions SELF-SERVICE L Self Service BOR-LIST L Patron status SELF-SERVICE L Self Service BOR-UPDATE L Update local user information SELF-SERVICE L Self Service LOAN L Loan item SELF-SERVICE L Self Service RETURN L Return item SELF-SERVICE L Self Service USR-CREATE L Create new user SELF-SERVICE L Self Service USR-SHOW L Display user information PASSWORD L Staff Privileges UPDATE-AUT L User - Update access rights (Passwords)

In order to match naming conventions of the new GUI interface, the following line was changed from

CATALOG L Cataloging VIEW-NAV-TREE L View Overview Tree

to

CATALOG L Cataloging VIEW-NAV-TREE L View Record Manager

15.

The following lines were added for services:

WWW-B-SDI L Services - SDI 01 L 01 Run SDI WWW-B-CASH L Services - Cash 10 L 10 Export records WWW-B-CASH L Services - Cash 11 L 11 Import records WWW-B-CASH L Services - Cash 12 L 12 Add/Correct VAT SERIAL L Serials/Acq SUBSCR-SHOW L Display Subscription Info SERIAL L Serials CLAIM-LIST L Claims - Display List SERIAL L Serials CLAIM-GET L Claims - Display Claim SERIAL L Serials CLAIM-REPLACE L Claims - Register vendor's reply SERIAL L Serials CLAIM-DELETE L Claims - Delete SERIAL L Serials UNARRIVE L Items - Unarrive

Note: The UNARRIVE line is listed twice, under Items and under Group.

16.

The following lines have been added but they are not yet effective:

WWW-B-SYS L Services - System 01 L 01 Restart servers WWW-B-SYS L Services - System 02 L 02 Rebuild Print Templates Package WWW-B-SYS L Services - System 03 L 03 Rebuild Cataloging TablesPackage

17.

The following line has been deleted. It controlled both "Quick Cat" and "Budgets" which are unrelated.

COM L Budget Usage GLOBAL L All subfunctions

18.

The following lines were changed from:

NAV-MAP L Navigation Map GLOBAL L All subfunctions

NAV-MAP L Navigation Map z30 L View item NAV-MAP L Navigation Map Z16 L View subscription NAV-MAP L Navigation Map Z68 L View order NAV-MAP L Navigation Map Z36 L View loan

to

NAV-MAP L Navigation Map GLOBAL L All subfunctions NAV-MAP L Overview Tree z30 L View item NAV-MAP L Overview Tree Z16 L View subscription NAV-MAP L Overview Tree Z68 L View order NAV-MAP L Overview Tree Z36 L View loan

19.

pc_tab_exp_field.lng36.



There are additional values for the SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT menu of pc_tab_exp_field.lng. Options 90-95 are used for serialonline claims that are sent via EDI and supported by the program.

DO NOT USE values 90 to 95 for any other formats.

SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT L EDI claim - missing issue 90 SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT L EDI claim - wrong issue supplied 91 SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT L EDI claim - damaged copy 92 SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT L EDI claim - too many copies received 93 SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT L EDI claim - insufficient copies received 94 SERIAL-CLAIM-FORMAT L EDI claim - other reason 95

1.

There are two new entries in this table:

ACQ-VENDOR-SEARCH-MODE - Search Mode combo for GUI-ACQ-vendor list■

ACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE - Search Mode combo for GUI-ACQ-budget list

These two entries replace the old definition of window.dat.

■

2.

In order to support the additional two new sorting routines 06 and 08, relevant entries must be defined in pc_tab_exp_field.lng.

For example, if you set sorting routine 06 in tab_z30_sort:

ITEM-5 A 07 A 06

the following line must be added to pc_tab_exp_field.lng:

ITEM-SORT-TYPE Sublibrary/Coll.+ Preferred Library (by IP) ITEM-5

3.

A new menu has been added to pc_tab_exp_field.lng: ILL-EXT-REQ-STATUS

This menu contains a list of outgoing request status codes and their translations to text.

Note that this list is used in the WEB OPAC-Library Card-ILL Total and Active Requests list. Now, instead of codes for the ILLrequest status, a text is displayed. Note that this new menu, ILL-EXT-REQ-STATUS, is used when the ILL mode is external(WEB-ILL module).

If the ILL mode is internal (GUI-ILL), the menu ILL-REQ-UPD-STATUS is used for the code translations.

4.

The following entry has been changed from:

ACQ_INDEX_TYPE L Order Number 2 GON

to:

ACQ_INDEX_TYPE L Additional Order GON

5.

The ITEM-PROCESS type "Binding" has been changed to "Bound" - this reflects the usage in tab15.lng.6.

The following lines were added to pc_tab_exp_field.lng to support the sorting routine Sort 09 in tab_z30_sort:

SERIAL-GRP-SORT-TYPE L Vendor/Sublibrary ITEM-6 ITEM-SORT-TYPE L Vendor/Sublibrary ITEM-6

7.

The ACQ_EDI_SEND_METHOD menu has been deleted from pc_tab_exp_field.lng. It is no longer in use since the edi_out_attrtable now takes care of the EDI message send method.

8.

html_template_lng

The html_template_lng table is new and is part of the managing of printforms. It determines which language's printform packages aredownloaded to the client.

37.

form_description.lng38.



This table was added to determine the subject line of an e-mail when a print form is sent by e-mail. The table can be defined per libraryand per language.

The client file print.dat which was used for this up to now has been removed.

www_server.conf

The following lines were removed from the www_server.conf file, as they were not in use any more.

setenv server_q "&server_httpd/Q/&session" setenv www_q_sort_field "01---D02---A" setenv www_thumbnail_height 60 setenv www_thumbnail_width 80 setenv www_q_next "<img src=&icon_path/q-next-page.gif border=0 alt='Nex setenv www_q_next_dim "<img src=&icon_path/q-next-page-dim.gif border=0 alt= setenv www_q_previous "<img src=&icon_path/q-prev-page.gif border=0 alt='Pre setenv www_q_previous_dim "<img src=&icon_path/q-prev-page-dim.gif border=0 alt= setenv www_q_small_dot "<img src=&icon_path/q-small-dot.gif border=0 alt=''>" setenv www_q_error "<img src=&icon_path/q-alert.gif border=0 alt='System

setenv www_q_tip "<img src=&icon_path/q-tip.gif border=0 alt='System Ti setenv server_download "&server_httpd/D/&session" setenv doc_path "&server_httpd/documentation_ setenv server_media "&server_httpd" setenv server_y "&server_httpd/Y/&session"

1.

A new line was added to www_server.conf, www_short_max_no_ext_links. This line determines the maximum number of subfieldu occurrences (URL) that will display in the Web OPAC Brief Display of records. For example:

setenv www_short_max_no_ext_links "10"

2.


This environment variable controls which date displays in the Web and GUI when there is a single Due date column. This settinginteracts with the RECALL-METHOD setup, which sets which dates in the loan record change because of a recall.







3.

The following lines were deleted from the www_server.conf table since from now on, the default result limit and the sort limitfrom now on is 1000:

setenv set_result_set_limit setenv www_sort_limit

4.

A new line was added which determines whether or not copyright information is displayed when a patron uses an external linkthrough the Web OPAC. If it is set to Y, copyright information will be shown to the patron if 856## subfield $$4 is not cataloged.

If show_copyrights is set to N, the system will not show copyright information when a patron uses an external link through WebOPAC.

5.

39.



The following lines have been deleted from the www_server.conf table:

www_short_no_lines www_auto_full

Their functionality was duplicated in the system. They can now be found in Z61 (user profile): Z61-SHORT-NO-LINES describesthe number of records to be displayed per page in the result list. Z61-AUTO-FULL describes the number of records to bedisplayed in full view immediately, without the intermediate step of the Brief View.

6.

tab_ill_unit.lng

The alephe/tab/tab_ill_unit.lng table defines which ILL Centers will be displayed in the drop-down list when the ILL Center link isclicked. The server address of each ILL Center is defined in this table.

40.

tab15

A defunct request type for tab15 has been reinstated, type T. It applies to both hold requests (col 8) and to photocopy requests (col 9) .

The item availability is not checked when a request is placed, because requests are always allowed. However, for request-related servicessuch as cir-12 (Call Slips for Hold Requests) and cir-22 (Photocopy Request Slips) and ue_06 (online printing of request slips), the itemis not considered requestable and a printout is not produced.

41.

tab_attr_sub_libraryA new attribute type, type 8, has been added to tab_attr_sub_library. This facilitates the use of individual cash receipt counters byIP address/station ID.

The previous mechanism, namely, taking the cash receipt number based on the UTIL/G/2 counter last-cash-receipt-no, is still inplace. It is used if type 8 is not defined in tab_attr_sub_library. If type 8 is defined in tab_attr_sub_library, the cash receipt numberis based on the UTIL/G/2 counter last-cash-rec-<suffix> instead.

The name of the IP address/station ID registered as type 8 has to match the suffix of last-cash-rec-<suffix>.

1.

A new attribute type has been added : type 7 - preferred sublibrary for items sorting routine 06 (which is defined in tab_z30_sort).

Type 7 defines which sublibrary will be used first when sorting the items list by sorting routine 06.

Only one sublibrary code can be defined for this type in column 3.

This type can also be used in order to associate a workstation with a specific sublibrary. This setup is used to determine the sendersublibrary for a Transfer Slip between sublibraries.

2.

42.

alephe/unicode

All references to ANSEL have been replaced by MARC-8 in tab_character_conversion_line and the table names. The programsnow refer only to MARC-8 although later releases of Version 15.2 were dual, and both ANSEL and MARC-8 could be used.

All references in tab_character_conversion_line and file names must be renamed accordingly.

1.

Two new tables have been added for the handling of Extended Arabic and Extended Cyrillic character sets:

marc8_ext_ara_to_unicodemarc8_ext_rus_to_unicode

2.

A new character conversion table named 5426_to_Unicode has been added to the /alephe/unicode directory in order to convert theISO-5426 character set to UTF.

To be able to use this conversion procedure in the Catalog GUI (import records), carry out the following steps:

Insert the following line into ./alephe/unicode/tab_character_conversion_line:1.

3.

43.



DIA_TO_UNICODE2 ##### L line_sb2line_utf 5426_to_Unicode

Insert the following line into pc_cat_conv_marc:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> MARC_FRNCH pc_cat_conv_marc DIA_TO_UNICODE2

2.

Insert the following line into the GUI setup (in .\Catalog\Tab\Catalog.ini):

ConvertN=L,MARC FRENCH,REMOTE,MARC_FRNCH

3.

When you have completed the above steps, you will be able to convert the ISO-5426 character set to UTF by selecting theMARC_FRNCH option.

Warnings regarding duplicate definitions for UNICODE values in the marc8_lat_to_unicode table can now be seen via a newutility, UTIL/P/6.

4.

The note in marc8_*_to_unicode tables, NOTE! THE TABLE MUST BE SORTED ON THE SECOND COLUMN , has been takenout. When converting from UTF to MARC8 the programs take the first occurrence in the second column that matches the Unicodeinput character. It is possible to rearrange the tables so that the line with the value desired for export precedes other lines for thesame Unicode character. MARC 8 values do not have to be sorted.

5.

pc_tab_items_fast_cat.lng

The pc_tab_items_fast_cat.lng table has been removed from the XXX50 library's /tab directory. It is no longer functional, now thatCataloging and Items are in the same module.

44.

tab11_acc

The setup of tab11_acc tables in the BIB and AUT libraries must be updated.

In previous versions, when the system did not find a match between a subject heading in the bibliographic library and a heading inthe authority library, the subdivisions (subfields $v, $x, $y and $z) from the bibliographic heading were automatically stripped.The system continued searching for a match without them in order to find the more general term.

From this version on, this is not carried out automatically by the system but is setup-dependent. Full details on the setup arelocated under Release Notes | Cataloging.

1.


2.

The following lines were added to the table:

155## GNR 455## GNR -wi

The following lines are no longer assigned to the SBD index code but to other index codes:

180## XSD (General Subdivisions) 181## GSD (Geographic Subdivisions) 182## CSD (Chronological Subdivisions) 185## FSD (Form Subdivisions) 480## XSD -wi (General Subdivisions) 481## GSD -wi (Geographic Subdivisions) 482## CSD -wi (Chronological Subdivisions) 485## FSD -wi (Form Subdivisions)

This was done to improve the facilitation of NACO checks.

3.

In USM10/tab/tab11_acc, the indication for a non-filing indicator was added to all occurrences of the 430 field; that is, the value"2" was inserted in Col. 8. This is in keeping with the AUT manual, and is parallel to 130 (which already had a non-filingindicator defined).

4.

45.

tab3946.



The structures of tab39 and tab41 have been changed. Until now the tables were split in two. The first part had the standard tablestructure with 11 columns (tab39) / 12 columns (tab41). The second part was a two-line call number range with lower and upperboundaries.

The second part (the call number range) has been integrated into the first and now the whole table has the standard table structure. Thenumber of columns was increased from 11 to 13 columns and from 12 to 14 columns. The new columns (5 and 6) have a width of 80characters each.

Both tab39 and tab41 are now fully ALEPHADM-compatible.

tab41

The structures of tab39 and tab41 have been changed. Until now the tables were split in two. The first part had the standard tablestructure with 11 columns (tab39) / 12 columns (tab41). The second part was a two-line call number range with lower and upperboundaries.

The second part (the call number range) has been integrated into the first and now the whole table has the standard table structure. Thenumber of columns was increased from 11 to 13 columns and from 12 to 14 columns. The new columns (5 and 6) have a width of 80characters each.

Both tab39 and tab41 are now fully ALEPHADM-compatible.

47.

tab00.lng


1.

The following lines have been added to tab00.lng to improve the facilitation of NACO checks:

H XSD ACC 11 00 0000 General Subdivisions H GSD ACC 11 00 0000 Geographic Subdivisions H CSD ACC 11 00 0000 Chronological Subdivisions H FSD ACC 11 00 0000 Form Subdivisions

2.

48.

tab20


1.

The maximum number of lines allowed in the tab20 table has been increased from 500 to 2000 lines.2.

49.

tab_oclc

Column 1 of the tab_oclc tables has been enlarged from 4 to 5 characters. This column is used to specify the OCLC server portnumber.

1.

Column 10 of tab_oclc has now two functions:

It places an OWN field in the incoming record from the OCLC server.■

It provides data for the OCLC special fixes from column 5.■

2.

Column 5 can include up to five special fixes. Currently, two fixes are provided:

Insertion of the data from column 10 into the OWN field (oclc_server_new_fix_1).■

Modification /creation of an 001 field with data from column 10 and the record system number (oclc_server_new_fix_2)using the following syntax:

■

3.

50.



<Column 10> <data-system number>

For example:

OCLC-000037197

If column 10 is empty, all the above will be done using Column 2 of tab_z30. If Column 2 of tab_z30 is empty, no OWNfield will be created.

tab_cat_hidden_fields

The new tab_cat_hidden_fields table is used to specify a field or a list of fields that should not be displayed in the Catalog Editor. Inother words, the fields in the tab_cat_hidden_fields are not displayed and for this reason cannot be updated through the Catalogingmodule. This new table is located in the library's tab directory.

51.

tab_move_record

The tab_move_record table of the library's tab directory is a new table used to define the moving routines that are performed whenrecords are moved through the Overview Tree in the Cataloging module.

The following lines in tab_move_record support the full range of available move routines:

ADM ADM move_adm_to_adm Z30 ADM move_z30_to_adm Z16 ADM move_z16_to_adm Z68 ADM move_z68_to_adm ITEMS ADM move_items_to_adm COPIES ADM move_copies_to_adm ORDERS ADM move_orders_to_adm

52.

tab_sip2.conf

This table has been added to support the new SIP2 Self-Check functionality.1.

A new parameter, return_message, has been added to tab_sip2.conf to support a feedback message for returned items whichrequire special handling.

If this parameter is set to Y and one of the following conditions is met during return, the special message 36 (that is, Returnperformed - please put this item into the red box.) from $alephe_root/error.lng/sip2_server instead of message 26 (Item returned)is displayed.

The conditions are:

The item has active hold requests (Z37-record).■

The item has a circulation note in the item record (Z30-NOTE-CIRCULATION) - this can be used in order to identify ILLmaterial.

■

The sublibrary belonging to this Station Identifier / IP-address is not the item's sublibrary. The item has to be transferred tothe item's library (No matching entry for type 3 in column 2 of tab_attr_sub_library).

■

The item is a "short-loan" item. An item is a short-loan item if a "reserved items schedule" is defined for the current date forthis item in

■

The item has active hold requests (Z37-record).■

2.

53.

tab_lssu.conf

This table has been added to support the new LSSU Self-Check functionality.

54.

tab_sip2_translate55.



This table has been added to support the new SIP2 Self-Check functionality.

tab_sc_3m

This table has been removed. Self-Check now works with other tables.

56.

tab_sc_lssu

This table has been removed. Self-Check now works with other tables.

57.

tab_z311

A new ADM table, tab_z311, has been added. This table is used to define the Z311 programs used by the system for the creation of theZ311 counters for z30-call-no, z30-call-no-2 and z30-inventory-number.

58.

library_relation

The USR definition in $alephe_tab/library_relation is obsolete.

Now multi-ADM libraries must use a shared user file.

1.

The PAS relation type has been added.This relation sets the list of libraries that appears in the Access Rights window when creating privileges for a user. Each ADMlibrary defines the libraries its users can modify. Only the libraries in the relation will be shown in the permissions list.

For example, if you have connected to the GUI with an operator whose Z66-USER-LIBRARY is USM50, this is the list oflibraries that will be displayed in the Access Rights window.

PAS USM50 USM01 USM10 USM60

This line also controls the display of libraries listed in the Library field in ALEPH services, and in the Task Manager window inthe Connect to field.

2.

Note that from this version, each entry in the table can hold up to 200 libraries. In previous versions, the limit was 60.3.

59.

taginfo.lng

The taginfo.lng table from the catalog directory has been removed. From this version, tag information is defined in separate files underthe catalog/html directory. For a more detailed explanation on the format for the help files, please refer to the System Librarian chapterof the Cataloging module.

60.

tab_hld_stmt

A new table, tab_hld_stmt, was added to the Administrative library tab directory. This table is consulted when the proceduresexpand_doc_hld_stmt or fix_doc_hld_stmt are invoked for generating holdings summary statements.

Items with a processing status of NP (not published) or NA (not arrived) are not included in the summary statement. This table is used tomap Items whose process status is different from NA or NP which are to be excluded from the summary holdings statement, by mappingthem as if they have a processing status of NP or NA.

This mapping can also be done for items that have a particular sublibrary and/or collection, item status, item process status, and/or gapindicator.

For example: If a library wants to map the code of the process status MI (missing) as NA, then the table will include the following line:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!!!-!!!!!-!!-!!-!-!! ##### ##### ## MI # NA

61.



check_doc_line

The following line was added to the check_doc_line table:

AL XX 563 u 0 -

Subfield $u is a valid subfield for MARC 21 field 563.

1.

Subfield $u is not a valid subfield for MARC 21 field 515. The following line was removed from the check_doc_line table:

AL XX 515 u 0 -

2.

Subfield $y of fields 853/4/5 is repeatable. In keeping with this change, the relevant lines in the check_doc_line table of theholdings library and the administrative libraries have been updated to allow unlimited occurrences. (Previously, this was limited toone occurrence.)

3.

62.

edit_doc_999_aut_<aut_lib>.lng

Until now, if the edit_doc_999_aut_<aut_lib>.lng table did not exist, or was defined incorrectly, the system would display informationas defined in the table edit_doc_999.lng of the relevant AUT library.

From now on, The Authority Record display in the Web OPAC can no longer use the edit_doc_999.lng of the relevant AUT library. TheBIB library must define the edit_doc_999_aut_<aut_lib>.lng table.

63.

edit_doc_999.lng

A new service allows libraries that work with Syndetics bibliographic enrichment data to add cover image displays to the WebOPAC Full View. The cover image stems from the record's ISBN. This service is initialized by adding the value ICON to theedit_doc_999.lng table.

For example:

## ICON D LIcon cover Y E W

1.

The following lines have been changed as follows:

! 1 1 1 !1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 2 13 4 15 16 !!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!-!!!-!-!!!!!-!-!!-!! ## 866## D LSummary Holdings E ## 867## D LHoldings (Suppl) E ## 868## D LHoldings (Indexes) E

2.

A new link type, S, has been added to edit_doc_999.lng.

The S link type modifies a URL with HTML tags so that no copyright warning is shown and no patron authorization is checked.The S link type is designed to be used in free-text fields.

It is placed in column 10 of edit_doc_999.lng as shown in the following example:

!1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 2 13 4 15 16 !!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!-!!!-!-!!!!!-!-!!-!! ## 500## D LGen. Note Y S E

3.

64.

pc_tab_short.lng

In order to support multiple brief formats, the first column of the table was changed from ALPHA (which was used to determine theALPHA, and now obsolete) to Format.

Here is an example:

!1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 !!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!!!!!-!!!!!!-!!!!!!-!!!!!!-!!!!!!-!!!-!!-!!!-!!!-!!!-

65.



!!! 00 Doc no. 1 SUM 010 01 C08 00 Call No 2 050## LOC## 015 01 C01 00 Author 3 100##a 700##a 025 02 C02 00 Title 4 245## 240## 030 03 C03 00 Year 5 008 260##c 010 03 C03 008 004 00 $1 6 BASE1 005 01 C01

permission.dat

In previous versions, if a cataloger proxy was assigned to the user, then the system automatically added proxy type entries for the userwhen re-packing the cataloging tables (UTIL M/7). From this version, these new entries are not added to the permission.dat table.Functionality continues as before. Users that have cataloging proxies do not need to be listed in the table. When repacking the catalogingtables, they are granted the rights assigned to their cataloger proxy.

66.

Headers

The headers directory has been removed from the ./alephe directory to an internal location. The reason for this change is that headers areinternal and should not be modified by the users.

67.

tab_mime_type

A new table, tab_mime_type has been added to $alephe_tab directory. This table can be used to assign a special file extension, to anydocument format. The document format is defined in col.1 and the file extension is defined in col.2. This file extension is then usedautomatically when documents are saved on the computer in Web OPAC. If a format is not assigned an extension, extension .sav will beused as before. The file extensions must also be defined in $httpd_root/conf/mime.types.

The following example shows a practical use for the assignment of extensions. Documents in the 777 format can be assigned an .endextension, in order to connect them to citation managers (for example Endnote). In order to do so, add to tab_mime_type the followingline:

!1 2 !!!-!!! 777 end

And add to the mime.types table the following line:

application/x-research-info-systems end

68.

tab_xyz

The tab_xyz table under the tab directory of the bibliographic library is a new table used for the subdivisions stripping mechanism inmulti-authority library sites. This table defines the stripped headings list that is used by a particular bibliographic headings index.Following is an excerpt of the table:

! 1 2 !!!!!-!!!!! SUB XYZ SUL SULX SUM SUMX

The excerpt above states that SUB (the general subjects index) uses XYZ for the inclusion of the general heading. SUL (LC Subjects)uses SULX, and SUM (MeSH Subjects) uses SUMX. Note that this means that the stripped headings lists are not hard-coded and arespecified through the tab_xyz table. In a single-authority setup, the XYZ index can be used without defining it in this table.

69.

tab_bor_id.lng

This table exists only in the library defined by the environment variable usr_library (e.g. USR00). It was deleted from the data_tabdirectory of the ADM Library.

Note that it is possible to use more than one additional ID type as the key to retrieve Z303 (Web OPAC and GUI). IDs that are NOTused as the key to retrieve Z303 in the GUI (N in column 5), can be duplicated for different patrons.

Duplication for the same patron is always allowed. The ID date can be the same but the verification must be different so there won't betwo identical sets of ID and verification.

70.



Duplication is not possible between IDs that are not used as the key to retrieve Z303 in the GUI and those that are used as the key in theGUI (Y in column 5).

IDs of type 00 or 01 are always unique through out the system.

edit_doc_777

A new table, edit_doc_777, resides in the tab directory of the bibliographic library. This table defines tag conversion and tags to beincluded as the output of format 777. This format is intended for exporting bibliographic records in "ISI ResearchSoft Tagged OutputFormat". This format can be used to import records into reference managers such as Endnote. The required tags, TY (beginning ofrecord) and ER (end of record) are automatically supplied by the system

71.

tab_match_script

The maximum number of characters that this table's columns can contain has been changed:

Column 1 can now contain up to 2 characters.Column 2 can now contain up to 30 characters.Column 3 can now contain up to 4 characters.Column 4 can now contain up to 10 characters.Column 5 can now contain up to 100 characters.

72.

tab_exp_own.lng

A new table, tab_exp_own.lng, has been added to the ADMInistrative libraries tab directory. This table sets the default values presentedin the drop-down menus of the Cat OWN ID and Cat OWN Permission fields. Only the values defined in the table are valid values forthese fields.

73.

tab_locate

Two new locate programs, locate_str_sys_no and locate_str_3, have been added. The program locate_str_sys_no uses a doc number in aspecified field to perform an exact match. Here is an example:

USM01 SID## a sys= locate_str_sys_no

In this example, documents residing in USM01 base will be located according to the content in the SID field $$a. If the subfield containsthe system number of another record in this base, this record will be relocated.

If the locate procedure is run by the external ILL module, column 1 can now be configured with library codes that have numbers as asuffix, in the format <base>-n, where n is a number between 1 and 9. For example:

USM01-1 245## abc wti= locate_str_0 USM01-2 245## ab wti= locate_str_0 USM01 245## a wti= locate_str_0

In this example, the locate process on base USM01 will proceed in tiers. First, the locate string defined for USM01-1 will be used. If thelocate succeeds, the process will stop at this stage. If it fails, the locate string for USM01-2 will be used. The string defined for the basename with no numeric suffix (USM01 in this example), will be used only if all of the suffixed definitions failed. In this way, the locateprocess can be configured to start with very narrow searches and will try wider ones if these fail.

This refers to tab_locate of the ILL libraries (XXX20).

The program locate_str_3 is similar to locate_str_1, but takes as many long words as are specified in Column 6 (Parameters). Forexample, if the extract function is locate_str_3 and Column 6 is defined with '3', the three longest words will be used to build the searchstring.

Column 6 has been added to the table. This column is a 'parameter' column, and it completes the configuration set in Column 5. IfColumn 5 is set to use locate_str_3, Column 6 defines the number of words that will be used to build the search string. If Column 5 is setto use locate_str_0 or locate_str_1, Column 6 will define the breaking procedure that will be used to build the search string.

Column 3 has been expanded to 20 characters. This means that more than one subfield can be used for the search string. In addition, the"-" sign can be used to mean "all fields except for". For example, if this column is configured with: -ab, this means that all subfieldsexcept for 'a' and 'b' will be used.

74.



tab_character_conversion_line

A new code has been added to the tab_character_conversion_line table:

UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI

This code is used when ASCII encoding is selected in the print window.

1.

The following lines have been changed from

UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL WWW-F # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_8859_1 UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI WWW-F # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_ascii

To

UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL ##### # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_8859_1 UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI ##### # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_ascii

to allow batch routines such as p_sdi_01 to use these lines.

2.

75.

www_f_heading

The following codes were added to www_f_heading:

9919 L Your range selection is not valid.9926 L Please select record range.9941 L On Shelf9942 L Circulation status is unavailable for this library.

76.

edit_field.lng

Up to now, the EXT entry in the edit_field.lng table was used to edit the display of electronic locations. Now, 856 is used as an entry inedit_field.eng, just like any other field in edit_doc_999.lng.

If the 856 entry appears without subfields in edit_field.lng (that is, only the following line appears: 1 # 856## D), the display will bedetermined according to the following algorithm:

Use subfield z, or if missing use subfield u, or if missing compose by using subfields a,p,d and f as done for URL creation.

77.

remote_catalog.dat

A new table, remote_catalog.dat, resides in pc_tab/catalog of the bibliographic library. This table defines the list of databases on whichthe Z39.50 Update Service can be run.

Here is an example of the table:

! 1 2 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> PICA_GGC Pica Catalog USM01_Z39 USM01 (Z39)

Column 1: Base codeColumn 2: Base name

78.

tab33.lng

Column 3 of the table contained 21 characters instead of 20. Now it has 20 characters.

79.

tab_fast_patron_register

A new table, tab_fast_patron_register, is located in the data_tab directory of the usr_library (for example, USR00). This table sets thedefault values that are used for creating the following patron records fields :

Z303-ILL-TOTAL-LIMIT1.

Z303-ILL-ACTIVE-LIMIT2.

80.



Z303-EXPORT-CONSENT3.

Z303-SEND-ALL-LETTERS4.

Z304-DATE-TO (for address type "01")5.

Z305-BOR-TYPE6.

Z303-PLIF-MODIFICATION7.

When these fields are created following a submission of the registration form, their values will be those set in this table.

The table contains lines in the format "FIELD=VALUE". For example:

Z303-ILL-TOTAL-LIMIT=0555 Z303-ILL-ACTIVE-LIMIT=0444 Z303-EXPORT-CONSENT=N Z303-SEND-ALL-LETTERS=N Z304-DATE-TO=00000002Y Z305-BOR-TYPE=DR Z303-PLIF-MODIFICATION = A B D E 1

The default value for the field "Z304-DATE-TO" can have two formats:

Eight digits only. In this case the field is translated as a specific date with the format yyyymmdd. For example:

Z304-DATE-TO=20041231

1.

Eight digits suffixed with an uppercase letter. In this case the value will be translated as an offset from the current date. Ifthe suffix is Y the offset will be in years, if it is M the offset will be in months, and if it is D the offset will be in days. Forexample:

Z304-DATE-TO=00000002Y

This indicates that 2 years will be added to the current date and stored in the Z304-DATE-TO field of the newly createdpatron.

2.

❍

The Z303-PLIF-MODIFICATION field sets which fields should be protected when updating borrower records using the PLIF -Patron Loader (file-20) service. The field can contain a list of codes delimited by a space in between. The codes are:

A = Do not modify the borrower's address records (Z304).■

B = Do not modify the borrower's status.■

D = Do not modify the borrower's expiry date.■

E = Do not modify the borrower's e-mail address (Z304-EMAIL-ADDRESS) in the address record (Z304).■

1 = Do not modify all borrower's records (Z303, Z304, Z305 and Z308).■

❍

tab_library_group

A new table, tab_library_group, which resides in $alephe_tab, defines a group of libraries to share the same batch queue and UTIL Eprocesses.

Column 1 contains the hosting library, in which the processes will actually run.Columns 2 up to 9 contain the libraries which use the hosting library processes.

For example, if a line in the table defines the following group:

!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!! USM10 USM11 USM12

This indicates that only one batch queue or UTIL log will appear in the USM10/data_scratch directories for all the libraries in the group.In this example, all jobs submitted to USM11 and USM12 are redirected to the queue of the hosting library defined in Column 1,USM10.

81.

tab4382.



It is now possible to define days where the advance booking time slots are different from the schedule as a whole. This is supported by anew column, column 1 Line Type, that was added to identify the next group of definitions.

Column 1 Line Type can receive one of two values: P or E.

P - The following slots are for a period of time, as it has been so far.❍

E - The following slots refer to the specific day listed in column 4.❍

Example:There is a group of definitions that is valid until November 1st. If you need to open different time slots on October 15, the following lineshould appear:

E ##### 60 20031015 00 0900 00 2000;

This will create one slot for the entire day even though the original period definition includes several short slots on that day.

Column 5 of an E type line must always have a value of 00.❍

Column 6 of an E type line defines the beginning of the slot.❍

Column 7 of an E type line defines the date. A value of 00 indicates that the definition relates to the date defined in column 4. Avalue of 01 determines that the slot ends one day after it started.

❍

Column 8 of an E type of line defines the end of the slot.❍

To create a setup where no slots will be open for a given day leave columns 5-8 empty. For example :

E ##### 60 20031015

In an E type of line, it is possible to use ## instead of the year, month or day listed in column 4, for a more general definition. Forexample, 2003##01 indicates the 1st of every month in 2003.

The E lines can appear anywhere in the table.

tab34

A new option in column 8 of this table allows defining the value of Z30-PRICE as the price that will be charged for the lost itemreplacement.

This is possible by prefixing the fixed value with "I/". If Z30-PRICE is a decimal number other than zero, it will be used as thereplacement cost. If not, the value in column 8 will be used.

83.

tab_hold_request_form

This new table sets the option to configure the system to use different hold request forms when the patron places a request through theWeb OPAC.

When a request is placed, the system will look for a matching line in the table. The correct line will be selected according to one of theavailable parameters in this table: the item's sublibrary, item status, item process status, patron status and item's availability that isdetermined according to the AVAILABILITY-ROUTINE variable in tab100.

If no match is found, or tab_hold_request_form does not exist, the system will display the hold request forms without the suffix.

84.

tab_z30

The values in the table's first column should contain values of the fields 049 $a (when loading records with an OCLC server) and950 $l (when loading records with RLIN).

1.

In a multi-ADM environment, the content of the field can appear only once within all the tab_z30 tables in the various ADMlibraries.

2.

A new column, Column 2, was added to the table. The data entered in this column is added to the OWN field of records receivedfrom the OCLC server if Column 10 of tab_oclc is empty and the number 1 appears in tab_oclc column 5.

3.

85.



If both tab_z30 Column 2 and tab_oclc Column 10 are empty, no OWN field will be created.

tab18.lng

A new column, Column 6, has been added to this table. Accordingly, the former columns 6 and 7 have been moved to columns 7 and 8.

Column 6 sets the rate of the VAT that will be added to the sum that is set in column 5.

For example, if a transaction has the number 10.00 in column 5 and 15.00 in column 6, the net sum will be 10.00, the VAT sum will be1.50 (15 percent of 10) and the sum of the transaction will be 11.50.

If the column is left empty, no VAT is assumed and the net value of the transaction will equal the total sum.

Note that transactions which are calculated based on tab16 (such as 0003) or tab34 (such as 0040-0042) also have their VAT rates set inthis table.

86.

check_doc

A third column has been added to the check_doc table for program parameters. It is now possible to write check routines withparameters.

87.

tab_tag_text

The default values in the tab_tag_test table of the bibliographic library for the SE leader have been changed. The changes were inpositions 10-11 and 20-23. The default line was changed from:

LDR SE ^^^^^nasâ^^^^^^^â^^^^^

To:

LDR SE ^^^^^nasâ22^^^^^â^4500

88.

tab_mapping

The table was duplicated from the data tab directory of the bibliographic library to the data tab directory of each administrative library.This way, each administrative library holds its own holdings codes. This is used for the OCLC and RLIN loaders. The tab_mapping tablein the bibliofraphic library is still used by the expand_doc_bib_local_notes and fix_doc_create_hol_local_notes programs.

89.

tab_location_name.lng

A new table has been defined in /alephe/tab: tab_location_name.<lng>.

The table contains four columns:

Column 1: Code of the physical library, e.g. USM50Column 2: Location code (same as 852 $$a)Column 3: ISL code (ISO 15511)Column 4: Location name

90.

marc_language_codes

The cus and wen codes have been removed from the marc_language_codes table. These codes were discontinued.

The following codes were added to the table by the Library of Congress: byn, dsb, hsb and jbo.

91.

tab_export

Column 2 of the ./alephe/tab/tab_export table can now have one of the following three values:

ALEPH - the resulting export file is in ALEPH Sequential Format.1.

MARC - the resulting export file is in MARC Format (numeric fields only).2.

92.



MARC2 - the resulting export file is in MARC Format, including alphanumeric fields.3.

tab_cat_own

This table's name has been changed to tab_own.

93.

ill_server_defaults

ill_server_defaults is no longer in use. This file used to be relevant for the ILL WEB interface. It is now obsolete.

94.

tab_expand_join

Column 4 in tab_expand_join (the new subfield code column) has been enhanced. Previously, it worked according to three methods:

Take one or more subfields from the text and substitute them with the corresponding number of new subfields. For example:

Take abc and change to xyz

1.

Take all of the text (or several subfields) and change them to one new subfield. For example:

Take abcd and change to x

2.

Take all but a few subfields (- sign) and change them to one subfield.

Take -cd and change to x

3.

Now there are two additional methods for building virtual subfields:

Take a few subfields (or all the text) and change them to fewer new subfields. It changes all of them to the first one. For example:

Take abcd and change to xy. It takes the abcd and changes it to x.

1.

Take all but a few defined subfields and change them to a few new subfields, changing the text to the first new subfield. Forexample:

Take -abcd and change to xy. It takes all text except for abcd and changes it to x.

2.

Here is an example of a possible configuration in tab_expand_join which adds virtual fields to a bibliographic record, through theexpand_doc_join procedure.

MAY00 260## abc xyz 245## abcd t MOD00 260## abc s 245## abcd t DEZ00 260## -a d 245## abcd t GOS00 260## abc gd 245## abcd t ROD00 260## -b os 245## abcd t

95.

jap_euc_to_unicode

The jap_euc_to_unicode table was added to $alephe_unicode to support Japanese.

96.

unicode_to_8859_6

The unicode_to_8859_6 table was added to $alephe_unicode. The unicode_to_8859_6 table translates Unicode values to ISO 8859-6(ISO Latin Arabic).

97.



ORACLE TABLES

Version 16

Z01 - Access Headings●

Z05 - Set●

Z17 - Schedule●

Z18 - Routing List●

Z20 - Serials Claim●

Z31 - Cash●

Z35 - Events●

Z36H - Loans - History●

Z37H - Hold Requests - History●

Z40 - ILL Requests - Patron●

Z41 - ILL Requests - Supplier●

Z44 - ILL Vouchers●

Z46 - ILL Incoming Requests●

Z58 - Gate●

Z63 - Session (OPAC)●

Z64 - Session (Staff)●

Z66 - Password Information●

Z68 - Order●

Z70 - Vendor●

Z75 - Invoice (Line Item)●

Z77 - Invoice (General Invoice)●

Z79 - Order Index●

Z106 - 'CAT' Field●

Z108 - Course Reading●

Z111 - Keywords●

Z123 - History (OPAC)●

Z301 - Due Dates●

Z303 - Global Patron Information●

Z308 - Patron's ID●

Z321 - Advance Booking (Status)●

Z353 - Patrons Index●

Z501 - Acquisition Claims●

Z601 - Budget Transactions●

Z602 - Sublibrary / Ordering Unit●

Z603 - EDI (Messages)●

Release Notes - Oracle Tables - Version 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00080/file/n-oracle-16 (1 of 10) [3/31/2004 5:14:31 PM]

Z950 - Temporary Z950●

Z05 - Set

Two new fields have been added to the Z05 table, Z05-ADJACENCY and Z05-SHORT-FORMAT.

The Z05-ADJACENCY field is a toggle field that indicates whether or not the words in the find query areadjacent in the records. Values are 'Y' and 'N'. If the field is set to 'Y', this indicates that the user requested thewords to be adjacent when performing the find query.

The Z05-SHORT-FORMAT field contains the short format number. This is the identifier of the format in whichthe results set is displayed. When the user selects a different display format, this field is updated on the fly. Notethat this field is only relevant for find queries performed from the Web OPAC.

1.

Z18 - Routing List

A new field, Z18-SORT-ORDER, has been added to the Z18 table. This field is used by the system forretaining the routing lists in the correct order.

❍

The Z18-NOTE field has been enlarged from 100 to 200 characters.❍

2.

Z20 - Serials Claim

The Z20-CLAIM-SEQUENCE field has been enlarged from one to five digits.

3.

Z40 - ILL Requests - Patron

The Z40-Z41-SEQUENCE field has been increased from one to five digits. This means that the numberof ILL requests to the supplier (Z41) per patron request (Z40) has been increased from 9 to 99999.

1.

The Z40-UPDATE-DATE field was changed from:

02 Z40-UPDATE-DATE PICTURE 9(8).

to:

02 Z40-UPDATE-DATE-X. S 03 Z40-UPDATE-DATE PICTURE 9(8).

The database definitions were changed as follows:

Instead of being numeric - Z40_UPDATE_DATE NUMBER(8) -, the date field is now alphabetic:

Z40_UPDATE_DATE_X CHAR(8)

In addition, a new index (z40_id3), was added for the Z40_UPDATE_DATE_X field. To implement thenew index, add the following line to the file_list of the administrative library:

IND z40_id3 100K 100K ts1

2.

4.

Z41 - ILL Requests - Supplier

The Z41-SEQUENCE field has been enlarged from one to five digits.❍

5.



The Z41-REQUEST-SENT-DATE field has been renamed Z41-REQUEST-SEND-DATE.❍

A new field, Z41-REQUEST-SEND-TIME, has been added to the Z41 table. This field contains the timein which the request was sent to the supplier. The time is in HHMMSS format.

❍

Z44 - ILL Vouchers

The Z44-Z41-SEQUENCE field has been enlarged from one to five digits.

6.

Z46 - ILL Incoming Requests

The Z46-REQUEST-REFERENCE-NUMBER field has been enlarged from 20 to 50 characters.❍

The following new fields have been added to the Z46 table:

Z46-RESPONDER-SUBLIBRARY■

Z46-REQUESTER-ID■

Z46-MESSAGE-DELIVERY-TYPE■

The fields above are for future use and are currently not applicable.

❍

7.

Z58 - Gate

The following new fields have been added to the Z58 table:

Z58-ES-INSERT❍

Z58-ES-REPLACE❍

Z58-ES-DELETE❍

These fields are related to the implementation of the Remote Database Update function. This function includesthe options to insert, update and delete records in a remote catalog database.

The Z58-ES-INSERT field contains the program name of the program that performs insert:

Converts the local record to the form required by the remote catalog❍

Performs insert into the remote catalog❍

Updates the local record with information from the remote catalog❍

8.



The Z58-ES-REPLACE contains the program name of the program that performs update:

Converts the local record to the form required by the remote catalog❍

Performs replace in the remote catalog❍

Updates local record with information from the remote catalog❍

The Z58-ES-DELETE field contains the program name of the program that performs delete:

Deletes the remote catalog information from the local record.❍

Z63 - Session (OPAC)

The following fields have been added to the Z63 table:

Z63-FIND-CODE■

Z63-FIND-REQUEST■

Z63-FIND-ADJACENT■

Z63-FIND-FILTER■

These fields are used to save the last find request of the user. This allows the user to return to the previoussearch.

The Z63-FIND-CODE contains the word index or the direct index that was searched (e.g., WTI - wordsfrom title).

The Z63-FIND-REQUEST contains the find request (e.g., history).

The Z63-FIND-ADJACENT is a toggle field that indicates whether the user requested the words to beadjacent when performing the find query.

The Z63-FIND-FILTER fields - up to ten occurrences - contain the search limits selected by the user(e.g., ENG - Language = English).

1.

A new field, Z63-SFX-BASE-URL, has been added to the Z63 table. This field is filled when clicking onthe SFX button (if available). This field contains the patron's BASE-URL.

2.

9.

Z64 - Session (Staff)

The Z64-BROWSER-FONT was removed.❍

The Z64-COURSE-READING-USER was renamed Z64-BOR-ID❍

10.



A new field, Z64-TYPE, has been added to the Z64 table. This field determines the type of staff session.Values are:

WWW-C: Administration from the Web■

WWW-D: Currently not in use■

WWW-G: ALEPH User Guide■

WWW-N: Release Notes■

WWW-R: Course Reading■

WWW-S: Main (Staff main page)■

WWW-U: Utilities■

WWW-X: X Server■

❍

Z68 - Order

The Z68-TARGET-DIRECT field has been renamed Z68-TARGET-FLAG. Note that the values for this fieldhave been changed as follows:

N= No action (previously X)❍

D= Send direct (previously Y)❍

H= Create hold request (previously N)❍

M= Send a letter/e-mail (new values for version 16)❍

11.

Z70 - Vendor

A new field, Z70-LOCATE-BASE, has been added to the Z70 table. This field is currently not in use.

12.

Z75 - Invoice (Line Item)

Two new fields related to VAT have been added to the Z75 record: Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT andZ75-I-VAT-CODE.

Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT is the VAT amount for the invoice.❍

Z75-I-VAT-CODE is used to store a specific VAT code. Note that the VAT code mechanism enablesautomatic calculation of the Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT according to the selection of a specific code. Toenable this function, set the UseVATCode variable under the section [Invoice] in the Acq.ini file to Y.Note that if the Z77-VAT-PER-LINE field of the general invoice is set to N, the VAT code can only beassigned to the general invoice.

❍

13.

Z77 - Invoice (General Invoice)

Two new fields related to VAT have been added to the Z77 record: Z77-VAT-PER-LINE and Z77-VAT-CODE.

14.



Z77-VAT-CODE is used to store a specific VAT code.❍

Z77-VAT-PER-LINE contains either Y or N.

If this field is set to N, the VAT amount of the general invoice (Z77-VAT-AMOUNT) is fixed and savedin the database. In this case, the VAT values of all attached line items (Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT) arecalculated from Z75-I-TOTAL-AMOUNT according to the VAT percent of the general invoice. Inaddition, the VAT code can only be assigned to the general invoice (Z77-VAT-CODE).

If this field is set to Y, the Z77-VAT-AMOUNT is always zero in the database. It is calculated on-the-flyfrom the VAT amounts of all attached line items, and is only for display/print purposes (for example,Invoice Report - p_acq_10). This means that Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT and Z75-I-VAT-CODE can be setindividually for each line item.

❍

Z79 - Order Index

The Z79-REC-KEY-BACK field of the Z79 table has been removed.

15.

Z111- Keywords

The Z111-SEQUENCE field has been enlarged from 7 digits to 9 digits.

16.

Z123- History (OPAC)

The Z123-BOR-LIBRARY field has been removed from the Z123 table. From version 16 this field is notneeded, since even multi-ADM systems work with only one shared user's file.

❍

A new field, Z123-ADJACENCY, has been added to the Z123 table. This field indicates whether or notthe words in the find query are adjacent in the records. Values are 'Y' and 'N'. If the field is set to 'Y', thisindicates that the user requested the words to be adjacent when performing the find query.

❍

17.

Z301 - Due Dates

The due dates/hours per Group ID has been increased from 200 to 500 (Z301-LINE OCCURS 500).

18.

Z501 - Acquisition Claims

Two new fields, Z501-PRINT-DATE and Z501-PRINT-FORMAT, have been added to the Z501 table.The Z501-PRINT-DATE field contains the date in which the claim was last sent.The Z501-PRINT-FORMAT field contains the format of the claim template (00-99).

19.

Z601 - Budget Transactions

A new field, Z601-VAT-SUM, has been added to the Z601 table. For invoice transactions (Z601-TYPE = INV),this field contains the VAT amount. The amount is calculated from the Z601-ACTIVE-SUM field according tothe VAT percent of the attached Z75 record, regardless of the value of Z77-VAT-PER-LINE; it cannot be editedby the user. The field is also used for budget balance calculations.

20.



Z602 - Sublibrary/Ordering Unit

The sublibrary list has been increased from 100 to 500 (Z602-SUB-LIBRARY OCCURS 500).

21.

Z603 - EDI (Messages)

The Z603 table has been removed. It is no longer in use.

22.

Z950 - Temporary Z950

The Z950 table has been removed. It is no longer in use.

23.

Z321 - Advance Booking (Status)

A new file, Z321-ITEM-BUFFERS, has been added to the Z321 record. This field contains the informationstored in the Z30-BUFFERS fields of the item record.

24.

Z108 - Course Reading

The following minor changes were performed to the table definition:

Z108_PROXY_COURSE_NUMBER has been changed from VARCHAR2(20) to CHAR(20).❍

Z108_PERIOD has been changed from CHAR(100) to VARCHAR2(100).❍

These changes do not require data conversion but the Export Database Tables (file-03) and Import DatabaseTables (file-04) services should be used for the implementation of this modification.

25.

Z308 - Patron's ID

The following minor change was made to the table definition:

Z308_ID has been changed from VARCHAR2(12) to CHAR(12).■

This change does not require data conversion but the Export Database Tables (file-03) and ImportDatabase Tables (file-04) services should be used for the implementation of this modification.

1.

A new field, Z308-USER-LIBRARY, has been added to the Z308 table. This field is taken from theGlobal Patron Information record (Z303-USER-LIBRARY). The Z303-USER-LIBRARY fielddetermines if the patron's record is a shared record or a record private to a single administrative unit. If therecord belongs to a single administrative unit, this field contains the library code of the administrativelibrary to which the patron belongs. If the patron's record is a shared record in a multi-ADM environment,then this field is set to spaces.

2.

26.

Z17 - Schedule

The Z17 table is no longer in use.

27.



Z106 - "CAT" Field

Note that the following indexes are no longer in use and can be removed from the libraries' file_list table:

IND z106_id2 100K 100K ts1 IND z106_id3 100K 100K ts1 IND z106_id4 100K 100K ts1 IND z106_id5 100K 100K ts1 IND z106_id6 100K 100K ts1

1.

The following minor changes have been made to the table definition:

Z106_SECONDARY_KEY has been changed from CHAR(20) to VARCHAR2(20).

Z106_TIME has been changed from CHAR(4) to NUMBER(4).

These changes do not require data conversion but the Export Database Tables (file-03) and ImportDatabase Tables (file-04) services should be used for the implementation of this modification.

2.

28.

Z01 - Access Headings

From this version on, the z01_id1 index has been removed from the file_list of all libraries. This index is notlonger in use.

29.

Z353 - Patrons Index

A new table, Z353, has been added. The Z353 table is one of the suite of tables that make up library patroninformation. It is used by the system when displaying the patron list and is used to identify which patrons shouldbe displayed when the "Display Local Patrons Only" check box is marked. It contains data extracted from theZ303 and Z308 tables (ID, barcode, name, and ADM library).

The Z353 index is created by running the Build Patron Indexes (cir-25) service.

The Z353 table must be included in the file_list of the library defined for the usr_library variable of thealeph_start file.

Note that the file_list of the usr_library must contain entries for the following instances:

TAB z353❍

IND z353_id❍

IND z353_id1❍

30.

Z66 - Password Information

A new field, Z66-USER-LIBRARY, has been added to the Z66 table. This field contains the library code of theadministrative library to which the librarian/user belongs. If the user is a superuser, then this field must be set toADMIN.

31.

Z31 - Cash32.



The Z31-TRANSFER-NUMBER field has been changed from VARCHAR2(20) to CHAR(20). Thischange does not require data conversion but the Export Database Tables (file-03) and Import DatabaseTables (file-04) services should be used for the implementation of this modification.

1.

A new index (z31_id5), was added for the Z31-TRANSFER-NUMBER field. To implement the newindex, add the following line to the file_list of the administrative library:


2.

The Z31-DATE field was changed from:

02 Z31-DATE PICTURE 9(8).

to:

02 Z31-DATE-X. 03 Z31-DATE PICTURE 9(8).

The database definitions have been changed as follows:

Instead of being numeric - Z31_DATE NUMBER(8) -, the date field is now alphabetic (CHAR):

Z31_DATE_X CHAR(8)

In addition, a new index (z31_id4), was added for the Z31-DATE-X field. To implement the new index,add the following line to the file_list of the administrative library:


3.

Two new fields, Z31-VAT-SUM and Z31-NET-SUM, have been added to the Z31 record.

The Z31-VAT-SUM field contains the VAT amount of the cash transaction. The VAT rates are specified- per transaction type - in the tab/tab18 table of the administrative library.

The Z31-NET-SUM is the sum of a cash transaction (without VAT). If the Z31-VAT-SUM is set tozeroes, then this field is equal to the Z31-SUM.

Note that the Z31-SUM contains the total sum of a cash transaction. This is the Z31-VAT-SUM plus theZ31-NET-SUM.

4.

Z303 - Global Patron Information

A new field, Z303-USER-LIBRARY, has been added to the Z303 table. This field determines if the patron'srecord is a shared record or a record private to a single administrative unit. If the record belongs to a singleadministrative unit, this field contains the library code of the administrative library to which the patron belongs.If the patron's record is a shared record in a multi-ADM environment, then this field is set to spaces.

33.

Z36H - Loans - History

A new index (z36h_id3), was added for the Z36H-TIME field. To implement the new index, add the followingline to the file_list of the administrative library:

IND z36h_id3 100K 100K ts1

34.

Z37H - Hold Requests - History

A new index (z37h_id2), was added for the Z36H-TIME field. To implement the new index, add the followingline to the file_list of the administrative library:

IND z37h_id2 100K 100K ts1

35.



Z35 - Events

Two new fields, Z35-NOTE and Z35-TIME-STAMP, have been added to the Z35 table.

The Z35-NOTE field is a free-text field currently not in use.

The Z35-TIME-STAMP field is comprised of the Z35-DATE, Z35-TIME and Z35-SEQUENCE sublevels. Thisfield is a system-generated unique identifier for the events record. This identifier is used by various instances ofthe system. For example, the Scrub Patron IDs (cir-32) service uses this field to identify the required Z35 tablefor update purposes.

In addition, a new index (z35_id3), was added for the Z35-TIME-STAMP field. To implement the new index,add the following line to the file_list of the administrative and bibliographic libraries:


36.


http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582Q...V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00080/file/n-oracle-16 (10 of 10) [3/31/2004 5:14:31 PM]

GENERAL

Version 16

New Clients and Reorganization●

Multi-ADM Environment●

ALEPH Backup Scripts●

ALEPH Cookie●

ALEPH Data Warehouse●

alephcom.ini●

Apache Server●

Batch Queue●

Character Conversion●

Change of Placement of Icons Directories●

Copy / Paste●

Default Open Tab in GUI Windows●

Display of the "Link" field in the Callout Bubble in GUI Lists●

Display Text in GUI Toolbars●

Expand Windows in GUI●

font.ini●

GUI Lists - Addition of Columns Missing from pc_tab_col.lng●

GUI Client Packages●

GUI Definitions Removed from the <module>.ini Files●

GUI Shortcut Keys●

GUI Toolbars●

Headers●

Identifying Icons●

icon_path Variable●

Items Services●

library.ini●

library.ini●

Login Password in GUIs●

Loading Records from RLIN in a Multi-ADM Libraries Environment●

MARC8●

OCLC Server●

Oracle Database●

PAS (Password Control)●

print.ini●

Profile.dat●

Reassignment of the F9 Shortcut Key from Date to Search●

Remote Database Update●

RLIN Directories●

RLIN Server●

Services●

Shortcut Icons●

Subject Line in E-mail Messages●

Release Notes - General - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582Q...UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00081/file/n-gen-16 (1 of 31) [3/31/2004 5:14:55 PM]

Sun Utilities●

Switching Between Applications●

Unicode-enabled Fields●

Toolbar.dat●

Universal Gateway●

USR00●

window.dat●

X Server●

XSL Creator●

z39_gate●

z39_server●

Documentation - Online Help●

Documentation - ALEPH User Guide Administration Chapter●

UTILS

UTIL A●

UTIL D●

UTIL E●

UTIL F●

UTIL G●

UTIL H●

UTIL J●

UTIL K●

UTIL L●

UTIL M●

UTIL O●

UTIL P●

UTIL Q●

UTIL W●

UTIL Y●

New Clients and Reorganization

There are new clients for Cataloging and Acquisitions/Serials. Within the GUI clients:

The Search module has been removed. Full Search functionality is available within each of the remaining modules.❍

Serials has been incorporated within Acquisitions.❍

There is no longer an Items client - it is part of the Cataloging client.❍

There is no longer a separate Task Manager client - it is now part of every module.❍

The Administration module has been deleted. Unique functionality has been moved as follows:

Profile definitions have become part of the Circulation client.■

Permission management (Staff Privileges) is available via the key icon on the Operations bar (at the bottom right of thescreen) in all modules.

■

❍

1.



Currency management is available in Acquisitions.■

Multi-ADM Environment

The configuration of a multi ADM environment influences two aspects of the system:

Password control1.

Shared/Non-shared environment for patrons2.

Password Control

In a multi-ADM environment, the ALEPH libraries that are included in the environment of a single ADM library are defined in thePAS line in the ./alephe/tab/library_relation configuration table.

For example:

PAS USM50 USM01 USM10 USM60 USM20 USM30PAS USM51 USM01 USM10 USM60

USM50 and USM51 are ADM libraries. The group of libraries related to ADM50 includes USM01, USM10, USM60, USM20 andUSM30; the group of libraries related to USM51 includes USM01, USM10 and USM60.

When ALEPH is installed, the system includes a 'super' staff user (with username/password ALEPH/ALEPH). In a Multi ADMenvironment this 'super' staff user can create master staff users for each password group (e.g., ADM library), who are assignedauthorizations in USR00 to create/update passwords in the sphere of the ADM library to which s/he is assigned. The 'super user' canalso create other 'super' users.

Shared/Non-Shared Patrons

In a multi-ADM environment, each ADM library can define whether its patron Records (Z303, Z304, Z308, Z353) belong to theshared or the non-shared section of the database (USR00). The USER-SHARING variable in tab100 of each library's tab directorydefines whether it participates in the shared environment. If the ADM library defines USER-SHARING=Y, then the patrons createdby this library will be displayed in the Patron List when a staff user is connected to ANY library that is defined as Y in the USERSHARING variable.

2.



Patrons belonging to an ADM library which defines the variable USER-SHARING=N in tab100 will not be included in this PatronList. If the ADM library defines USER-SHARING=N, then the patrons created by this library will be displayed in the Patron Listonly when a staff user is connected to this specific library.

As a consequence of the implementation of the multi-ADM environment, the bor_library variable in the following pages should NOTbe set to the usr_library (for example, USR00) but to a valid administrative unit (such as, USM50).

The following HTML files should be modified:

./alephe/www_f_eng/bypass-passwd

./alephe/www_f_eng/login

./alephe/www_f_eng/login-item

./alephe/www_f_eng/login-request

Example:

Change the line:

input type="hidden" name="bor_library" value="USR00"

to:

input type="hidden" name="bor_library" value="USM50"

or give a list of available administrative units:

<tr> <td class=td2>Library Branch:</td> <td class=td2> <select name=bor_library width=170> <option value=USM50 ##0800-S"USM50">USM50 Library>/option> <option value=USM51 ##0800-S"USM51">USM51 Library>/option> <option value=USM52 ##0800-S"USM52">USM52 Library</option> <option value=UNI50 ##0800-S"UNI50">UNI50 Library</option> </select> </td>

Copy / Paste

Data can be copied and pasted from the text lists in all GUI modules. In the "selectable" lists the second mouse click on the selectedline copies the data of the current field to the clipboard. In the "non-selectable" lists a single mouse click on the line copies the linedata to the clipboard.

3.

font.ini

The EditorForm option from the Font.ini file has been deleted. In previous versions, this instance was used to define the font ofcataloging forms. From this version on, this is controlled by the UnicodeEdit instance. This instance also controls the edit fields of theFind and Browse options.

4.

UTIL A

A new utility, UTIL A/17/18 was added to find/delete duplicate keys.

5.

UTIL D

A new UTIL, D, has been added for online storing/restoring of utilities. The options offered allow management of library data and/orconfiguration tables. The options include:

6.



Store library data1.

Store library configuration2.

Restore library data3.

Restore library configuration4.

UTIL E

UTIL E/5 allows for the creation of a history table for Z07 entries handled by ue_01. It has the following three options:

Store - Create Z07H table and Oracle Trigger1.

Restore - Dump Z07H to Z07 and delete Oracle Trigger2.

Count - Count entries in Z07H table3.

1.

The following UTILs now consult tab_library_group when they are started or stopped:

util_e_01util_e_03util_e_06

UTIL_e_01 will only be running in the "hosting-library" (which is the library that appears first in the line of the group) and thesame process will handle Z07 records for all the other members of the library group. Every library from the group is given aquota of up to 100 documents to index and after that the process switches the library to the next one in the list. For example,assuming tab_library_group has the following definition:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!> USM01 USM02

If Z07 in USM01 has 120 records and Z07 in USM02 has 30 records, UTIL_e_01 will be handling 100 record out of the 120 inUSM01, and then will switch library to USM02, handle its 30 records and switch back to USM01 to handle its remaining 20records.

UTIL_e_03 (RLIN) will process all the files waiting in the input directory and only then will switch to the next library in thegroup.

UTIL_e_06 will process up to 100 hold requests and 100 photocopy requests per library before switching to the next one.

2.

7.

UTIL F

UTIL F has been reorganized.

The following entries are now under UTIL F/1 (BIB procedures and files):

1. Display/check character conversion tables■

2. Display/check word building routines■

3. Display/check filing routines■

11. Perform check_doc routines on a single document■

13. Immediate update of a single document■

15. Check document display format (edit_doc/edit_paragraph)■

17. Delete words/headings for a single document and write Z07■

19. Write z07 records for update■

21. Test deduplication■

1.

8.



22. Create word records (z980). This is a new option.■

26. Display doc and its indexing for a single record■

27. Perform z980 to z98. This is a new option.■

28. Display word indexing for a single record■

29. Display headings indexing for a single record■

The following entries are now under UTIL F/2 (ADM procedures and files):

5. PLIF utilities.■

8. Display/check library open hours routine■

9. Display/check due date routine■

10. Display/check overdue fine calculation■

16. Search for record by Z111 keywords■

20. Update loan record■

22. NCIP messages■

23. Display sort key for Z30■

24. Update z311 (location counter)■

2.

The following entries are now under UTIL F/3 (procedures and files for all libraries):

6. Display records from sequential data files■

12. Display links associated with a record■

18. Run ue_11 for a single document■

3.

UTIL F/4 remains under UTIL F/4. There is a new option: Z02, which displays Z02_REC_KEY.4.

A new option: UTIL F/5 has been added (Tools). It has the following in its submenu: 1. UNICODE -> UTF -> UNICODEconverter

5.

UTIL F/24: In order to enable the customer to "reset" location counters which are stored in Z311 a new UTIL (UTIL/F/24) wasimplemented. By using this function, it is possible to update Z311-LAST-SEQUENCE and new Z311 records can be built.

6.

The UTIL F/2/10 utility for testing fine calculations has been updated. Due to the change, a real Item/Patron must be entered inorder to check fines.

Example:

Enter item barcode (Q to stop): 100-10

Enter bor ID (Q to stop) : 1000

Enter bor status [02] (Q to stop) :

Z36-BOR-STATUS: 02

Z36-ITEM-STATUS: 42

Z30-ITEM-PROCESS-STATUS: OR

Enter due date (yyyymmdd or Q to stop) : 20020103

Enter due hour (hhmm or Q to stop) : 0800

Enter return date (yyyymmdd or Q to stop) : 20030103

Enter return hour (hhmm or Q to stop) : 0900

7.



Fine is: 366.00

UTIL G

UTIL G/2 has a new counter:

barcode-sequence - site-specific ICL

This counter works with the tab_checksum routine checksum_create_z30_icl.

1.

UTIL G/5 was modified to reflect that tab18 is no longer part of this menu. UTIL G/5 is now: Circulation tables.2.

UTIL G/5/5: Two new tables were added to UTIL G/5: Database definitions, Circulation tables. 5 - Hold and photocopyconfiguration tables (submenu). These new tables are: a - Tab37_campus_preferred (ADM library only), and c -Tab37_campus_filter. Both tables refer to ADM libraries only.

3.

UTIL G/5/g: This option was amended to reflect new SIP2 tables - settings.sc. In addition, pointers to 3m and LSSU tableswere deleted.

4.

UTIL G/6: A new option was added. It is: l - Definitions for duplicating a field (tab_expand_duplicate_field).5.

UTIL G/6/m: A new table was added to UTIL 6. Expand tables. It is m - Definitions for splitting external fields(tab_expand_external).

6.

UTIL G/9/b: A new option was added to UTIL G/9: Cash tables (ADM library only). It is: b - Time and rate definitions for finemethod F and is represented by the table - tab_late_return.

7.

UTIL G/9/18: A new option was added for Cash tables. It is: 18 - Cash control (ADM library only). This used to beUTIL/G/5/18.

8.

UTIL G/9/a: A new option was added. It is: a - Translate sublibrary to department code for report cash_09.9.

UTIL G/10: A new option was defined for the following EDI related tables.

35 - EAN-13 Location Numbers (for EDI) (ADM Library Only) e - Special Features of Outgoing EDI Messages (edi_out_attr) f - Special Features of Incoming EDI Messages (edi_in_attr)

10.

UTIL G/4/35: tab35 is no longer accessible from UTIL G/4/35. It is accessible from UTIL G/10/35.11.

9.

UTIL H

UTIL H/1/9: A new option was added to "Run Report Online: Library Oracle Tables" to create a list of non-valid indexes in alibrary.

1.

UTIL H/11: A new option "Compare pc_tab_col/pc_tab_expand with demo libs" has been added to the UTIL H menu. Thisnew option compares the current library pc_tab_col (or pc_tab_expand) with a chosen demo lib and reports the differences.

2.

UTIL H/1/13: The UTIL/H/11 menu for checking pc_tab_col/pc_tab_exp_field has been moved to UTIL/H/1/13.3.

UTIL H/2: A new option was added to "Synchronize Library File Headers".4.

UTIL H/3: A new option was added to "Synchronize Alephe File Headers".These two new options replace the previous synchronize utilities in UTIL H.

5.

10.

UTIL J11.



UTIL J/12: A new table (tab_ccl_boolean_operators) was added to the UTIL J menu. 12. Web and Server configuration:Language definitions for Boolean operator.

1.

UTIL J/13: A new table (alephe/tab/www_f_func) was added to the UTIL J menu. 13. HTML functional codes for the WEBOPAC (www_f_func).

2.

UTIL J/14: A new table (drm_routines) was added to the UTIL J menu. 14. Electronic object viewing control (drm_routines>.3.

UTIL J/a: A new table for Course Reading (www_r_heading) has been added to the UTIL/J menu.4.

UTIL J/9 has been removed from UTIL J menu. It used to refer to www_front_cgi, which does not exist any more.5.

UTIL L

The UTIL L menu has been modified to reflect the use of HTML templates instead of display tables. See also: ALEPH TablesRelease Notes/Deleted Tables.

12.

UTIL M

UTIL M/18 is now a sub-menu. The previous UTIL M/18 has been moved to UTIL M/18/a and UTIL M/19 has been moved toUTIL M/18/b. The new UTIL M/8 submenu is as follows:

a - merge routines for document records (tab_merge)1.

b - merge document records (tab_merge_overlay)2.

c - advanced merge of document records (tab_merge_adv_overlay)3.

d - preferred record settings when merging (tab_preferred)4.

e - weighting table for preferred records (union_preferred)5.

f - match and merge weights and routines (tab_match_merge)6.

1.

UTIL M/21: pc_tab_cat_conv was removed, as it was also defined under UTIL Q/15.2.

13.

UTIL P

UTIL P/3: The following new table has been added to the UTIL P menu in option 3. Unicode equivalencies for creating entriesin the word file (unicode_to_word_gen).

1.

A new utility, UTIL/P/6, allows you to view warnings regarding duplicate definitions for UNICODE values in themarc8_lat_to_unicode table.

2.

14.

UTIL Q

UTIL Q/15: The following table was added to the UTIL Q menu. Data Loading, Import and Export Tables. 15. Catalog RecordConversion Programs (pc_tab_cat_conv).

1.

UTIL Q/16: The following table, Weight Factors for Determining Candidate Records (tab_weights), was added to the UTIL Qmenu.

2.

UTIL Q/17: The table Match specifications for Check Against Database (tab_match_script) was added to the UTIL Q menu.3.

15.

UTIL W16.



In addition to the existing server groups for UTIL W (PC server, Z39 server, etc.) a new group, "Other Server", has been added. Thisgroup is a container for all servers which are not main servers like SELFCHECK,- NCIP-, OCLC-Server, etc.

UTIL Y

The following aleph tables have been renamed. They were once called aleph_start_505 (UTIL Y/14) and aleph_startup_505 (UTILY/15). They are now:

UTIL Y/14: aleph_start & aleph_start.private (Define ALEPH environment); and,

UTIL Y/15: aleph_startup (Define startup defaults).

17.

Reassignment of the F9 Shortcut Key from Date to Search

The F9 shortcut key is no longer used for editing the date format in the GUI. The date format is now only set in alephe_start. It is stillstored in alephcom.ini.

F9 now activates the Search function tab.

18.

window.dat

The following lines have been renamed:

ServiceDialog.Item.All All ServiceDialog.Item.None None

to:

AlephControl.EmptyLine.All All AlephControl.EmptyLine.None None

There is no change in functionality.

19.

Default Open Tab in GUI Windows

There has been a change in the setup for determining the default open tab for GUI screens with multiple tabs.

Previously, this setup was defined in the client's .ini file as FirstTab=n after the window name of the tab. This setup has been changedin this version, so that the section name is [FirstTab], and the key name is WindowName:

For example: If you want the second tab of the Order Form to be the first to appear when the window is selected.

Set the following in ACQ.INI:

[FirstTab] OrderForm=2

20.

Oracle Database

Commencing with version 16, the Oracle database is created with the UTF8 character set. Previous versions used US7ASCII.Therefore, in the /alephe/aleph_start file:

setenv NLS_LANG American_America.US7ASCII

has been changed to

setenv NLS_LANG American_America.UTF8

and the following lines have been added:

setenv NLS_SORT BINARY setenv NLS_COMP BINARY setenv LC_COLLATE C

21.

Change of Placement of Icons Directories22.



For each application, the icons' directory is placed under the directory that contains the HTML pages.

A directory called icon was added under each of the following: www_f_eng; www_r_eng; www_s_eng; and www_c_eng, and iconswere copied as appropriate from www_eng to those directories.

For each directory in www_f_eng, www_r_eng, www_s_eng, and www_c_eng, &icon_path_&lng/icon with &icon_path, and&icon_path_eng/icon were replaced with &icon_path.

Definitions were added to prof_master: wficon, wcicon, wsicon, wricon pointing to the icons directories under wf, wc, ws and wr.

New definitions under $httpd_root/htdocs -> were created to support the aleph/a16.0_1/alephe tree structure, and under that directory,the www_f_eng, www_r_eng, www_s_eng, www_c_eng, www_q_eng directories were created. In each of aforementioneddirectories, a softlink was made to the corresponding icon directory.

The u-welcome* and u-library-list files were moved from www_eng to www_u_eng. The www_eng directory under $alephe_rootwas removed.

UTIL O

The option, View of Oracle Alert Log, has being added to UTIL O.

23.

z39_gate

Support was added to z39_gate to handle GRS-1 (Generic Record Syntax) records. GRS-1 records are stored by z39_gate inXML format. GRS-1 is a generic record syntax that provides a hierarchical record structure which is also capable of deliveringfull text.

1.

A new attribute has been added to z39_gate configuration. The attribute is attribute set. The attribute set is optional and shouldbe placed before the attribute type. If, in z39_gate configuration, an attribute is defined without an attribute set (for example,u=4), the default is bib-1.

The following syntax can be used in z39_gate_<target>.conf:

find <CCL code> <set>,<type>=<value> <set>,<type>=<value>

Example:

find WTI Dan-1,u=4 bib-1,t=100 c=1

scan <CCL code> <set>,<type>=<value>

Example:

scan TIT Dan-1,u=4

sort <Sort code> <set>,<type>=<value>

Example:

sort 03 bib-1,u=4

The set specification is treated only if the attribute has numeric values. For example, if the attribute has a special value such as:

find WTI u=4 bib-1,t=l,r,b bib-1,s=pw

the set specification for the truncation attribute (t) and the structure attribute (s) is ignored.

2.

A new function, the ES Update service, has been added to the z39_gate. The z39_gate gets, from the calling program, thetarget's logical name, the update action (Record Insert, Record Replace or Record Delete), the record to update, the recordsystem ID and the record version ID. Then z39_gate sends an ExtendedServicesRequest to the target and waits for animmediate response. The Extended Services database is not involved. The z39_gate then receives anExtendedServicesResponse from the target and passes an update status to the calling program.

3.

A new target parameter has been added to z39_gate:

esrecordtype <record type>

4.

24.


http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582...Y9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00081/file/n-gen-16 (10 of 31) [3/31/2004 5:14:55 PM]

where <record type> is the record format for ES Update Service. This setting is mandatory when the ES Update service is used.

An option has been added for specifying record schema in Present (show) Request.5.

The Z39.50 gate (Z39_gate) now supports the handling of records in SUTRS format. SUTRS records are converted to ALEPHinternal format and shown to users as regular ALEPH records.

A special conversion program must be written for each target returning SUTRS records . The conversion program must benamed vir_z00_z39_sutrs_<target>.cbl (for example, vir_z00_z39_sutrs_copac.cbl).

Each target must have a conversion table named tab_sutrs_<target> (for example, tab_sutrs_copac). The conversion tablesmust reside in the ./<external library code>/tab directory (for example ./ext01/tab). For each conversion table, a correspondingheader must be defined.

All conversion tables have four columns:

Col.1 - SUTRS field name (in upper case)Col.2 - ALEPH field codeCol.3 - ALEPH subfield code (not relevant for ALEPH fields 001-009, for all other ALEPH fields, the default is 'a')Col.4 - separator character (if the separator is ';' it means that the SUTRS field contains several sub-elements separated by ';'.From each sub-element, a separate ALEPH field is created)

Example of the tab_sutrs_<target> table

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!-!-! ISBN/ISSN 020## MAIN AUTHOR 100## TITLE DETAILS 245## PUBLISHER 260## PHYSICAL DESC. 300## SERIES 440## NOTES 500## LANGUAGE 546## SUBJECT(S) 650## HOLDING LIBRARIES 852## ;

In this table, the "ISBN/ISSN" element is converted to the 020 ALEPH field ; the "MAIN AUTHOR" element is converted tothe 100 ALEPH field, and so on. The "HOLDING LIBRARIES " element can contain several sub-elements separated by ';'.From each "HOLDING LIBRARIES" sub-element, a separate 852 ALEPH field is created.

To support the handling of records in SUTRS format, the following configuration must be present:

The ./alephe/tab/z39_gate/z39_gate_<target>.conf file must contain a "recordtype SUTRS" line.1.

The ./alephe/gate/<target>.conf file must contain the following:

Z58-IN-RECORD-TYPE SUTRS

Z58-IN-RECORD-CREATE <conversion program> Z58-IN-RECORD-CREATE-PARAM <conversion table>

2.

6.

z39_server

The configuration has been changed.

$alephe_tab/z39_server/z39_server_base is not used anymore. Instead, an $alephe_tab/z39_server/z39_server_.conf file isdefined for each base handled by z39_server. This file contains all the settings for this base. There are 5 groups of settings:

General settings (new)1.

Present settings (new)2.

1.

25.



Settings for search/scan in Word index (Word translations)(unchanged)3.

Setting for searc/scan in Access index (Phrase translations)(unchanged)4.

Sort translations (unchanged)5.

General settings

in-find-char-conv <char-conv> - defines character conversion for a find request and for an incoming record in ExtendedServices (ES) Update.

in-scan-char-conv <char-conv> - character conversion for scan request

out-scan-char-conv <char-conv> - defines character conversion for records including character conversion for outgoingrecords in Extended Services (ES) Update when out-record-syntax is USMARC.

opac-record-size <num> - <num> is the number of kilobytes. If the total size of an OPAC record is greater than <num>, theOPAC record returned by z39_server will only include MARC data without Holdings Data.

unioncatalog - if this setting appears, the OPAC record has a special format

nosort - if this setting appears, sort is disabled for this base

noscan - if this setting appears, scan is disabled for this base

Present settings

For each requested record syntax, a group of settings is defined. If you want to return records in USMARC, XML and OPACformat, you must define three groups. Each group must start from the syntax setting.

out-record-syntax <syntax> - record syntax; must be defined for each requested syntaxPossible values: UNIMARC, INTERMARC, CCF, USMARC, UKMARC, NORMARC, LIBRISMARC, DANMARC,FINMARC, CANMARC, SBN, PICAMARC, AUSMARC, IBERMARC, CATMARC, MALMARC, MAB, SUTRS, OPAC,XML, GRS-1 (all the values handled by YAZ toolkit)

out-record-format <format> - defines which record formats can be returned from a given base. It can be defined for eachsyntax. It is optional and repeatable.

Possible values: USMARC, DANMARC, MAB, XML, SUTRS, GRS-1, OPAC

If not defined, it will be set automatically by the program depending on value of out-record-syntax. If out-record-syntax isUSMARC, out-record-format is set to USMARC and so on.

out-record-char-conv <char-conv> - defines character conversion for records including character conversion for outgoingrecords in Extended Services (ES) Update When out-record-syntax is USMARC.

out-record-fix <fix> - fix routine from tab_fix

out-record-expand <expand> - fix routine from tab_expand

Here is an example of a base profile in z39_server/z39_server_USM01.conf:

ALEPH Z39.50 base profile



#General Settings

in-find-char-conv 8859_1_TO_UTF in-scan-char-conv 8859_1_TO_UTF out-scan-char-conv UTF_8859_1



# #Present Settings

# out-record-syntax USMARC out-record-format USMARC out-record-char-conv UTF_TO_8859_1 out-record-fix FIX1 out-record-expand EXP1 out-record-syntax UNIMARC out-record-format USMARC out-record-char-conv UTF_TO_8859_1 out-record-fix FIX2 out-record-expand EXP2 out-record-syntax XML out-record-format XML



out-record-syntax OPAC out-record-format OPAC out-record-char-conv UTF_TO_8859_1

#Word translations

#w Aleph Use-value word wti 4



#Phrase translations

#p Aleph Use-value



phrase tit 4

#Sort translations

sort 03 4 Title

It is now possible to specify DANMARC in the z39_server_[lib].conf table.2.

A new element set name, X, has been defined for USMARC records only. When a Z39.50 client sends a request for element set3.



X in a Present Request for a USMARC record, a full USMARC record is returned which includes all alphanumeric ALEPHfields such as CAT, FMT and so on. The element set is not configurable.

A new function, the ES Update service, has been added to the z39_server. z39_server gets an ExtendedServicesRequestmessage from the Z39.50 client. The message contains a database name, a record and an action (Insert, Replace or Delete).z39_server updates the record in the database, then sends an ExtendedServicesResponse message to the client. The messagecontains relevant update information

The ES Update service has been developed according to the Union Catalog Profile(http://lcweb.loc.gov/z3950/agency/profiles/ucp.doc) and partially conforms to the profile requirements.

The Z39.50 ES Update Service allows an origin to request that the target updates a database: inserts new records, replaces ordeletes existing records (from ANSI/NISO Z39.50-1995).

The ALEPH z39_server supports three Update actions: Record Insert, Record Replace and Record Delete. All the actions areperformed immediately. Extended Services Database is not used.

For all Update actions, a z39 client must have the following permissions: Z39-SERVER/OPAC, CATALOG/UPDATE andCATALOG/REMOTE-UPDATE permissions.

For further information, see the z39_server documentation in the Ex Libris Documentation Center(http://www.exlibrisgroup.com).

4.

A new table, z39_server_update_errors, has been added to the /alephe/tab/z39_server directory. It defines the translation ofcheck_doc error codes to standard Z39.50 Extended Services (ES) error codes.

The table contains two columns:

Column 1: error codes appearing in check_doc table.Column 2: Z39.50 error codes appearing in /alephe/tab /z39_gate/z39_es_error_list (ES errors) and in/alephe/tab/z39_gate/z39_target_error_list (general errors).

5.

From now on, z39_server writes to marclog all non-structured records (USMARC, UNIMARC, XML, SUTRS and so on). Thestructured records in GRS-1 format are not written to marclog. Structured records in OPAC format are written in USMARCformat to marclog (without details about holdings or items).

Before each record in marclog, a line with the set number and the record ID is added. Here is an example:

Set=1, record number=1

6.

XML records can now be returned with Holdings information according to Z39.50 Holdings Schema (v.4).

The records are returned in XML format according to the element set name B1 defined by the Bath Profile (v. 2.0)

z39_server recognizes the following Holding Schema OIDs:

1.2.840.10003.13.7.41.2.840.10003.13.7.2

z39_server recognizes the following element set names: B1, b1, B-1 and b-1.

Example of a record returned in XML format according to the B-1 element set name:

<?xml version = "1.0" encoding = "UTF-8"?> <holdingsStructurexmlns="http://www.loc.gov/z3950/agency/defns/BathHoldingsLocationsOnly" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.loc.gov/z3950/agency/defns/BathHoldingsLocationsOnly http://www.loc.gov/z3950/agency/defns/BathHoldingsLocationsOnly. xsd"> <bibItemInfo-1 targetItemId-3="000033902"></bibItemInfo-1> <holdingsStatement-4>

7.



<siteLocation-6 institutionOrSiteId-27="HUJI" locationName-28="Hebrew University"> <subLocation-35 institutionOrSiteId-27="UEDUC" locationName-28="EducationLibrary"></subLocation-35> </siteLocation-6> </holdingsStatement-4> </holdingsStructure>

The <holdingsStructure> tag contains the following elements:

One <bibItemInfo-1> element. The element is empty. It has one attribute, targetItemId-3, that contains the ALEPHsystem number of the bibliographic record.

■

Zero or more <holdingsStatement-4> elements. The elements are created from each SBL tag of the bibliographic record(SBL tags are added by the expand_doc_bib_loc_usm expand routine).

■

The <holdingsStatement-4> element contains:

One <siteLocation-6> element, containing the following attributes:

institutionOrSiteId-27 attribute has Location code from tab_location_name.■

locationName-28 attribute which is optional and has Location name from tab_location_name.■

islCode-29 attribute which is optional and has ISL code from tab_location_name.■

■

One <subLocation-35> element that contains the following attributes:

institutionOrSiteId-27 attribute has Sub library code from the SBL tag.■

locationName-28 attribute which is optional and has Sub library name from tab_sub_library.■

■

In order to receive bibliographic and holding information, the following configuration must be present:

A new Expand Menu is added to tab_expand: Z39_H0L.■

In tab_expand of the local bibliographic library, two expand programs must be under Z39_H0L menu:

expand_doc_bib_loc_usm expand_doc_sort_field SBL##,a

■

A new element set, F, is configurable. Element F must be defined in the z39_server_elements table which resides in the./alephe/tab/z39_server directory. For example:

! 1 2 3 4 5 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! USM01 F ## 100## USM01 F ## 245## USM01 F ## 260##

In this case, the record information that will be returned will include the 100, 245 and 260 fields.

If the F element set is not defined in ./alephe/tab/z39_server/z39_server_elements a full record is returned.

8.

Full support for Bath Profile 2.0, Date of Publication Search, was added to z39_server. For example, it is now possible tosearch for records with a publication date earlier than 1999:

find @and @attr 1=4 history @attr 1=31 @attr 2=1 @attr 3=1 @attr 4=4 @attr 5=100@attr 6=1 1999

9.

alephcom.ini

The variable RefreshOnStart has been implemented in the alephcom.ini [OrderIndex] section. When RefreshOnStart=Y theIndex List will be refreshed when it is opened.

1.

26.



[SearchFind] CCLList

The Library checklist check-status in the Find tab in CCL query is saved when you exit the module and is stored in the[SearchFind] setting of alephcom.ini under CCLList.

2.

When searching in the Find tab, each search saves the searched fields by Search base. The fields are stored under the entry[SearchFindSimple] in alephcom.ini:

[SearchFindSimple]

Example:

[SearchFindSimple] USM01=SYS,WTI,WUT

The next time that you select USM01 as the base for the search, the search field's combo boxes will display by the defaultSystem number, Titles and Uniform Titles.

3.

When displaying records in the Show tab, the last sort of fields by Search base is saved.

The fields are stored under the entry [SearchSort] in alephcom.ini

[SearchSort] <Base's code>

4.

[SearchFind]

You can customize which of the three Find tabs, Basic Query, CCL Query and Fixed Query will appear in your GUI. This isdone in the [SearchFind] section in FindTypes. This is a comma-delimited string, which can have three parts: C,S,F .

C stands for CCL query page, S for Simple Query page, and F stands for Fixed Query page. The characters' order determinesthe order of the tabs in the SearchFind window. Additionally, in the event that you do not want one of them to appear, you cansimply erase its character.

For example, FindTypes=S,C means that the Simple Query page is the first, that the CCL Query is the second, and that theFixed query page does not appear.

5.

A new line

SaxonVersion=

has been added to the Alephcom.ini [PrintExecute] section to define the file used for Saxon. The Saxon package is a collectionof tools for processing XML documents. In ALEPH Saxon is used for printing from the GUI.

The possible values are saxon.exe (used with Microsoft Java Virtual Machine) and saxon7.jar (used with Sun MicrosystemsJava Virtual). If no parameter is entered, the default is saxon7.jar.

6.

A large number of display settings, mostly from [DialogLocation] have removed. Due to changes in the GUI design and theintroduction of guisys.ini, they were not in use any more.

7.

The following new entry has been added to the Alephcom.ini file.:

[VendorList] VendorListSortOption=C (or VendorListSortOption=N)

has been added to the Alephcom.ini file. Up till now, you could only define the default selected radio button if the'SaveVendorListStartPoint' setting was 'Y'. Now it works in all cases. Use this entry to define the default selected radio button -N = Sort by Name and C = Sort by Code. The last selection searched is saved in Alephcom.ini.

8.

The following new entry has been added to the Alephcom.ini file.:

[VendorList] VendorListStartPoint=SWETS

This enables you to set the first entry shown in the alphabetical vendor list.

9.

Alephcom.ini now contains a parameter in the [Mail] section called Charset=windows-1255 (or another value instead of 1255)10.



that enables both the subject and the body of an e-mail message be in a language other than English. The value (for example,1255) taken from Microsoft tables signifies the specific language. Additionally, the user must choose his preferred language inthe appropriate locale fields.

UTIL K

A new ADM table, tab_z701, which is only available in systems using the ISO ILL Web Interface, has been added as UTIL K/13.This table is used to define the potential suppliers list for outgoing ILL requests.

27.

XSL Creator

A new utility has been added that allows for menu-driven creation of additional formats for print forms. This utility, XSL Creator, isavailable from all modules.

28.

Identifying Icons

There are nonclickable icons on the far left of each toolbar. These are used to indicate the toolbars functionality (Serials, Items, and soon). Note that the following icons are therefore no longer active: patron, item, record, vendor. Therefore, you must click theappropriate icon on the right of the entry field instead.

These icons are not customizable.

29.

Shortcut Icons

Each toolbar has a left side and a right side. The right side is a separate bar with its own context string. It is comprised of icons thatcan be used as shortcuts instead of menu commands. The user can customize this bar:

Add icons - add a definition to tbarbmp.dat❍

Delete icons - delete a definition from tbarbmp.dat❍

Modify icons - enter a different bmp file name, or update an existing BMP file.❍

These icons are Bitmap files that are stored under alephcom/tbarbmp The file that describes each bar is alephcom/tab/tbarbmp.dat

The toolbar context strings bars are:

Acquisitions ------------ "OrderBar" "InvoiceBar" "SerialBar" "OrderBarCommands" "InvoiceBarCommands" "SerialBarCommands" Circulation ----------- "UserBar" "ItemBar" "UserBarCommands" "CircItemBarCommands" Cataloging ---------- "RecordBar" "RecordBarCommands"

30.



"CatalogItemBar" "CatalogItemBarCommands"

Switching Between Applications

In every GUI, you can switch between different applications, not only from the bottom toolbar, but also from the ALEPHmenu/Switch Application submenu. This submenu also contains the Exit All ALEPH Applications option, which allows you to exitfrom all open ALEPH GUIs. The switch option to the module you are in is disabled.

31.

Display of the "Link" field in the Callout Bubble in GUI Lists

You can now display the "Link" field (title hard-coded) at the bottom of the callout bubble invoked by right-clicking on a line in aGUI list.

In the majority of GUI lists, the "Link" field is always attached to the end of a line; until now it has been invisible to the GUI user, butaccessible (and in most cases - vital) to the program.

The "Link" field contains the name of the section in ./usm01/tab/pc_tab_col.eng which represents the list (for example,PC_CASH_SUMMARY), together with various record keys and other pieces of information which are used by programs to identify aline uniquely and to process its data.

A flag in .\Alephcom\Tab\Alephcom.ini (under the [TextListBox] section) determines whether or not the "Link" field will bedisplayed at the bottom of the callout bubble or not:

ShowLineLinkInBubble=Y

The flag's value can be easily changed online via a check box entitled "Display link field at bottom of callout bubble"; it is located inthe "General Configuration" tab (ALEPH menu/Options/Customize...). Here is an example of a "Link" definition in.\Alephcom\Tab\Eng\window.dat:

GeneralConfigDlg.Check.ShowLinkInBubble Display link field at bottom of callout bubble

The following is an example of the text that might appear in a "Link" field:

Link [PC_ACQ_LIST] "00000165000015OMRI 010 NNNM00005"

In the example above, the section in pc_tab_col is enclosed in square brackets, and the rest of the data is enclosed in double quotes. Inthis case, the data is composed of the following parts:

Z68-REC-KEY: 00000165000015 Z68-ORDER-NUMBER: OMRI Z68-VENDOR-CODE: 010 Z68-INVOICE-STATUS = "D" ? (Y/N): N Z68-ARRIVAL-STATUS = "C" ? (Y/N): N Z68-ORDER-STATUS = "CLS" ? (Y/N): N Z68-ORDER-TYPE: M Z68-NO-UNITS: 00005

Displaying the "Link" field enables librarians to identify the list in pc_tab_col; it is also useful to programmers for debuggingpurposes.

32.

GUI Lists - Addition of Columns Missing from pc_tab_col.lng

When a GUI list contains more columns than those listed under the appropriate section in ./usm01/tab/pc_tab_col.lng (including thosewith 000 percentage in column 5 of pc_tab_col.lng), the missing columns are all headed "Not in Table"; they can be activated byright-clicking on the list header and selecting their check boxes. In any event, these columns are always included in the callout bubbledisplayed by right-clicking on a line in the list.

This solution is useful for cases in which the program responsible for creating a GUI list generates columns which are not listed inpc_tab_col.lng for some reason. Thus, the "Not in Table" columns, created on the fly, provide instant indication of a mismatchbetween the program and pc_tab_col.lng, which can be resolved forthwith.

33.

Expand Windows in GUI

There are three types of expand windows that are invoked from form windows.

34.



A drop-down calendar, derived from pc_tab_exp_field.❍

Long text in field❍

Separate search window❍

These expand windows can be displayed in two ways:

When the corresponding button next to a field on a form window is clicked.❍

When the corresponding shortcut key is pressed.❍

The TAB key is no longer used in order to "land" on the expand button. When the field is in use (that is, the cursor is in thecorresponding field,):

F4 opens a drop-down calendar❍

F3 opens the Long text in field window❍

The SPACE key opens a separate search window❍

The button used to invoke the separate window type of expand (for example, Vendor List, Budget List, User List and so on) is not an

arrow any more. It has been replaced by a BMP .

All open expand windows can be cancelled by clicking the ESC key (this is not new).

Documentation - Online Help

The GUI online help's table of contents and index now encompass all of the ALEPH GUI. When you select Help/Contents/ Contentstab, you will see the table of contents for all of ALEPH, and not just for the specific module. When you select Help/Contents/ Indextab, you will see the index for all of ALEPH, and not just for the specific module.

35.

DocumentationALEPH User Guide - Administration ChapterSince the Administration module has been integrated into other modules, the Administration Guide chapters have beenintegrated into the Guide as follows:

Overview - deleted■

Privileges - Moved to an independent chapter named Staff Privileges.■

Profiles - Added at the end of the Circulation - Patrons chapter as section 2.8. Patron Profiles.■

Patron Registration - deleted. This information is already in the Circulation - Patron and System Librarian chapters.■

Budgets - will be incorporated into the Acquisitions - Budgets chapter.■

Currencies - was moved to the Acquisitions - Currencies chapter.■

ILL Suppliers - deleted. It was only a link to the ILL - ILL Suppliers chapter.■

Vendors - deleted. It was only a link to the Acquisitions - Vendor chapter.■

1.

36.



Services - The services were integrated into other modules and are documented in these modules' Services chapters.■

System Librarian - Most of the information was moved to the new Staff Privileges - System Librarian chapter.Information relating to Budgets, Vendors and ILL Suppliers was already in the Acquisitions and ILL System Librarianchapters.

■

library.ini

The PCVER line has been removed from library.ini. The version compatibility is checked when connecting to a particular library.

37.

GUI Client Packages

The version number has been dropped from the name of the server directory where the GUI client packages are located. For example,in release 15 the GUI client packages are located in ./aleph/pc_exe.15, whereas in release 16 they are located in ./aleph/pc_exe.

38.

Display Text in GUI Toolbars

Lines in the following files set the content and formatting of the text that displays in the toolbars in the client.

$alephe_error_eng/pc_acq_c0506 is used for the Order Bar in the Acquisitions/Serials client❍

$alephe_error_eng/pc_serial_c0339 is used for the Serials Bar in the Acquisitions/Serials client❍

$alephe_error_eng/pc_cir_c0461 is used for the Items Bar in the Circulation client❍

$alephe_error_eng/pc_com_c0174 is used for the Items in the Cataloging client❍

$alephe_error_eng/pc_cir_c0463 is used for the Patron Bar in the Circulation client❍

The first four toolbars above share the same convention: $1=title, $2=author, $3=BIB number, $4=ADM number.

For example, let us assume that the following setup appears in $alephe_error_eng/pc_acq_c0506:

2001 0000 L BIB=$3;ADM=$4 - $1 ($2)

This configuration produces the following display in the Order bar in the Acquisitions/Serials client:

BIB=555;ADM=555 - The Wage-Price Guideposts (Sheahan, John, 1923-)

The Patron Bar in the Circulation client follows a different convention: $1=name, $2=title, $3=ID and $4=barcode

For example, let us assume that the following setup appears in $alephe_error_eng/pc_cir_c0463

2001 0000 L $1 ($3/$4)

This configuration produces the following display in the Patron Bar in the Circulation client:

Jones, Donald (1604/0250013491604)

The maximum number of characters displayed for each placeholder is 40.

Note that the color of the text is set under the ToolBar name in *.ini files and is always called FgColorDescript. For example, incirc.ini, the following line defines the Patron Information that displays in the Patron Bar:

[UserBar] FgColorDescript=000,000,255

39.

MARC8

There is a new option for handling two additional character sets for MARC8_TO_UTF and for UTF_TO_MARC8: Extended Arabic

40.



and Extended Cyrillic.

Items Services

The Items services are now available from the Items submenu in the Circulation and Cataloging Services menu.

41.

Subject Line in E-mail Messages

The subject line of an e-mail message, when a print form is sent by e-mail, can now be set separately by library and by language.

42.

icon_path Variable

The www_eng directory no longer exists. The icon directory has been divided into different directories according to application andhas been placed together with the HTML files directory.

For example:

/alephe/www_f_eng/icon

/alephe/www_s_eng/icon

/alephe/www_r_eng/icon

This causes changes in the HTML files of the icon path variable. For example:

From

src="&icon_path_eng/icon/f-go.gif"

to

src="&icon_path/f-go.gif"

43.

ALEPH Data Warehouse

In order to optimize the creation of local, site-specific reports, statistics and queries, Ex Libris has created a new environmentspecifically structured for reporting and querying: the ALEPH Data Warehouse.

The ALEPH Data Warehouse is a special reporting environment that supports information access. The primary purpose of datawarehousing is to enable easy and logical access to the data. This is achieved by delivering data in reporting perspective structure andby differentiating operational data and analysis / reporting data.

The field names of the tables in the ALEPH Data Warehouse are normalized and do not include the table name. For example, theorder number field from the order record is named V_ORDER_NUMBER in the Data Warehouse and not Z68_ORDER_NUMBERas in the production data. This enables easy cross-reference among the various tables in the system.

The production ALEPH Oracle tables (in the operational environment) contain keys that can consist of a concatenation of multiplefields, which are not separated into logical fields. In the ALEPH Data Warehouse, these keys are "broken" into logical fields.

For example, the following is the key from the order record:

Z68_REC_KEY CHAR(14)

In the Data Warehouse, this field is broken as follows:

V_DOC_NUMBER NUMBER(9)

V_SEQUENCE NUMBER(5)

ALEPH's operational tables are named Znn tables (for example, the routing list table is called Z18), while the naming convention forthe Data Warehouse set of tables is Vnn (for example, V18).

The Data Warehouse tables are created by the p_struct_tab program. This creates, for the selected operational table, the parallelreporting table in the Data Warehouse.

44.

USR00

USR00 is a new library that contains the user and patron Oracle tables that are shared by the BIB and ADM libraries.

45.



USR00 replaces the ADM library (XXX50) that was used as the user and patron library.

USR00 contains the following Oracle Z tables:

For patrons:

Z34 - Statistics❍

Z61 - Patron's Profiles❍

Z107 - Course Enrollment❍

Z111 - Keywords for Patron Record❍

Z119 - Patron's E-shelf❍

Z123 - Patron's Search History❍

Z325 - Patron SDI Record❍

Z303 - Patron Record❍

Z304 - Patron Address❍

Z308 - Patron ID/Verifications❍

For the staff users:

Z66 - Staff users❍

Z67 - Permissions❍

In addition, the Z105 messages are located there.

Note that the Z305 table is located in the ADM library.

There is no need for the LS (logical synonyms) in the ADM library's file_list. The system is programmed to use USR00 for patronrecords.

ANSEL and MARC-8

Changes have been made in programs and configuration tables for character conversion from and into the MARC-8 character set.These were previously referred to as "ANSEL" programs and tables, and are now referred to as "MARC-8" programs and tables.Therefore, configuration files in ./alephe/gate/, and the ./alephe/www_u_eng/u-char-conv that include a reference to "ANSEL" shouldbe changed to refer to "MARC-8".

46.

ALEPH Backup Scripts

The ALEPH backup scripts have been updated. They now support Oracle9i and follow a symbolic link.

47.

Headers

The headers directory has been removed from the ./alephe directory to an internal location. The reason for this change is that headersare internal and should not be modified by the users.

48.



Unicode-enabled Fields

From now on, if you place a filled Unicode-enabled field in focus, the existing text will be highlighted. You can find examples ofUnicode-enabled fields in the Search tab's Find and Browse nodes and in Cataloging edit forms.

49.

GUI Definitions Removed from the <module>.ini Files

The <module>.ini files (alephcom.ini, acq.ini, and so on) now only contain definitions that are mostly controlled from the actual<module>.ini file, and not from the GUI.

Other definitions have been moved to a set of new files called <module>\tab\guisys.ini. These are definitions that are automaticallyupdated when changes are made from the GUI, such as the splitter's position and the last tab selected from the Main tab.

The dialog box location specifications are also in the guisys.ini files.

50.

Sun Utilities

In order to facilitate the use of Sun utilities (for example, top) within the ALEPH environment, the following line has been added tothe aleph_start file of the alephe directory:

setenv PATH "$PATH/opt/SUNWspro/prod/bin:/usr/X/bin:/usr/local/bin:"

51.

Toolbar.dat

The toolbar.dat file has been removed from \Alephcom\Tab\Eng as it is not in use anymore.

52.

Profile.dat

From now on, there is no need to create a profile directory. It will be created automatically when the user opens any GUI module forthe first time.

For example:

If the line in profile.dat is:

NewUser C:\MyProfile\16.02Ver

when a new user opens any GUI module for the first time, the MyProfile and 16.02Ver directories will be created.

53.

Universal Gateway

ES Update settings have been added to support the ES update service:

Z58-ES-INSERT <program>

<program> defines a program which is called during the run of the ES Update service when the Update action is Record Insert.The program converts the local record to the form required by the Remote Catalog, performs Insert in the Remote Catalog andupdates the local record with the Remote Catalog information.

Possible values:

es_insert_pica - used for PICA Union Catalog■

es_insert_aleph - used for updating the ALEPH Catalog via Z39.50■

Z58-ES-REPLACE <program>

<program> defines a program which is called during the run of the ES Update service when the Update action is RecordReplace. The program converts the local Record to the form required by the Remote Catalog, performs Replace in the RemoteCatalog and updates the local record with the Remote Catalog information.

Possible values:

es_replace_pica - used for PICA Union Catalog■

es_replace_aleph - used for updating the ALEPH Catalog via Z39.50■

1.

54.



Z58-ES-DELETE <program>

<program> defines a program which is called during the run of the ES Update when the Update action is Record Delete. Theprogram performs Delete in the Remote Catalog and deletes the Remote Catalog information from the local record.

Possible values:

es_delete_pica - used for PICA Union Catalog■

es_delete_aleph - used for updating the ALEPH Catalog via Z39.50■

A new setting, Z58-CIRC-PROGRAM, has been added to the Universal Gateway configuration in ./alephe/gate/<target>.conf.The syntax is as follows:

Z58-CIRC-PROGRAM <program>

<program> is the program which is involved when the Circ Status hyperlink is clicked in the full record view of the WebOPAC in a Union Catalog. This program takes a circulation status from the campus, which is the target, and displays it in theWeb OPAC interface. For example:

Z58-CIRC-PROGRAM www_f_union_circ_nsls

The program takes a circulation status derived from the NSLS algorithm. It searches for WRD=<value> where <value> istaken from the 001 field of an NSL90 record. The 926 field then performs the following mapping:

$$a -> Sub-Library column$$b -> OPAC note column$$c -> Location column$$e -> Due Date column (if $$e is empty, an On Shelf message appears in the Due Date column.

2.

Remote Database Update

Remote Database Update functionality has been implemented according to the Z39.50 Information Retrieval Protocol using theDatabase Update Extended Service of the Protocol. The development has been done according to the Union Catalog Profile(http://lcweb.loc.gov/z3950/agency/profiles/ucp.doc) and partially conforms to the profile requirements. Remote DatabaseUpdate functionality has been added to the Cataloging GUI. It includes options to insert, update and delete records in a remotecatalog.

To indicate that the record has a corresponding entry in a remote catalog, an EXTDB field is added to the local record. The tagcontains a remote catalog name (Z39.50 target name). A local record can have a maximum of one EXTDB field.

The Z39.50 server of the Remote Catalog must return the record ID (EXTS field) and version identifier as a Diagnostic or as aDatabase record (EXTV field), as required by the Union Catalog Profile.

Here is an example which includes these types of fields:

EXTS L $$a000036644 EXTV L $$aYOHANAN$$b99$$c20031120$$lUSM01$$h0909 EXTDB L $$aUSM01_Z39

For further information, refer to the Remote Database Update document in the Ex Libris Documentation Center.

3.

GUI Shortcut Keys

GUI Shortcut Keys

The shortcut keys for switching within panes in a GUI client are as follows:

Shortcut Keys Lets you do this

TAB move to the next control in the dialog box.

Shift+TAB move to the previous control in the dialog box.

Ctrl+TAB move from the first control in the first toolbar to the lowerpane.

55.



Ctrl+Alt+TAB move from the lower pane to the first control in the firsttoolbar.

Ctrl+1 move to the left pane, containing a tree.

Ctrl+2 move to the right upper pane.

Ctrl+Shift+2 move to the right editor window in multiple view inCataloging.

Ctrl+3 move to the right lower pane.

Ctrl+4 move to the navigation tree (left lower pane) in Cataloging.

Ctrl+5 move to the first control in the top toolbar.

Ctrl+6 move to the second control in the top toolbar.

Ctrl+7 move to the third control in the top toolbar.

Batch Queue

From now on, instead of a batch queue per library, you can define a group of libraries to be handled by one single deamon. This isdone by a new table, tab_library_group, which defines a group of libraries to share the same batch.

For example, according to the following line, the hosting library is USM10 and the batch queue will be running in the hostinglibrary's data_scratch directory. The batch queue will handle USM11 and USM12's batches too.

!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!! USM10 USM11 USM12

The batch queue can be started and closed from any library for all other libraries in a specific line.

56.

Loading Records from OCLC in a Multi-ADM Libraries Environment

The program determines which ADM library to use as the ADM library of the uploaded record according to the content of field 049$a in the tab_z30 table of each ADM library.

The content of each 049 $a field can only appear once within all the tab_z30 tables in the various ADM libraries.

The possible ADM libraries are the libraries related to a bibliographic library in the library_relation table, as seen in the followingexample:

!1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!> ADM USM01 USM50 USM51 USM52

57.

Loading Records from RLIN in a Multi-ADM Libraries Environment

The program determines which ADM library to use as the ADM library of the uploaded record according to the content of the 950 $1field in the tab_z30 table of each ADM library.

The content of each 950 $1 field can only appear once within all the tab_z30 tables in the various ADM libraries.

The possible ADM libraries are the libraries related to a bibliographic library in the library_relation table, as seen in the followingexample:

!1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!> ADM USM01 USM50 USM51 USM52

58.

RLIN Directories

Until now, the RLIN directories were defined in the prof_library table of the bibliographic library. Now the directories are defined intab100. Here are the related lines from tab100:

RLIN-INPUT-DIR=rlin_input_dir

59.



RLIN-OUTPUT-DIR=rlin_output_dir

X-Server

There is a new method of retrieving circulation status information by using ALEPH's X server. For more information, seeUnion Catalog.

1.

A new service, CIRC-STATUS, has been added to X-server. The service accepts as input a BIB library and system number andreturns all items associated with that number. As with all X services, only users with proper permissions are allowed to performan action.

The following must be configured:

WWW-X in Column 1 of tab_z30_sort to define the sort order of the items:

! 1 2 3 4 5 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!-!-!!-!!!!! WWW-X A 01 A 05

■

The following line must be added to $alephe_tab/www_x_func:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! ########## CIRC-STATUS www_x_circ_status

■

The following line must be added to $alephe_tab/user_function.lng:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!! WWW-X L X-SERVER Interface CIRC-STATUS L Circstatus

■

A license is required for each X service so the following line must appear in $alephe_tab/license.www_x:

CIRC-STATUS Y

■

2.

60.

Character Conversion

Note that the UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL and UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI character conversion instances are not only used for the mailand print options of the Web OPAC. These instances are used in other scenarios of the system, such as in the Selective Disseminationof Information (sdi-01) service. For this reason, it is recommended to set the server type of these instances to hashes and not toWWW-F in the tab_character_conversion_line table. Instead of:

UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL WWW-F # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_8859_1

UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI WWW-F # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_ascii

use:

UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL ##### # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_8859_1 UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI ##### # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_ascii

61.

OCLC Server

From now on, the OCLC server is automatically referred to the tab_preferred table.1.

oclc_server can now handle passport files containing more than one record.2.

62.

RLIN Server

From now, the RLIN ue_03 is automatically referred to the tab_preferred table.

63.

Login Password in GUIs

It is now possible to work offline in a GUI, without signing in. This can be done by clicking Cancel in the ALEPH Password dialogbox. The following message (0008 in $alephe_error_eng/global will then appear:

0008 0000 L ALEPH Login not supported on your GUI configuration

64.

ALEPH Cookie65.



The ALEPH cookie name has been changed from SESSION_ID to ALEPH_SESSION_ID. In addition, the cookie is nowsession-based instead of having an expiration time. This means that when the browser is closed, the cookie will disappear.

Apache Server

The Apache server version was upgraded to Apache 2. mod_aleph was replaced with mod_aleph_2 to interface with this new Apache.In addition, the Open SSL version was upgraded to openssl-0.9.7c.

66.

print.ini

The entry FullPrintout has been added to Alephcom\tab\print.ini:

FullPrintout 00 Y M full.prn

This definition was in Sear\Tab\print.ini in previous versions.

1.

The following entries have been added to Alephcom\tab\print.ini:

ItemLabelPrint 20 N P itemlbl.prn CompletedVolumsPrint 00 Y P comp_vol.prn

These definitions were in Items\Tab\print.ini in previous versions.

2.

67.

Services

Every ALEPH service now contains a Library field. Staff users can select the library on which they want to run the service from thedrop-down list. The display of the libraries in the drop-down list is controlled by the password authorization for the ADM library (forexample, USM50) to which the user active in the GUI belongs. This is derived from the PAS relation line in$alephe/tab/library_relation for that ADM library:

PAS USM50 USM01 USM10 USM60 USM20 USM30 USR00

If the user is an ADMIN user (superuser), the list will display all of the ALEPH libraries.

68.



ACQUISITIONS

Version 16

ACQ.INI●

Arrival - Message to Initiator of the Order●

Budget List - Filtered by Group, Status●

Budget Transfer●

Claims●

Invoice Tax●

Line Item Invoice Note●

Multi Order Index - Additional Order Number 1●

Order Bar Search Options●

Order Form - Additional Order No.●

Order List - Local Price (Col. 13)●

Order Log●

Order Save Default●

Printouts●

Search Mode Options●

Vendor Sharing●

Services

General ADM and Orders Creation (acq-24)●

Rebuild HTML Pack (sys-02)●

Renew Order Encumbrance (acq-06-a AND acq-06-b)●

Restart Server (sys-01)●

Update Vendor Code in Order and Subscription Records (acq-26)●

Line Item Invoice NoteThe invoice line item note (Z75-I-NOTE) has been added as a new column to both lists: Invoice List ofOrder and General Invoice and Line Items.

1.

Multi Order Index - Additional Order Number 1In the Multi Order Index window, the field Order Number 2 has been changed to Additional OrderNumber 1.

2.

Order Form - Additional Order No.The names of the following three fields were changed in the Order Form (2. General) tab:

Order Number 1❍

Order Number 2❍

3.

Release Notes - Acquisitions - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582Q...UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00082/file/n-acq-16 (1 of 9) [3/31/2004 5:15:21 PM]

Order Number 3❍

These fields are now called:

Order Number❍

Additional Order No. 1❍

Additional Order No. 2❍

Search Mode OptionsThe options of the Search mode drop-down menu for Vendors/Budgets are now defined inpc_tab_exp_field.lng table. The new entries are: ACQ-VENDOR-SEARCH-MODE andACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE.

Example:

ACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE L Browse 1 ACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE L Keywords 2 ACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE L Exact 3 ACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE L Wildcard 4 ACQ-BUDGET-SEARCH-MODE L Group 5

The relevant entries in window.dat file of ALEPHCOM module are no longer in use.

4.

Renew Order Encumbrance (acq-06-a AND acq-06-b)The following options have been added to the services: Renew Order Encumbrance for Monograph,Serial and Standing Orders:

This service produces a report that lists all renewed order encumbrances. The relevant new fieldsare: Report Output File and Report Format.The form is: renew-order-encumbrance-nn

❍

There is also an option to produce a preview report before actually renewing the encumbrances.This can be done by selecting "NO" in the new field: Update Database. If you want the renewalof the encumbrance to be actually performed (and not only a preview report), select "Yes" in theUpdate Database field.

❍

5.

Update Vendor Code in Order and Subscription Records (acq-26)A new service, Update Vendor Code in Order and Subscription Records (acq-26), has beenimplemented. This service is used to update or replace the vendor code in order records (Z68) andsubscription records (Z16). The service is useful when, for example, a vendor ceases operations or ismerged with another vendor.

The following order records are processed by this service:Orders that have the same sublibrary in the Sublibrary field (Z68-SUB-LIBRARY) as those❍

6.



selected in the sublibrary filter.

Records in which the Vendor Code (Z68-VENDOR-CODE) equals the code selected in the OldVendor Code field.

❍

Records in which the Order Status (Z68-ORDER-STATUS) is NOT one of the following: CLS(closed), VC (vendor cancelled) or LC (library cancelled).

❍

The following subscription records are processed by this service:Subscriptions that have the same sublibrary in the Sublibrary field (Z16-SUB-LIBRARY) asthose selected in the sublibrary filter.

❍

Records in which the Vendor Code field (Z16-VENDOR-CODE) equals the code selected in theOld Vendor Code field.

❍

Records in which the To Date field (Z16-COPY-TO-DATE) is LATER than the current date.❍

Restart Server (sys-01)This service stops a server and restarts it. The server that is stopped is selected by the user and can bethe pc_server, the www_server or the oclc_server. When run, the service will stop the existing serverrunning on the default port and start a new one on the same port.

7.

Rebuild HTML Pack (sys-02)This service rebuilds the html.pck file after you edit a form or a letter in the form_eng directory. Forany changes to these files to appear, run this service.

8.

General ADM and Orders Creation (acq-24)

There is a new optional function in acq-24, Assigning a vendor to orders according to BIB data.In order to use this option, five new parameters were added:

Use ISBN to assign Vendor (Y/N) (P-SW-ASSIGN-VENDOR) Default "dummy" vendor code (P-VENDOR-CODE) Order Status (P-ORDER-STATUS) Method of Acquisition (P-METHOD-OF-ACQ) Estimated Date of Arrival (P-EDA)

If Use ISBN to assign Vendor is N, and Default vendor code is not filled, then p_acq_24works as before, i.e., Z68 records are not assigned a vendor.

■

If Use ISBN to assign vendor is N, and Default vendor code is filled, p_acq_24 createsZ68 records as before, assigning them the following fields from the vendor record (Z70):

Z70-VENDOR-CODE --> Z68-VENDOR-CODE Z70-CONTACT-1 --> Z68-VENDOR-CONTACT Z70-TERMS-SIGN --> Z68-E-TERM-SIGN Z70-TERMS-PERCENT --> Z68-E-TERM-PERCENT Z70-DELIVERY-TYPE-1 --> Z68-DELIVERY-TYPE

■

1.

9.



Z70-CURRENCY-1 --> Z68-E-CURRENCY

If Use ISBN to assign vendor is Y, the following method is used to locate the appropriateZ70 record (only generic vendor records are searched):

■

Vendor prefix is extracted from the ISBN in the BIB record - subfield $$a of field 020(USMARC) or subfield $$a of field 010 (UNIMARC). Note that for the purpose of vendor prefixextraction, valid ISBNs are currently those with country/language group "0" or "1" (first digit)and whose structure is valid according to ISBN standards (the tenth digit should be a correctchecksum digit or "X").

The prefix (7 digits maximum) is then matched against fields Z70-ACCOUNT-M,Z70-ACCOUNT-S or Z70-VENDOR-ACCOUNT. If no match is found (i.e., there is no Z70record containing the prefix in either of the three fields), then the Default vendor code is used.If, on the other hand, more than one vendor with the same prefix is found, a secondary check - ofthe vendor name - is performed on this subset of vendor records.

Vendor name is taken from the BIB record - subfield b of field 260 (USMARC) or subfield c offield 210 (UNIMARC). This is then matched against the Z70-VENDOR-NAME field of thesubset. If this secondary check does not yield a match, the Default vendor code is used.

If an appropriate Z70 record is eventually found, yet another check is performed as a securitymeasure. Based on P-SUB-LIBRARY or P-ORDER-UNIT (parameters of p_acq_24), check thatthe generic vendor has a sub-level vendor record with sublibrary or order unit attached(according to the variable in tab100 USE-ORDER-UNIT = Y/N). If no sub-vendor record isfound, then check that the Z602 record for the generic vendor has the appropriate order unit orsublibrary.

When a vendor record is chosen, some of its fields are assigned to the order record, as describedabove; apart from those fields, default values for the fields Z68-LETTER-TYPE,Z68-ORDER-DELIVERY-TYPE and Z68-SEND-METHOD will be populated from the vendorrecord.

After the batch is run, the Order Index List in the Acquisitions GUI (with index "Vendor code")can be used to locate and manually handle orders to which the default vendor was assigned. Inaddition, all orders created by the batch can be traced by using Z68-ORDER-NUMBER-1 (OrderNumber 2 parameter in the batch) in the Order Index List.

The field Order Number 2 has been changed to Additional Order Number 1.2.

Order Save DefaultThe text in the library note field can now be saved as a default (using the Save Default button).

10.

ClaimsWhen creating a new claim or updating an existing one, the new Claim Details window appears. It nowcontains:

11.



Claim Text, Claim Date, Vendor Reply, Reply Date1.

When the user wants to send a claimi (via e-mail/EDI/print), the Send Claim checkbox must bechecked. You can use this field as well to re-send a claim which was already sent in the past. Donot check this field if you want to update a claim without sending it.

The Print Format must also be selected from the pull-down list.

2.

In the "Save Information" group you can determine whether to update the "Expected ArrivalDate" automatically or you can specify a date manually.

3.

The claim-order-logging has been improved: When creating a new claim or updating an existingclaim two logs are written in the Order Log (Z71):

One includes the claim text and claim date1.

Another includes the vendor reply text (if there is any) and reply date2.

Whenever a claim is dispatched to a vendor, an additional log is written in the Order Log, whichincludes the print format and the date.

4.

Order LogA User Note can be added to the Order Transaction Log's system note, and a User Note can be insertedinto the log transaction.

The structure of Z71 has not been changed. 'User Note' text is stored in Z71-DATA, between <<>>,next to the System Note.

z71_data ......System note <<user note>>

12.

Invoice TaxAdditional tax information can be added to the General Invoice, Line Item and Budget Transaction oftype INV (invoice).

The following additions have been made to the structure of the database tables Z77 (general invoice),Z75 (line item) and Z601 (budget transaction):

Z77: 02 Z77-VAT-PER-LINE Z75: 02 Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT Z601: 02 Z601-VAT-SUM

General Invoice-Z77-VAT-PER-LINEThe new field VAT per Line field can be either "Y" (Yes) or "N" (No). Its default value is "N".

1.

13.



When it is "N", the VAT amount of the general invoice (Z77-VAT-AMOUNT) is fixed andsaved in the database. In this case, VAT values of all attached line items(Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT) are calculated from Z75-I-TOTAL-AMOUNT according to the VATpercent of the general invoice.

When it is "Y", the VAT amount of the general invoice is always zero in the database. It iscalculated on the fly from the VAT amounts of all attached line items, for display/print purposes(e.g., Invoice Report - p_acq_10). This means that VAT values of the line items(Z75-I-VAT-AMOUNT) can be set individually for each line item.

Budget Transaction INV - Z601-VAT-SUMThe new field Vat Sum is calculated from Z601-ACTIVE-SUM according to the VAT percent ofthe attached line item (Z75) record, regardless of the value of Z77-VAT-PER-LINE; it cannot beedited by the user. The field is also used for budget balance calculation.

2.

General Invoice GUI WindowThe value of Z77-VAT-PER-LINE is set by a check box. When it is unchecked(Z77-VAT-PER-LINE = "N"), the "VAT amount" and the "VAT percent" edit boxes can beedited. When it is checked (Z77-VAT-PER-LINE = "Y"), these two edit boxes become inactive;the "VAT amount" edit box will contain a calculated VAT amount from all the attached lineitems.

3.

Line Item GUI Window - multi-line invoice:"VAT amount" and "VAT percent" edit boxes have been added. When Z77-VAT-PER-LINE is"N", they become inactive; otherwise, they can be edited in the same way as the general invoicewindow, i.e., the VAT amount can be entered manually or calculated from the total amount byentering a VAT percent.

4.

Line Item GUI Window - single-line invoice:When the "New" button is clicked in the list of invoices attached to an order, then this window isused to create a general invoice and a line item simultaneously. In this case,Z77-VAT-PER-LINE is defaulted to "N" and cannot be changed in the current window. The"VAT amount" and "VAT percent" edit boxes can be edited accordingly.

"Invoice VAT Price" and "Payment VAT Price", calculated from Z601-VAT-SUM, have beenadded to the printout produced by clicking the "Print" button of the BudgetInformation-transaction tab 4.

In addition, "Invoices-VAT" and "Payments-VAT" have been added to the "Budget Summary"report (p_acq_16).

5.

Arrival - Message to the Initiator of the OrderUpon the FIRST arrival of an order, a message can now be sent (an e-mail or a printed letter) to theinitiator of the order, by setting the value of the "Action" field (Z68-TARGET-FLAG) in the "OrderForm" to "Send Mail" (Z68-TARGET-FLAG = M).

14.



The printing parameters are defined in the < ArrivalMessage > entry of

.\Acq\Tab\print.ini .\Acq\Tab\eng\print.dat (subject line for e-mail)

The form is: < acq-arrival-message.xsl >

Order List - Local Price (Col. 13)If the order invoice status is complete, then the local price is calculated by summarizing the amounts ofall invoices. This is how the calculation has been performed so far, but now, for order types Serial orStanding Order the system calculates the local price differently. For order types Serial or StandingOrder, the estimated price (as is) will be displayed in Column 13.

15.

Order Bar Search OptionsThe list of search options is defined in the new ORDER-SEARCH menu of pc_tab_exp_field.lng.

Example:

ORDER-SEARCH L Order number ON ORDER-SEARCH L Group order number GON ORDER-SEARCH L Vendor reference RF ORDER-SEARCH L ISBN ISBN

This allows you to configure fewer entries for the Order bar as opposed to the Order Index that uses theACQ_INDEX_TYPE menu.

In addition, it is now possible to find an entry through the Search function.

ORDER-SEARCH L BIB Sys No. BIB-SYS ORDER-SEARCH L ADM Sys No. ADM-SYS ORDER-SEARCH L BIB Title BIB-TIT

BIB-SYS - look for system number in the first BIB relation of connected library.ADM-SYS - look for system number in connected library.BIB-XXX - Does a CCL search (XXX = )

In the case of BIB-XXX there may be multiple hits. If so, there is an option to view the set in theSearch function via confirmation messages.

Example of adding a BIB search value:

ORDER-SEARCH L BIB Author BIB-AUT

Note: In this example, AUT must be an index code that is used by the system.

The old option to define BIB search option by values defined in tab_acq_index is still valid.

16.

Budget List - Filtered by Group, Status and YearThe option to search for a budget by budget group using filtering by status and year has been added tothe search option of:

Acq|Admin tab|budget

17.



For example:

Select the "Group" search type and enter the search term as one string in the field below, e.g., MON2003 AC, to indicate an active budget with group MON for the year 2003;

or

Type the group MON as search string and fill in the status AC and the year 2003 in the correspondingfields for filtering.

Note that "by year" refers to any ANNUAL budget with the suffix "-YEAR" (e.g., HISTORY-2003) ora NON-ANNUAL budget (by convention such budgets belong to any year).

PrintoutsFrom this version on the following printouts can include address information from the linked patronrecord:

acq-arrival-slip❍

acq-m-order-info❍

acq-s-order-info❍

18.

Budget TransferA new option, Two-way Money Transfer, has been added to the Budget Transfer functionality.

Previously, it was possible to transfer money only from the left-hand budget to the right-hand budget,by typing in a sum and clicking the "Go" button.

Now, two-way money transfer is possible; the "Go" button has been replaced by two arrows - right andleft. When they are enabled, clicking the right arrow transfers money from the left-hand budget to theright-hand budget, and vice versa for the left arrow. The feedback message of the transaction detailstakes this into account and displays correct information. In addition, the information for the twobudgets is refreshed as before.

Note that several important data verification methods have been incorporated into the budget transfermechanism, in order to avoid erroneous or unintentional money transfers:

The budget codes for both budgets can be entered either by selecting a code from the list (byusing the expand button), or by typing it in and pressing Enter. Only if the budget code is validare its details shown. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.

1.

When an existing budget code is changed or erased from the edit field, its information isimmediately erased too, thus preventing transfer.

2.

The two transfer arrow buttons are enabled ONLY when both budgets are valid and their3.

19.



information is displayed, AND the sum to transfer is greater than zero.

Vendor SharingA new function, Vendor Sharing, has been added. Its implementation depends on theVENDOR-SHARING parameter in tab100 of the ADM library, with possible values of 0 or 1.

0 - is the default value if this parameter is not defined in the table. When a Vendor Filter inSearch mode for Vendors is active and set to filter by a specific sublibrary/order unit, vendorsthat have not been assigned a sublibrary/order unit are considered to be "general use" vendorsand are therefore displayed in the list. Such vendors can be assigned to any order. If the vendorhas even one sublibrary/order unit, it must match the sublibrary/order unit of the assigned order.

❍

1 - can be useful for sites that have many vendor records that are irrelevant to a particular library.For example, use this value when the site shares a single vendor table for multiple ADM librariesor the site has processed a batch load of general vendor records. When a Vendor Filter in Searchmode for Vendors is active and is set to filter by a specific sublibrary/order unit, vendors thathave not been assigned this specific sublibrary/order unit or have not been assigned anysublibrary/order unit at all will not be displayed in the list. When a vendor is assigned to anorder, it must have the same sublibrary/order unit as the order. Vendors that do not have anysublibrary/order unit cannot be used on orders.

❍

20.

ACQ.INIDue to changes in the structure of acq.ini, the following entries have been removed:

DialogLocation Date_Format DocList BudgetNumber WindowLocation

1.

The [OrderIndex] and [GlobalSearch] sections have been replaced by the section[NewCancelIndexList].

2.

21.



ADMINISTRATION

Version 12.1●

Release 12.2●

Release 12.3●

Release 12.4●

Version 14.1●

Release 14.2●

Version 15●

In Version 16 the Administration module has been deleted. Unique functionality has been moved asfollows:

Profile definitions have become part of the Circulation client.●

Permission management (Staff Privileges) is available via the key icon on the Operations bar (atthe bottom right of the screen) in all modules.

●

Currency management is available in Acquisitions.●

Functionality - Administration

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR8A4UY...NJ4AU37661EYY-00083/file/n-admin-list-of-releases [3/31/2004 5:15:21 PM]

ALEPHADM

Version 16

Connect to Library Menu●

Import Tables Window●

per_lib.ini●

Privileges and Station ID●

Security Menu●

Tables Navigator●

window.dat●

window.datThe AlephADM GUI module now takes the description of ALEPH GUI modules (the interfacenames) from the Alephadm\Tab\Lng\window.dat file and not from the Alephcom\tab\app_root.datfile.

The following lines have been added to Alephadm\Tab\Eng\window.dat:

App_root.Description.alephcom Common headings App_root.Description.alephadm AlephADM App_root.Description.acq Acquisition App_root.Description.admin Administration App_root.Description.catalog Cataloging App_root.Description.circ Circulation App_root.Description.jobmgr Task Manager App_root.Description.ill Interlibrary Loan App_root.Description.items Items App_root.Description.sear Search App_root.Description.serial Serials Control

1.

per_lib.iniThe Alephadm\tab\per_lib.ini file is not in use anymore. It has been removed from theAlephadm\tab directory.

2.

Connect to Library MenuThe Connect to library list of libraries has been removed from the Library menu in the status bar.

3.

Security MenuThe Login as Another User option is always enabled in the Security menu.1.

The Temporary Change Password option is always enabled in the Security menu2.

The Override Password option is always enabled in the Security menu.3.

4.

Release Notes - ALEPHADM - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00084/file/n-alephadm-16 (1 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:15:32 PM]

Privileges and Station IDThe Privileges and Station ID options are always disabled.

5.

Import Tables WindowIn the Import Tables window, the library list is filtered according to the PAS relation of theconnected staff user. For example, if it is a USM50 staff user, only libraries which are in the PASrelation of USM50 appear in the Import Tables window.

6.

Tables NavigatorAfter the Login as Another User or Temporary Change Password options are activated, theopen Tables Navigator library list is updated.

7.

Release Notes - ALEPHADM - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00084/file/n-alephadm-16 (2 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:15:32 PM]

CATALOGING

Version 16

852 Field●

ADM Libraries●

ALEPH Keyboard●

Authority Control●

Authority Control - Messaging Daemon●

Authority Control - Subdivisions●

CAT Field●

catalog.ini●

Catalog Bar●

Cataloging Forms●

Change ALPHA●

Character's Unicode Value●

Check Programs●

Create New Record●

Editing Records●

Electronic Location●

Exporting Records in MARC Format●

Filter Libraries●

Fix Routines●

Help on Field●

Holdings Filter●

Holdings Records●

Holdings Records and OWN●

Importing Records●

Item History●

Linking Programs●

Locate Records●

Lock Record●

Match Routines●

MARC 21●

Menus●

Merge Routines●

Move Routines●

New Record●

Preferred Authority Library●

Overview Tree●

OWN Field Check●

Record Length●

Record Manager●

Save on Server and Local Drive●

Release Notes - Cataloging - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582Q...UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00085/file/n-cat-16 (1 of 23) [3/31/2004 5:16:09 PM]

Search Headings Options●

Search Menu●

Search Subfield Options●

Sorting Fields in an Authority Record●

Tag Information●

Templates●

UNIMARC Record Format Creation●

View in Web OPAC●

Services

Alphabetize Headings - Setup (manage-16)●

Alphabetize Headings - Parallel Processing (manage-160)●

Build Counters for Logical Bases (manage-32)●

Check Input File Against Database (manage-36)●

Convert MARC Records - Step 2 (file-02)●

Convert ALEPH Sequential to MARC Communication Format (file-12)●

Create Holdings and Item Records Using Bibliographic Data (manage-50)●

Delete Bibliographic Records Including Related ADM/HOL Records (manage-33)●

Delete Unlinked Headings (manage-15)●

Download Machine-Readable Records (print-03)●

Export BIB Records with Holdings Information (export-01)●

Export Holdings Records (export-02)●

Fix and Check Catalog Records (manage-25)●

Fix Catalog Records (manage-37)●

Global Changes (manage-21)●

List Unauthorized Headings (auth-03)●

Load ALEPH Sequential MARC Records (manage-18)●

Load Catalog Records - Parallel Load (manage-18-p)●

Load MARCIVE Records (file-99)●

Load PALAS Shelfmark (manage-45)●

Load YBP Records (file-96)●

Modify Cataloging Records File (file-08)●

Pre-process Input File of Records Before Load (manage-39)●

Update Cataloging Records (file-95)●



Update Tables Package (sys-03)●

URL Check (print-11)●

Load Catalog Records - Parallel Load (manage-18-p)The internal name of the Load Catalog Records - Parallel Load service has been changed from manage-18-p to manage-180.

1.

Build Counters for Logical Bases (manage-32)The Build Counters for Logical Bases (manage-32) service has been improved and now works faster. Parameters have changedto:

2.



Procedure to Run (Update counters /Rebuild counters)❍

Logical Base❍

Processes to create❍

The Heading Sequence Number (Start/End) parameters have been removed.

Note that the Update counters option is only functional when adding a new base (that is, the complete Z0102 does not need tobe dropped; lines need to be added).

Authority Control - Messaging DaemonUE_11 is the process that sends and receives messages (Z105) between databases. In the authority mechanism, it is used toreflect changes made to the authority record in the bibliographic database. In previous versions, it was necessary to run UE_11in both the authority and the bibliographic libraries. From this version, the UE_11 should only be run under the library definedin the z105_library variable in the aleph_start file. If the variable is set as follows:

setenv z105_library USR00

then UE_11 only needs to be run in the USR00 library.

3.

Cataloging FormsThe following forms were deleted from the Cataloging directory of the administrative libraries (USM50, USM51):

007_a.eng, 007_d.eng, 007_h.eng, 007_m.eng, 007_t.eng, 007_z.eng, 007_c.eng, 007_g.eng, 007_k.eng, 007_s.eng,007_v.eng, scr_007.eng, 008_bk.eng

These forms are irrelevant for these libraries.

1.

The format of the cataloging forms has been modified. For a detailed explanation on the new format, please refer to theSystem Librarian chapter of the Cataloging module.

2.

4.

Create Holdings and Item Records Using Bibliographic Data (manage-50)The following parameters have been removed from the service:

Delete Main Field❍

BIB Cataloger❍

BIB Cataloging Level❍

These fields were irrelevant since this service does not make changes to bibliographic records.

5.

Authority ControlIn previous versions, subfield $2 of the bibliographic record was not treated as a standard residual and it was always deletedwhen the bibliographic field was updated from the authority record. From this version on, subfield $2 is deleted only if the fieldin the authority record has a $2 subfield.

6.

Record LengthIn previous versions, the records were limited to 2000 subfields. From this version on, records are limited to 5000 subfields.

7.

Load ALEPH Sequential MARC Records (manage-18)You can now merge records when updating records through the Load ALEPH Sequential MARC Records (manage-18) service.To support this development, the following options have been added to the service:

A new run procedure, "Use merge routine", has been added to the "If Updating Current Records" field.❍

A new parameter, Merge Routine, has been added. This option enables the user to select the merge routine that must be❍

8.



performed when the "Use merge routine" option is selected.

Locate RecordsFrom this version, the Brief List window displayed after performing the Locate function supports multi-selection. Afterhighlighting a group of records, the Select button opens up the catalog card of the selected records.

1.

The bases for the Locate function are defined in the ALEPHCOM/TAB/LOCATE.DAT file. This file affects both theLocate function in the Cataloging module and the Locate function in the ILL module. From this version, it is possible todefine a separate file for the Cataloging module. This is done by adding a locate.dat file to the catalog directory of thelibrary (./pc_tab/catalog). This file must be in the same format of the locate.dat of the alephcom directory. Note that ifthe file is added, even if it is empty, then the bases in the Locate window of the Cataloging module are taken from thelocate.dat file of the catalog directory. If the file is left empty, then no bases are displayed from the Cataloging moduleeven if bases have been defined for the locate.dat file in the alephcom directory.

2.

9.

Character's Unicode ValueIt is now possible to view the Unicode value of a character from the catalog record. This is done by placing the mouse pointerover it; after about two seconds a ToolTip appears above the character displaying the character's Unicode value, identified bythe hexadecimal representation of its Unicode number prefixed with a U; for example, U+0041 for "A".

To support this development, a new flag has been added to the Catalog.ini file under the [Editor] section. The new flag,ShowUnicodeValue, determines whether or not the ToolTip should be displayed. If the flag is set to 'Y', the ToolTip with theUnicode value is displayed. If the flag is set to 'N', the ToolTip is not displayed.

10.

Holdings Records and OWNIn early versions of ALEPH the OWN field was used in holdings records to define the "owner" of the record, in other words,the sublibrary to which the record belongs. From version 12.4 this option was removed and the OWN field is now used tocontrol update access to all types of MARC records (BIB, HOL, ADM, AUT). The user is checked for access/updatepermission according to the contents of the record's OWN field(s). The original functionality of the OWN field has beenrestored for sites that are interested in continuing working as in earlier versions. To support this the following new section wasadded to the Catalog.ini file:

[HolOwnTextDefaults] Activate= Library= SubLibrary= Note=

If the Activate flag is set to Y, when holdings records are created the Enter Owner Information window is displayed. Thiswindow enables you to define the owner of the holdings record. If the flag is set to N, then this window is not displayed andusers can continue using the OWN field to control update access.

The Library, SubLibrary and Note parameters can be used to save default owner values. These parameters are automaticallyfilled in by the system after clicking the Save Defaults button from the Enter Owner Information window.

11.

Change ALPHAThe Change ALPHA option from the Edit menu has been renamed Change Direction. The only functionality of the ALPHA ofthe field is related to the direction of the script (Left/Right); for example, for entering a Hebrew field in a Latin record.

12.

Search MenuThe Search menu that includes the different search options for fields and subfields (for example, Browse URL, Search fieldheadings of current library) has been moved into the Edit menu.

13.



Check ProgramsFrom this version, check programs attached to the NAV-MAP-DELETE check type are run when the Total Delete optionis selected from the Record Manager in the Cataloging module.

1.

From this version the check_doc_line_contents table is indicators-sensitive.2.

From this version, the ISSN validation routine includes validation of the ISSN's check digit.3.

A new program, check_doc_paired_fields, has been implemented. This program checks the following two aspectsrelated to fields that are linked by subfield $6 (subfield $6 contains data that links fields that are different scriptrepresentations of each other):

If the record contains a field with subfield $$6 <value numeric - other than '00'>, there must be an additional fieldwith the same tag and indicators and the same $$6 value.

■

If the record contains a field with subfield $$6 <value numeric - other than '00'>, there must be no more than twofields that have the same $$6 value.

■

4.

A new program, check_doc_url, has been implemented. This program checks the validity of an external URI/URL linkfrom subfield $u of the following fields:

505 (Formatted Contents Note)■

506 (Restrictions on Access Note)■

514 (Data Quality Note)■

520 (Summary, Etc.)■

530 (Additional Physical Form Available Note)■

540 (Terms Governing Use and Reproduction Note)■

545 (Biographical or Historical Note)■

552 (Entity and Attribute Information Note)■

555 (Cumulative Index/Finding Aids Note)■

563 (Binding Information)■

583 (Action Note)■

856 (Electronic Location and Access)■

The error message that will appear in the messages tab contains the following:

Error <The error code that was returned from the protocol> in the URL <URL from subfield $u>.

5.

New check_doc types have been added to the check_doc table:

Z39-INSERT: performed when a record is inserted via Z39.50 ES Update.■

Z39-REPLACE: performed when a record is replaced via Z39.50 ES Update.■

Z39-DELETE: performed when a record is deleted via Z39.50 ES Update.■

6.

14.

Help on FieldFrom this version, the help on fields is always displayed. The help is displayed for each field in the the Tag Information tab ofthe lower pane after the tag from the record (Catalog Editor - upper pane) is selected.

Note that from this version on, the shortcut key F2 is used to switch to the Cataloging tab of the module. In previous versions,this shortcut key was used to invoke the Help on Field window. Now, when the Help on Field entry is chosen from the Editmenu, the Tag Information tab is selected in the lower pane.

15.



Search Subfield OptionsThe shortcut key used to activate the search subfield options function has been changed from F8 to Ctrl + F8.

16.

SubdivisionsIn previous versions, when the system did not find a match between a subject heading in the bibliographic library and a headingin the authority library, the subdivisions (subfields $v, $x, $y and $z) from the bibliographic heading were automaticallystripped. The system continued searching for a match without them in order to find the more general term.

From this version on, this is not carried out automatically by the system but is setup-dependent. This was done to avoid thedisplay of these "general" headings in all logical bases. In previous versions, when the system found a match resulting from thestripping of the subdivisions, the matched heading (preferred and non-preferred forms) was added to the bibliographic headingslist and displayed in all logical bases, disregarding the bibliographic record that caused the inclusion of the heading. From thisversion, according to the setup, the system enriches the bibliographic headings list with the general heading but also evaluateswhether or not the heading should be included in the logical base.

Sample Setup for Sites with One Authority Library and One General Subjects Index

The 6XX field must be sent to the XYZ index in the tab11_acc table as follows:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 !!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-! 6#### XYZ -vxyz6

1.

The XYZ index code must be added to the tab00.lng table as follows:

! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 !-!!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!-!!-!-!---!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! H XYZ ACC 11 00 00 Subjects -vxyz

2.

The XYZ index code must be be added to the tab_aut table as follows:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!!!-!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!! XYZ 2 USM10

3.

The XYZ index must be defined in the tab20 table feeding back to the SUB index as in the following sample lines:

! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!!!! 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w !!! * -wi5 0 SEEF 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w - -wi5 0 SEEF 1 XYZ SUB 151## 0 2 451## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF .../...

4.

The XYZ index is intended for internal purposes. The bibliographic records are actually indexed there. This does the following:

The system finds the "general" authority headings from the XYZ index, and through the tab20 table this heading is addedto the subjects index list (SUB).

❍

The logical bases are sensitive to the "general" heading by the following mechanism:If the bibliographic heading has an authority link, but does not have attached records, the system searches for the same

❍

17.



heading on the XYZ headings index. If the XYZ heading would be included in the logical base headings, then theheading is displayed in the base.

Sample Setup for Sites with More than One Authority Library and With Specific Subjects Indexes

In the single-authority library setup, only one hard coded index - XYZ - is needed for the inclusion of a more general term inthe bibliographic headings list. In multi-authority sites, using a single index causes the inclusion of this general term inheadings lists that should not contain this heading. For example, a general heading that originates from the stripping of an LCSubject, will also be included in the MeSH headings list. A slightly different setup is needed for sites that work with more thanone authority library. In the following sample setup there are two specific subjects indexes (one for LC Subjects and one forMeSH Subjects) and a general index that includes both of the subject types (as in the above setup):

tab_xyz is a new table under the tab directory of the bibliographic library that defines the stripped headings list used by aparticular bibliographic headings index. Following is an excerpt from the table:

! 1 2 !!!!!-!!!!! SUB XYZ SUL SULX SUM SUMX

The excerpt above states that SUB (the general subjects index) uses XYZ for the inclusion of the general heading. SUL(LC Subjects) uses SULX, and SUM (MeSH Subjects) uses SUMX. Note that this means that the stripped headings listsare not hard-coded and are specified through the tab_xyz table. In a single-authority setup the XYZ index can be usedwithout defining it in this table.

1.

In the tab11_acc table, the relevant fields are sent to the specific stripped indexes. Following is an excerpt from the table:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 !!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-! 6#### XYZ -vxyz6 6###0 SULX -vxyz6 6###2 SUMX -vxyz6

2.

The stripped indexes must be defined in the tab00.lng table. Following is an excerpt from the table:

! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 !-!!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!-!!-!-!---!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! H XYZ ACC 11 00 00 Subjects -vxyz H SULX ACC 11 00 00 LC Subjects -vxyz H SUMX ACC 11 00 00 Medical Subjects -vxyz

3.

The stripped indexes must be defined in the tab_aut table. Following is an excerpt from the table:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!!!-!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!! XYZ 2 USM10 USM12 SULX 2 USM10 SUMX 2 USM12

4.

The stripped indexes must be defined in the tab20 table feeding back to the relevant index (SUB, SULX and SUMX) asin the following sample lines:

! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!!!! 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF etc ... 1 SULX SUL 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF etc ...

5.



1 SUMX SUM 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF etc ... 1 XYZ XYZ 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF etc ... 1 SULX SULX 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF etc ... 1 SUMX SUMX 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF

The above setup does the following:

The system finds the general authority headings from the stripped indexes, and through the tab20 table, theseheadings are added to the proper bibliographic headings list.

■

The logical bases are sensitive to the general heading by the following mechanism: If the bibliographic headinghas an authority link, but does not have attached records, the system searches for the same heading in the relevantstripped headings index. If the stripped heading will be included in the logical base headings, then the heading isdisplayed in the base.

■

Modify Cataloging Records File (file-08)Two new operation codes, CHANGE-FIRST-IND-MATCH and CHANGE-SECOND-IND-MATCH, were added to theset of operation codes available for the fix_doc_do_file_08 fix program and the Modify Cataloging Records File(file-08) service. These codes are similar to the CHANGE-FIRST-IND and CHANGE-SECOND-IND codes except thatthey have a third parameter, which is a string to match upon. If there is such a string in the tag's content, then theindicator is changed as specified.

1.

A new operation code, ADD-SUBFIELD, was added to the set of operation codes available for the fix_doc_do_file_08fix program and the Modify Cataloging Records File (file-08) service. This code is used to add a subfield to an existingfield. For example, if the specifications table is defined as follows:

! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !-!!!!!-!!-!-!!!-!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!-> 1 040 ADD-SUBFIELD d,ExL

when the fix is performed, a new subfield $d with ExL will be added to the 040 field of the record.

2.

18.

Fix RoutinesTwo new operation codes, CHANGE-FIRST-IND-MATCH and CHANGE-SECOND-IND-MATCH, were added to theset of operation codes available for the fix_doc_do_file_08 fix program and the Modify Cataloging Records File(file-08) service. These codes are similar to the CHANGE-FIRST-IND and CHANGE-SECOND-IND codes except thatthey have a third parameter, which is a string to match upon. If there is such a string in the tag's content, then theindicator is changed as specified.

1.

A new operation code, ADD-SUBFIELD, was added to the set of operation codes available for the fix_doc_do_file_08fix program and the Modify Cataloging Records File (file-08) service. This code is used to add a subfield to an existingfield. For example, if the specifications table is defined as follows:

2.

19.



! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !-!!!!!-!!-!-!!!-!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!-> 1 040 ADD-SUBFIELD d,ExL

then when the fix is performed, a new subfield $d with ExL will be added to the 040 field of the record.

A new fix program, fix_doc_new_aut_4, has been implemented. This program can be used by UNIMARC libraries tocreate an authority record from the current bibliographic record. This program is cursor-sensitive and according to theposition of the cursor, the new authority record is created either from the relevant 6XX, 5XX, or 7XX fields (seecomplete list below). The new authority record is created as follows:

The original field (for example, 700) is taken as is and placed in the corresponding 2XX field in the authority record.

A new 810 field is built based on the 200 / 230 / 250 fields (subfield $a) and from the 210 field (subfields $c and $d) ofthe bibliographic record. The new program also adds text to the new 810 field. The text can be configured via a messagefile in $alephe_error called fix_doc_new_aut_4.

For example, if the bibliographic record contains the following fields:

200 l#$Steam locomotives of Germany and Austria 210 ##$a[Cambridge, Mass.]$cHarvard Univ. P.$dl981

then the new 810 field is added as follows in the derived authority record:

810 ##$aSteam locomotives of Germany and Austria, Harvard Univ., 1981

In addition, the fields 152 (with subfields $a and $b) and 801 (with subfields $a, $b and $c) are added to the recordwithout contents.

The record created by the program is by default set to the authority library defined under the AUT section of thelibrary_relations table. If this section is not present, you can define the authority library by using the parameters columnof the tab_fix table. If no authority library is defined in the library_relations table and in the tab_fix table, the systemuses the default of XXX10 as the authority library (this is done by setting the last two digits in the active library as 10).

Note that if the cursor is not placed on one of the relevant tags (6XX, 5XX, or 7XX fields), then the authority recordderived from the bibliographic record is created with the default LDR and 008 fields and without the 2XX, 152, 801 and810 fields.

List of relevant fields for the creation of the authority record:

500, 600, 601, 606, 700, 701, 702, 710, 711, 712, 720, 721, 722 and 730.

3.

The fix_doc_lkr_up fix program has been enhanced. From this version, if the record is for a serial (FMT = SE), thensubfield $n (up link note) and subfield $m (down link note) are built from the 222 field if present. If this field is notpresent, then the subfields are built as in previous versions from field 245.

4.

A new fix program, fix_doc_bnb, has been implemented. This program allows you to assign a unique British NationalBibliography (BNB) number to a record, according to the format specified by the National Bibliographic Service. Thenext BNB number, including the prefix, is inserted into the 015 $$a field of the cataloging record and subfield $$2BNBis created in the same tag following the BNB number. The value is taken from the last-bnb-number sequence in UTILG/2. If the 015 field already exists, nothing is done.

In order for this fix routine to work, the new counter, last-bnb-number with the appropriate prefix must be set (UTILG/2). For example: If the current value of last-bnb-number is 1000 and the prefix is ABC, the following 015 field iscreated:

015 $$aABC1001$$2BNB

5.

A new fix program, fix_doc_usnaf, has been implemented. This program allows the cataloger to assign the USNAF (USName Authority File) control number to a record exported from ALEPH to the Library of Congress, according to theformat specified by the Library of Congress. The next USNAF number, including the prefix, is inserted into the 001 $$aand 010 $$a fields of the cataloging record. The value is taken from the last-usnaf-number sequence in UTIL G/2. If only

6.



one of the fields is present, both fields (001 and 010) are created with new values, updating the content of the existingone. If both fields are already present, they are not updated.

In order for this fix routine to work, the new last-usnaf-number counter with the appropriate prefix must be set (UTILG/2).

For example:

If the current value of last-usnaf-number is 1000 and the prefix is ABC, the following 001/010 fields will be created:

001 $$aABC1001 010 $$aABC1001

A new fix program, fix_doc_hld_stmt, has been implemented.This program performs the same procedures as the expand_doc_hld_stmt program. The difference between the twoprograms is that by running the expand_doc_hld_stmt program the 863/4/5 enumeration and chronology data are createdvirtually, whereas when running fix_doc_hld_stmt, the 863/4/5 enumeration and chronology data are added to the HOLrecord. For the fix_doc_hld_stmt program, the tab_fix table of the HOL library (XXX60) should include the followingline:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> HSTMT fix_doc_hld_stmt

For full details regarding this program, refer to expand_doc_hld_stmt in the Expand Routines section of the Indexingchapter.

7.

A new fix program, fix_doc_field_410, has been implemented. This program can be used by UNIMARC libraries tocreate an additional field based on field 410#1 (Series).

If a UNIMARC 410#1 field contains $a and $1, the program will create a 2252# field. $a of the 2252# field will containthe embedded content of the 410 $a field.

Here is an example:

2252# $a ($a in field 410#1)

The fix program does not delete previously created 2252# fields.

8.

A new fix program, fix_doc_field_200, has been implemented. This program can be used by UNIMARC libraries tocreate additional fields based on the 200 field (title and statement of responsibility).

If there is more than one $a subfield in field 200, the system creates 423 fields, one for each occurrence of subfield $a,except for the first one. In the 423 field, the first indicator will be blank and its second indicator will be zero. The $asubfield of the 423 field will contain the embedded content of the 200 field's $a subfield. The $c subfield of the 423 fieldwill contain the embedded content of the 200 field's $c subfield that follows $a in the 200 field. The 423 field will alsoinclude $1 containing a 200## tag.

Here is an example:

423_0 $a (The second $a in field 200) $c (Optional, contains the second $c of field 200) $1 (200##)

The program also creates a new 510 field $a for each occurrence of $d in the 200 field. The first indicator of field 510 is1 and the second one is blank.

Here is an example:

5101_ $a ($d in field 200)

This fix program does not delete previously created 423 and 510 fields.

9.

Two new fix programs, fix_doc_field_upper and fix_doc_field_lower, have been implemented. These programs changethe case of all occurrences of a field given as a parameter to the routine. The fix_doc_field_upper program changes the

10.



case to uppercase and the fix_doc_field_lower program changes the case to lowercase.

The parameter has the following format: <field><tag><subfield>

Here is an example from the tab_fix table of a UNIMARC library:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> LOWER fix_doc_field_lower 701#0a

As shown in this example, the # sign must be used if no character is defined for the field or for the indicator.

In order to change every subfield in a field, you do not have to add a subfield parameter. If a subfield parameter ispresent, the case of all its occurrences will change accordingly.

It is now possible to specify punctuation marks in column 3 of tab_fix, as parameters of the fix_doc_punctuation_usmprogram. Here is an example:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> INS fix_doc_punctuation_usm .!?-

If the last subfield of one of the these fields - 245, 260 or 300 - ends with one of the punctuation marks specified incolumn 3, for example, a full stop ("."), it will NOT be added to it.

Note that the fix_doc_punctuation_usm program only deals with subfields a, b and c of fields 245, 260 and 300.

If column 3 is empty, fix_doc_punctuation_usm behaves as before; that is, if the last subfield ends in ".", "!" or "?", a fullstop (".") is NOT added to it. In order to add punctuation marks to the three default ones, the default marks (.!?) must bespecified in column 3 together with other marks. For instance, a hyphen can be added as shown in the above example.

11.

Alphabetize Headings - Setup (manage-16)From this version on, the report produced by this service is limited to 100,000 entries. This change was made to avoidreports that are too large for printing. This limit only affects the report and does not affect the update procedure. Inaddition, at the bottom of the report the following two fields were added:

Total lines changed■

Total lines printed■

1.

From this version on, the Alphabetize Headings (manage-16) service supports parallel processing.

The cycle length is defined through the p_manage_16_loop_length variable of the library's prof_library table.

2.

The option to produce a report and re-alphabetize the database is not available anymore. This is due to the parallelprocessing. From this version on, the available procedures are the following:

Produce report but do not re-alphabetize■

Re-alphabetize■

3.

20.

Alphabetize Headings - Parallel Processing (manage-160)The Alphabetize Headings - Parallel Processing (manage-160) service has been removed. From this version, the AlphabetizeHeadings (manage-16) service supports parallel processing.

21.

MenusA new menu, Cataloging, has been added to the Cataloging module. This menu contains all the cataloging options that1.

22.



were present in the File menu in previous versions (for example, New Record). In addition, the File menu was renamedas the ALEPH menu.

The Activate Keyboard option is now available from the Cataloging menu. In previous versions, it was accessed throughthe Options menu.

2.

A new menu, Remote, has been added to the menu bar of the Cataloging module. It will support the Extended Services(ES) Update Service for remote cataloging records.

3.

CAT FieldThe cataloger name in the CAT field for records updated by the Global Changes service (manage-21) or by the indexingdaemon (ue_01) is now set to BATCH-UPD. In this case, the cataloger level of the last cataloger is retained as is.

23.

Search Headings OptionsFrom this version, when you use one of the Search Headings options (for example, Search Field Headings of Current Library -F3), the text taken from the cataloging draft undergoes non-filing procedures to strip non-filing text before the search isperformed. The stripping is performed according to the non-filing indicator specified in the tab01.lng table of the library's tabdirectory.

24.

View in Web OPACA new option, View in Web OPAC, has been added to the Cataloging module. This option enables the user to view the recordthat is being edited in Web OPAC format. The record is shown in the Browser tab of the lower pane in the Cataloging tab afterthe View in Web OPAC option from the Cataloging menu is selected. The record is displayed as is in the database and mightnot reflect the specific state of editing registered in the cataloging draft (upper pane).

Note that this tab is not refreshed or cleared when you switch to a different record in the upper pane.

25.

MARC 21The following language codes were added to the marc_language_codes table:

New code Language name Previously coded ady Adygei cau (Caucasian (Other)) arg Aragonese Spanish spa (Spanish) crh Crimean Tatar tut (Altaic (Other)) dar Dargwa cau (Caucasian (Other)) hat Haitian French Creole cpf (Creoles and Pidgins, French-based (Other)) inh Ingush cau (Caucasian (Other)) kbd Kabardian cau (Caucasian (Other)) nog Nogai tut (Altaic (Other)) udm Udmurt fiu (Finno-Ugrian (Other)) xal Kalmyk tut (Altaic (Other))

The codes above have been approved for use in the international language code standard, ISO 639-2 (Codes for theRepresentation of Names of Languages--Part 2: alpha-3 code) and are likewise being added to the MARC Code List forLanguages. They will be included in the forthcoming 2003 edition of the MARC Code List for Languages.

26.

Editing RecordsFrom this version, you can visually identify records (either from the database or local records) with changes that havebeen made from records that have not been modified. When records are opened for editing through the Edit Recordsoption of the Cataloging tab, they are listed under the Edit Record node of the Navigation Tree.

Records saved on the server are listed in the following format:

Library code - system number (Local number).

1.

27.



For example:

USM01-3563 (NEW870.MRC)

Local records are listed in the following format:

Local number (Local).

For example:

NEW871.MRC (Local)

After performing changes to either type of records, their representation is changed by a preceding asterisk, for example:

* USM01-3563 (NEW870.MRC) * NEW871.MRC (Local)

The following two entries have been added to the Window.dat file of the Catalog\Tab\Eng directory to enable theindication of modified records in the Navigation Tree:

RecordEditor.Tree.RemoteUnsaved * %s-%ld (%s) RecordEditor.Tree.LocalUnsaved * %s (Local)

From this version, you can set up the system so that a selected field (or a selected group of fields) is not displayed in theCatalog Editor. Consequently, fields that are hidden cannot be updated through the Cataloging module.

You can update a hidden field by adding it to the new table, tab_cat_hidden_fields. This new table is located in thelibrary's tab directory.

2.

Lock RecordFrom this version, when a user locks a record, the phrase "Locked by current user" is displayed in the Cataloging bar. When therecord is unlocked, the message is removed. Note that you can change the text displayed in the Cataloging bar through entries2002 and 2003 of the pc_cat_c2003 file of the alephe/error_eng directory.

28.

Record ManagerFrom this version on, a record manager has been added to the Cataloging module. The Record Manager is displayed in thelower section of the left pane in the Cataloging tab of the module. The Record Manager displays information regarding therecord currently being edited in the Catalog Editor (upper pane of the Cataloging tab). The information is displayed in a treestructure after you open a record from the server or after you save a new record. Note that the pane is left empty when you editrecords that have not been sent to the server.

The purposes of the Record Manager are as follows:

The Record Manager shows the records in the system that are related to the record currently being edited.1.

The Record Manager provides access to the records associated to the record currently being edited.2.

The Record Manager enables the creation of administrative and holdings records.3.

The Record Manager provides access to the Items function (Items tab) of the Cataloging module.4.

Note that the display of the relation between the holdings and the items records is determined by the item_hol_tree_stylevariable of the pc_server_defaults file. The following options are available:

1 - Do not display the connection between the items and the linked holdings records 2 - Display the items under the related administrative (ADM) record and also under the linked holdings record 3 - Display the items only under the linked holdings record (in this case the holdings libraries nodes are displayed beforeadministrative - ADM - libraries nodes)

The display in the Record Manager is limited to 800 lines. The number of leaves in each of the nodes (branches) is determinedby the pc_tree_view_max_branch variable of the pc_server_defaults file. In the following sample, nodes are limited to 10leaves:

setenv pc_tree_view_max_branch 10

29.



The way in which the tree is displayed when first opened is determined by the expand_tree_style variable of thepc_server_defaults file. The following options are available:

1 - Expand only the selected record node. 2 - Expand only record nodes (administrative, bibliographic and holdings) 3 - Expand all existing nodes (administrative, bibliographic, holdings, item, order, and so on.)

Note that from this version, the NAV-MAP-DELETE entry from the check_doc_mandatory table is performed when the TotalDelete option is selected from the Record Manager of the Cataloging module. In previous versions, this was performed whenthe Delete Bibliographic Record option was selected from the Search Navigation Window.

From this version, ADM and HOL libraries displayed in the tree are filtered according to the ADM library assigned to theconnected staff user. For example: if the connected staff user is assigned to XXX50 ADM library, the ADM library displayedin the tree will be XXX50. If the connected staff user is a super staff user and is assigned ADMIN in the User Library field,(e.g., ALEPH/ALEPH), then all the ADM libraries which are related to the BIB library will be displayed.

Save on Server and Local DriveThe CTRL + L shortcut key was added to the Cataloging module for the Save on Server and Local Drive option.

30.

Download Machine-Readable Records (print-03)From this version on, the Download Machine-Readable Records (print-03) service includes the Expand Routineparameter. This parameter enables the use of expand programs when using this service. In previous versions, this wasachieved by the hard-coded PRINT-REC system function . This option is not in use anymore.

1.

A new option has been added to the Format drop-down list: MARC with alphanumeric tags.2.

31.

852 FieldThe 852 field was set as mandatory for holdings records. The following line from the check_doc_doc table was changed from:

OC HO 5001 00 01 852##

to:

OC HO 5001 01 99 852##

The message from check_doc.lng was changed to:

Required 852 field is missing.

The field was also made repeatable. Both changes are in accordance with the MARC 21 rules for the 852 field.

32.

New RecordIn previous versions, when a new record was created, if the Cancel button was selected from the Choose Record Formatwindow, a catalog draft opened with no format (FMT) defined. From this version, the Cancel button is used to halt the creationof the new record.

33.

Overview TreeA new option, Overview Tree, has been added to the Cataloging module. The Overview Tree shows the records in the systemthat are related to the cataloging record being edited (that is, opened in the Catalog Editor - upper pane). For example, itdisplays the holdings records, the administrative record, and the items, subscriptions, orders and loans attached to the selectedcataloging record. The information is displayed in tree structure.

Note that the display of the relation between the holdings and the items records is determined by the item_hol_tree_stylevariable of the pc_server_defaults file. The following options are available:

1 - Do not display the connection between the items and the linked holdings records2 - Display the items under the related administrative (ADM) record and also under the linked holdings record3 - Display the items only under the linked holdings record (in this case the holdings libraries nodes are displayed before theadministrative - ADM - libraries nodes)

34.



The display in the Overview Tree is limited to 800 lines. The number of leaves in each of the nodes (branches) is determinedby the pc_filter_tree_view_max_branch variable of the pc_server_defaults file. In the following sample, nodes are limited to 90leaves:

setenv pc_filter_tree_view_max_branch 99

The way in which the tree is displayed when first opened is determined by the expand_tree_style variable of thepc_server_defaults file. The following options are available:

1 - Expand only the selected record node.2 - Expand only record nodes (administrative, bibliographic and holdings)3 - Expand all existing nodes (administrative, bibliographic, holdings, item, order, and so on.)

Selecting Split Editor Mode enables the viewing and/or editing of two cataloging records simultaneously. If you switch to theOverview Tree mode, the trees for both records are shown in the corresponding section of the upper pane. When both trees aredisplayed, you can move item and/or acquisition orders and/or serial subscription records from one administrative record to theother. This is done by using the mouse for drag-and-drop operations from one tree to the other. You can also move anadministrative record from one bibliographic record to another administrative record of a different bibliographic record. Thefunction moves all items, subscriptions and orders. It also moves all holdings records which are connected to the items andsubscriptions.

The tab_move_record table of the library's tab directory is used to define the moving routines that are performed when recordsare moved through the Overview Tree.

From this version ADM and HOL libraries displayed in the tree are filtered according to the ADM library assigned to theconnected staff user. For example: if the connected staff user is assigned to XXX50 ADM library, the ADM library displayedin the tree will be XXX50. If the connected staff user is a super staff user and is assigned ADMIN in the User Library field,(e.g., ALEPH/ALEPH), then all the ADM libraries which are related to the BIB library will be displayed.

Convert MARC Records - Step 2 (file-02)The following changes have been implemented for the Convert MARC Records - Step 2 (file-02) service:

In previous versions the maximum input size of a MARC record was limited to 32765 bytes. From this version on, thelimit has been increased to 62000 bytes. When this limit is reached, an error message is created in the log file and therecord is converted up to the limit.

1.

For MARC 21 records, the 009 field is now treated as other 00X fields (for example, the 008 field). In other words, thefields is treated as a fixed field without indicators and subfields.

2.

A new conversion option, from MARC XML format to ALEPH sequential format, was added to the list of formats inp-file-02.

3.

35.

Create New RecordThe Cancel button was removed from the Choose Record Format window. When catalogers choose to create records using theNew Record option, they must select a record format.

36.

Holdings RecordsA new tab, HOL Records, has been added to the lower pane of the Cataloging tab in the Cataloging module. The HOLRecords tab lists the holdings records linked to the record displayed in the Catalog Editor (upper pane). Through this tab,you can access a record for editing by clicking Edit, or create new holdings records by clicking Create.

1.

A new option, Select HOL Record, has been added to the Edit menu. This option enables you to select automatically theHOL Records tab from the lower pane. This tab lists the holdings records linked to the record displayed in the CatalogEditor. This tab also enables you to access a selected record for editing, and to create new holdings records.

2.

37.



Check Input File Against Database (manage-36)A new parameter, Tag for Multiple Match Record Numbers, has been added to the Check Input File Against Database(manage-36) service. This parameter can be used to enter a three-character field code. This field is then added to therecords in the output file that contains those records that have found more than a single match. The field contains thedocument record numbers of all the matching records.

1.

A new parameter, Match Script, was added to the Check Input File Against Database (manage-36) service. Thisparameter is used to enter the match script name that contains the specifications for the match. Note that if this parameteris used, then the Match Section parameter should be left blank.

2.

38.

Linking Programs

A new linking program, update_z103_uni_3, has been implemented for UNIMARC libraries. This program is similar tothe update_z103_uni_2 program. The difference between the two programs is that the update_z103_uni_3 programshould be used when the linking field is present in the two linked records. If the linking field is only present in one of therecords, then the update_z103_uni_2 program should be used.

1.

LKR $$m is now used in Z103-SORT during the creation of DN links.2.

A new program, fix_z103_sort_existing_key, enables the sort of Z103 according to z103_sort. This program is used intab_fix_z103 and enables the display of sorted z103 links. Here is an example from tab_fix_z103:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> GUI-FULL fix_z103_sort_existing_key WEB-FULL fix_z103_sort_existing_key

In this example, the z103 links will be sorted according to z103_sort in the Full+links tab of the Show node in the Searchtab and in the Full View of Record window in the Web OPAC.

The z103_sort is dependent on the $s subfield of the LKR field. The content of the field can include numbers or letters(1,2,3. or a,b,c.).

3.

A new routine, GUI-TREE, was added to tab_fix_z103. The routine enables a sorted display of holdings in thenavigation tree.

4.

39.

Tag InformationHelp for the STA field was added for the Cataloging module. The help is displayed in the Tag Information tab when the STAfield is selected in the Catalog Editor.

40.

TemplatesThe FMT field in the pattern templates of the HOL library was set to HO.1.

The templates: top_level_enum_lacking.mrc and all_levels_enum_lacking.mrc were updated in the ADM and HOLlibraries.

2.

41.

Electronic LocationThe length of the URI/URL link in subfield $u of the following fields can now be as long as 2000 characters.

505 (Formatted Contents Note)506 (Restrictions on Access Note)514 (Data Quality Note)520 (Summary, Etc.)530 (Additional Physical Form Available Note)

42.



540 (Terms Governing Use and Reproduction Note)545 (Biographical or Historical Note)552 (Entity and Attribute Information Note)555 (Cumulative Index/Finding Aids Note)563 (Binding Information)583 (Action Note)

Update Cataloging Records (file-95)

A new service has been added, Update Cataloging Records (file-95). The service updates existing Cataloging records inthe database with input records in pseudo-MARC format.

The incoming record must include the record's system number in the 001 field and a field from the record in the databasethat is to be matched.

The program supports the following functions:

MAT (MATCH) - matches the line in the input file with a line in the record. The match is on the tag and theindicators as well as on the contents. The matched field is deleted after matching if the database is updated.

■

ADD (ADD) - adds the new field if the line is matched■

Here is an example:

000000555 001 L 000000555 000000555 440 0 L $$aSeries on dogs and cats ;$$vv.35$$9MAT 000000555 830 0 L $$aSeries on dogs and cats (Cambridge, Mass.) ;$$vv38$$9ADD

The matched field ends with $$9MAT and the added field ends with $$9ADD.000000555 001 L 000000555.

This service is identified in the Batch Log and Batch Queue as p-file-95.

1.

The service's name has changed. In version 16.01, the service's name was p-mars. In version 16.02 the service's name isp-file-95.

2.

43.

ALEPH KeyboardThe ALEPH Cataloging Keyboard has been improved as follows:

From now on, when selecting the space key from the standard keyboard while working with the ALEPH Keyboard, aspace is added to the cataloging draft record at the cursor's position. In previous versions, to add a space, you had toreselect the Catalog Editor (upper pane).

1.

From now on, when opening the ALEPH Keyboard, the first character key of the keyboard is in focus and the charactercan be added to the cataloging record by clicking Enter from the standard keyboard. In addition, the Tab key can be usedto move from one character key to the other.

2.

From this version on, when working with the ALEPH Keyboard, the cursor's position in the Catalog Editor is marked bya blinking dotted line. In previous versions there was no indication of the cursor's position in the Catalog Editor. Thereason is that when this function is used, the active pane is the lower pane and not the Catalog Editor.

3.

44.

Restart Server (sys-01)This service stops a server and restarts it. The server that is stopped is selected by the user and can be the pc_server,www_server or the oclc_server. When run, the service will stop the existing server running on the default port and start a newone on the same port.

45.



Rebuild HTML Pack (sys-02)This service rebuilds the html.pck file after you edit a form or a letter in the form_eng directory. For any changes to these filesto appear, run this service.

46.

Update Tables Package (sys-03)This service updates the packaged file of tables (pc_cat.pck) in the library's catalog directory. When a user connects to a homelibrary in the Cataloging module, the system compares the tables on the client with the date of the pc_cat.pck package on theserver. If the dates are different and the AlwaysImportFiles flag in alephcom.ini (under [Package]) is set to "N", then the user isprompted to update the tables on the client. If the dates are different and the AlwaysImportFiles flag is set to "Y", then thetables are imported automatically. Among other tables/files, the catalog directory contains cataloging forms (for example,008_bk.lng for MARC 21), cataloging templates (for example, 008_bk.lng for MARC 21), help files (in the HTMLsubdirectory), codes for the FMT field (formats.lng), field contents for fixed text fields (tag_text.dat), lists of valid tags andaliases (codes.lng), and so on.

47.

URL Check (print-11)A new service, URL Check (print-11) has been added. The service checks subfield $u of the following fields in order todetermine the validity of an external URI/URL link.

505 (Formatted Contents Note)❍

506 (RESTRICTIONS ON ACCESS NOTE)❍

514 (Data Quality Note)❍

520 (Summary, Etc.)❍

530 (Additional Physical Form Available Note)❍

540 (TERMS GOVERNING USE AND REPRODUCTION NOTE)❍

545 (BIOGRAPHICAL OR HISTORICAL NOTE)❍

552 (ENTITY AND ATTRIBUTE INFORMATION NOTE)❍

555 (Cumulative Index/Finding Aids Note)❍

563 (BINDING INFORMATION)❍

583 (Action Note)❍

856 (Electronic Location and Access)❍

The service uses an input file created by p_ret_01 which retrieves records that have fields that include a link to an electronicdocument and writes the fields containing URI/URL in ALEPH sequential format, using p_print_03.

The service creates two output files, one which contains the correct URL links and the other, the URL links with errors. Inaddition, the second output file contains an additional subfield that indicates the error code that was returned from the protocol.The default subfield for the error code is $9, though you can call it what you like by filling in the "error subfield" line in theservice.

The file with the incorrect URL links can be corrected and loaded into the database using p-manage-18 with the option"Replace Fields within a Record".

The service was added to /alephe/pc_b_eng/menu-catalog.xml

48.

Load YBP Records (file-96)Make sure that the line Z68-INVOICE-STATUS is present in the default values input file, tab_yankee_def. There aretwo possible values:[P]artial and [C]omplete. If necessary, add it as follows:

Z68-INVOICE-STATUS ########## P

Note: Without this line, orders cannot be produced.

1.

Make sure that the following error messages are defined in /alephe/error_eng/check_z68:

0502 0000 L Arrival-Status must be [P]artial / [C]omplete 0503 0000 L Invoice-Status must be [P]artial / [C]omplete

2.

49.



This batch now takes the currency code from the 980 field's $$c when creating Z68 and Z601 records and only uses thedefault currency line in the default values input file if a document is missing this information.

3.

UNIMARC Record Format CreationAn AU FMT field is created by fix_doc_create_fmt if the variable MARC-TYPE is set to 2 (UNIMARC), and position06 in the LDR field is x y or z.

1.

An CF FMT field is created by fix_doc_create_fmt if the variable MARC-TYPE is set to 2 (UNIMARC), and position06 in the LDR field is l.

2.

Three levels of linking notes (311 field) have been enabled for UNIMARC in relation to the 447 field: merging with / ...and merging with /... to form ...

In order to obtain the additional levels, a $$8 subfield must be added to the 447 field, with 1 or 2 as text respectively($$8 1 for line 4471 in tab05, $$8 2 for line 4472 in tab05).

3.

50.

Importing RecordsA new remote conversion program, pc_cat_conv_marc, has been implemented. This program handles input files that containMARC records separated either by a new line character, or by a MARC record separator (ASCII - 29 or Hexadecimal - 1D) andfiles containing a single MARC record.

We recommend that you use this program instead of the '2709 OCLC conversion' local conversion program that can beproblematic in the case of long fields (longer than 2000 characters). Another advantage of remote conversion programs is thatthey allow you to use character conversion routines.

51.

Load PALAS Shelfmark (manage-45)A new batch job inserts a shelfmark into the $$ 852j field of a holdings record. The shelfmarks are generated in a file by thePALAS system. This is a special development for the British Library.

52.

Preferred Authority LibraryA new relation type, BLK, has been added to the library_relation table (./alephe/tab).

This relation type is relevant only if the bibliographic library is set to work with two alternate authority libraries for authoritycontrol of a single browse list. For example, the setup for SUB (subjects browse list) in tab_aut is as follows:

SUB 2 USM10 USM12

The above setting infers that the USM10 authority record is preferred over the USM12 record.

The BLK line in library_relation is used by the system to define the actual preference.

From now on, when a record in the preferred authority library is added or updated, a message is sent to the bibliographiclibrary. The UE_01 daemon handles this message and all the headings, which are currently attached to the record from thenon-preferred authority library, are re-evaluated and linked to the preferred authority record.

In addition, when the link in a bibliographic heading is changed from the non-preferred authority library to the preferredauthority library, positions 14-16 of the 008 field of the non-preferred authority record are changed to "bbb", effectivelyde-activating the record for future use.

53.

Convert ALEPH Sequential to MARC Communication Format (file-12)From this version on, ALEPH sorts the fields in the output file, as is standard, according to the rules for the sort order setin the tab01.lng table.

1.

A new parameter has been added to this service: P-SW-ALPHA-TAGS. Its caption in the service is ConvertAlphanumeric Tags to MARC ?. If Yes is chosen, then the record will be converted to MARC format, includingalphanumeric fields. If No is chosen, no alphanumeric fields will be added.

2.

54.



A new parameter, Fix Routine, has been added to the file-12 service. This parameter facilitates the use of a fix routineon a converted record.

3.

Export Holdings Records (export-02)From this version on, ALEPH sorts the fields in the output file, as is standard, according to the rules for the sort order setin the tab01.lng table.

1.

The Boolean parameter Convert Output file to MARC ? (values "Y" or "N") has been replaced with the followingpull-down list:

Conversion of Output file to MARC:

Do Not Convert to MARC■

Convert to MARC■

Convert to MARC with alphanumeric fields■

2.

55.

Merge RoutinesThe merge_doc_adv_overlay program does not create the SRC00 $$aDB field any more. Additional parameters have beenadded and there is no further need for the creation of this field.

56.

Delete Bibliographic Records Including Related ADM/HOL Records (manage-33)From now on, a check for the OWN field of a record is performed. The OWN field is checked against the logged in user'sOWN permission (Z66-USER-OWN-CHECK). If there is no match, the record is not handled by the batch job.

57.

Fix and Check Catalog Records (manage-25)From now on, a check for the OWN field of a record is performed. The OWN field is checked against the logged in user'sOWN permission (Z66-USER-OWN-CHECK). If there is no match, the record is not handled by the batch job.

58.

Fix Catalog Records (manage-37)From now on, a check for the OWN field of a record is performed. The OWN field is checked against the logged in user'sOWN permission (Z66-USER-OWN-CHECK). If there is no match, the record is not handled by the batch job.

59.

Global Changes (manage-21)From now on, a check for the OWN field of a record is performed. The OWN field is checked against the logged in user'sOWN permission (Z66-USER-OWN-CHECK). If there is no match, the record is not handled by the batch job.

60.

List Unauthorized Headings (auth-03)A new parameter, P-FILTER-OWN, has been added to the batch. If Yes is selected, the OWN field of a record will be checkedagainst the logged-in user's OWN permission (Z66-USER-OWN-CHECK). If No is selected, no comparison will take place.

If P-FILTER-OWN is Yes, all documents attached to the heading will be checked. If at least one document passes the OWNcheck, the heading will be included in the report.

The following caption has been added to the beginning of the output file (unauthorized-headings.xsl):

"OWN-filtered by user:" <User Name>

61.

OWN Field CheckA check of a record's OWN field against the logged-in user's OWN permission (Z66-USER-OWN-CHECK) has been added tothe following services:

Global Changes (manage-21)❍

62.



Fix and Check Catalog Records (manage-25)❍

Delete Bibliographic Records Including Related ADM/HOL Records (manage-33)❍

Fix Catalog Records (manage-37)❍

List Unauthorized Headings (auth-03)❍

If there is no match, the record is not handled by the batch job.

The check uses the library's tab/tab_cat_own table to determine the OWN fields permitted to a user.

Match RoutinesThe match_doc_filter_by_weights match program, which checks additional parameters existing in tab_weights, canaccept two types of Program arguments:

TABLE-NAME=<table name>

Here is an example taken from the tab_match_script table:

!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> 06 match_doc_filter_by_weights 1 merge TABLE-NAME=tab_weights

■

<table name>


!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> 06 match_doc_filter_by_weights 1 merge tab_weights

■

1.

The match_doc_filter_hvd program is similar to match_doc_filter_by_weights except that it allows the use ofdifferent weight tables for the BK and SE formats.

match_doc_filter_hvd uses the program arguments SE-TABLE-NAME= and MO-TABLE-NAME=. The matchprocedure will use the table(s) for more specific matching arguments. The program automatically rejects all matches ifthe incoming record format is not SE or BK, and automatically rejects a match if there is a mismatch on the FMT field.


!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> 06 match_doc_filter_hvd 1 merge SE-TABLE-NAME=tab_weights.se, MO-TABLE-NAME=tab_weights.mo

2.

match_doc routines do not attempt to find a match if the section matched is empty. This can happen after using thefiling procedures.

3.

63.

Pre-process Input File of Records Before Load (manage-39)This service used to discard records if position 22 of their LDR was 3. Now these records are put into the input file and not intothe discarded file.

64.

Filter LibrariesThe Filter Libraries option from the Record Manager menu has been removed. ADM and HOL libraries are filtered accordingto the ADM library assigned to the connected staff user. For example, if the connected staff user is assigned to XXX50 ADMlibrary, the ADM library displayed in the tree will be XXX50. If the connected staff user is a super staff user and is assignedADMIN in the User Library field, (e.g., ALEPH/ALEPH), then all the ADM libraries related to the BIB library will bedisplayed.

65.

Catalog BarFrom now on, when the Change Interface Language or Login as Another User options are activated, the Catalog bar text willbe updated.

66.

Load MARCIVE Records (file-99)67.



If no merge or match routine is defined, the default routine used for both is F99. This routine must be present intab_match:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! F99 match_doc_gen TYPE=IND,TAG=909,SUBFIELD=a,CODE=909

This routine must be present in tab_merge:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> F99 merge_doc_overlay 07

Program 07 must be set in tab_merge_overlay

1.

A character conversion program was added to p-file-99: MARCIVE_TO_UTF.2.

Exporting Records in MARC Format99The following cataloging services can now convert records to MARC format, including alphanumeric fields:

p_file_12 (Convert ALEPH Sequential to MARC Communication Format)❍

p_print_03 (Download Machine-Readable Records)❍

p_export_01 (Export Bib Records with Holdings Information)❍

p_export_02 (Export Holdings Records)❍

68.

Export BIB Records with Holdings Information (export-01)Records in MARC format, including alphanumeric fields, can be exported now by entering MARC2 in Column 2 of thetab_export table, which resides in the ./alephe/tab directory.

69.

Holdings FilterThere is a new filter for holdings records in the Cataloging overview tree, record manager and in the HOL Records tab inCataloging. It is based on the holdings record's OWN field. Only users with the same value of the OWN Permission as thevalue of the OWN field in the holdings record will be able to see it.

This filter depends on the tab_own table. In addition, the OWN-FILTER setting in tab100 should be set to Y.

70.

Delete Unlinked Headings (manage-15)The p-manage-15 entry has been deleted from the Services menu in the authority library. The service looks for unlinkedheadings, but in the authority library every heading is linked to itself, meaning that no headings would be found.

71.

Sorting Fields in an Authority RecordAll fields of the authority record are now sorted according to the order of the lines as they appear in the tab01.lng table.

72.

ADM LibrariesNote that no ADM libraries should be defined for the Connect to.. command in the ALEPH menu. In other words, this type oflibrary should not be listed in the catalog/per_lib.ini file. These libraries are accessed from the related BIB library. There is noreason to access them directly.

In addition, note that the Select ADM Library.. command in the ALEPH menu is used to specify the active ADMenvironment. This means that all ADM services should be listed in the menu-catalog.xml file and there is no need for themenu-catalog-adm.xml. All jobs that run under an ADM environment must include the <admin_library>Y</admin_library>tag, for example, p-item-03.xml.

73.



Item HistoryUp until now, when an item record (Z30) was moved from one ADM record to another, its history (Z30H records) was deleted.Now the item history is "moved" to the target ADM record.

Note that items are moved from one ADM record to another as a result of the following "moving" activities:

moving item(s) from one ADM to another❍

moving order(s) from one ADM to another❍

moving subscription(s) from one ADM to another❍

moving an entire ADM record to another❍

74.

catalog.iniThe following variables have been moved from catalog.ini to GuiSys.ini as they are updated automatically by the system anddo not require user intervention:

Width= Height= LocalDocumentNumber=

75.

Move RoutinesA new move program, move_hol_to_bib, moves a HOL record from one BIB record to another BIB record. It is notperformed if an item is linked to the HOL. In this case, the Z30/ADM must be moved first.

This program works only in a multi-HOL, multi-ADM environment and requires the following setup:

ADM XXX60 XXX50

1.

A new move program, move_adm_to_bib, moves an ADM record from one BIB record to another BIB record. Thismove includes linked HOL records. It is not performed if an ADM record linked to the target BIB already exists (forexample, a new BIB without an ADM).

2.

The move_adm_to_adm routine now handles HOL records for MAB libraries.3.

76.



CIRCULATION

Version 16

Advance Booking from the Circulation GUI●

Alternative Set of Blocks●

Automatic Input●

Cash Transactions - Payment Mode●

Change Item Information●

Circ.ini●

Daemons●

Defining the Zip Code Format for a Patron's Address in Printouts●

Deleting a Patron●

Due Dates - Effective Due Date in Printouts and GUI HTML Information●

Due Dates - Setup and Display of Due Dates in GUI Clients and Web OPAC●

Duplicate IDs for Different Patrons●

E-mail Icon ●

Editing a Record After Creating it Through the Catalog Record and Create Item Utility●

Fast Patron Registration●

Fines●

Free-of-Charge E-Mail Messages●

Handling of Multiple Hold Requests of Same Patron during Loan●

Hold Request Date in GUI●

Hold Request by Bibliographic Group Available from Web OPAC●

Hold Request from GUI / Item Tab●

Hold Request Like Copies●

Hold Request / Photocopy Request: Item Availability Type T●

Hold Requests - Using Different Hold Request Forms - tab_hold_request_form●

Identification of a Workstation - by Station ID / IP Address●

List of Hold Requests●

List of Photocopy Requests●

Lost Loan Credit Method●

Modifying Hold End Date from GUI●

Multiple Time Zones●

New Cash Transaction Default Sublibrary●

New Feedback Message for Return in SIP2 Server●

New Fine Method F●

New Fine Method R●

Release Notes - Circulation - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582Q...Y9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00086/file/n-circ-16 (1 of 19) [3/31/2004 5:16:44 PM]

Online Recall●

Partial Waive●

Patron Address Records in Printouts●

Patron Records - New, Duplicate, Delete●

Patron Picture●

Patron Profile Information Window●

Patron Tabs Moved●

Patron Verification Type 02 Based on LDAP Lookup●

Registering Offline Cash Transactions●

Remote Registration●

Returning an ILL Item●

Self Check●

Sensormatic Self Check●

Separate Cash Receipt Counters●

Special Dates for Advance Booking Schedule●

VAT and Net Sums Display●

Word Search for CJK in Search for Administrative Record Window●

Services

Build Patron Indexes (cir-25)●

Build/Correct VAT (cash-12)●

Call Slips for Hold Requests (cir-12)●

Campus Hold Requests Router - Cleanup (cir-240)●

Cash Export Report (cash-09)●

Cash Transaction Report (cash-02)●

Delete Advanced Booking Slots (cir-65)●

Delete Paid Transactions (cash-04)●

Delete Patron Records (cir-23)●

Export Cash Transactions (cash-10)●

Hold Requests Report (cir-07)●

Hold Shelf Report (cir-06)●

Import Cash Transactions (cash-11)●

Loan Report (cir-04)●

Outstanding Hold Requests Report (cir-11)●

Patron Loader (file-20)●

Photocopy Request Slips (cir-22)●




Recall Items on Loan (cir-13)●

Renew Items on Loan (cir-08)●

Report of Items in Reading Room (cir-15)●


Scrub Patron IDs (cir-32)●

Update Patron Records (cir-77)●

Report of Items in Reading Room (cir-15)The report can now be sorted by patron name or patron ID.

1.

Outstanding Hold Requests Report (cir 11)From this version on, the value placed in the "Latest Start Request Date" field is no longer hard coded, butrather the user can enter any date.

2.

Delete Advanced Booking Slots (cir-65)From this version on, the values placed in the "Date (From)" and "Date (To)" fields are no longer hardcoded, but rather the user can enter any date.

3.

Hold Requests Report (cir-07)From this version on, The value placed in the "Latest Start Request Date" field is no longer hard coded, butrather the user can enter any date.

4.

Update Patron Records (cir-77)This service is intended for use by libraries that have multiple local library patron records (particularly in aMulti-ADM environment). It facilitates central administration for registration of expiry dates, cross-librarydelinquencies, and preparation for patron deletions.

The service updates the expiration date of each Z305 record to match the expiration date registered inthe Z305 record of the Home Library.

1.

If any Z305 record has delinquency/ies, the service inserts the value 99 into the field's Global Block 3in the patron record (z303_delinq_n_3).

2.

If the patron record's Global Note 2 field (z303_field_2) has the contents DELETE, when running thecir-77 service the system checks whether this patron has any liabilities and replaces the contents in theto-del field. The next time the service is run, this patron's records (z303, z304, etc.) will be deleted.

3.

5.

Restart Server (sys-01)This service stops a server and restarts it. The server that is stopped is selected by the user and can be thepc_server, the www_server or the oclc_server. When run, the service will stop the existing server running onthe default port and start a new one on the same port.

6.

Rebuild HTML Pack (sys-02)This service rebuilds the html.pck file after you edit a form or a letter in the form_eng directory. For anychanges to these files to appear, run this service.

7.



Free-of-Charge E-mail MessagesA library that uses certain cash transactions only, in order to charge postal fees, may not want to charge thepatron if the letter is sent by e-mail. You can now set a switch in tab18.lng to prevent charging for specifictransactions.

8.

Registering Offline Cash TransactionsYou can now avoid the registration of cash transactions when registering circulation transactions with offlinecirculation. Set the tab100 variable OFFLINE-CASH-TRANS to N to effect this change.

9.

New Fine Method FA new fine method has been implemented. Fine method F in tab16, col. 14 ("Total days by intervals") usesthe intervals set up in the new table tab_late_return to calculate fines. The sums set up in this table, aretreated as an actual amount and not as a ratio per day.

10.

New Fine Method RA new fine method has been implemented. Fine method R in tab16, col. 14 ("First day fixed, then opendays") levies a fine of 2 for the first day and then continues to calculate like fine method 2 for all furtherdays.

11.

Patron PictureA picture of every patron can now be displayed in the GUI. Pictures can be previewed and added or updatedindividually from the GUI.

You can now update a patron's picture by using the new "Update Picture" button from the "Global PatronInformation" node. It is also used to load a picture for a new patron.

Clicking the New button opens a dialog box, which enables you to load a picture file from the local PC ornetwork and see its preview. A default directory for loading patron pictures can be determined. The newpicture file is saved on the server under the bor_pics directory of the user library (for example,./usr00/bor_pics) as the patron ID with the extension of the file from the PC. The following file formats aresupported: JPG, JPEG, GIF, BMP, JIF, RLE and DIB.

Additionally, the picture is refreshed upon updating, in the loan and return tabs.

When deleting a patron, whether manually or through the Delete Patron Records (cir-23) service, the picturefile is also deleted.

12.

Change Item InformationWhen changing the item information, there is a check box that lets you perform a check for hold requests andphotocopy requests. In the event that the item is requested, an appropriate message is displayed.

13.

Alternative Set of BlocksYou can now set up an alternative set of blocks by creating a new table with any name as an alternative tableto tab_block_circ (which is referred to by the third column of tab_check_circ).

14.

Hold Request Date in GUIPreviously, hold request creation in the GUI used to set the request-date on the client side (PC's current

15.



date). The end-request-date was set hardcoded to be the next year.

Now it works differently, similarly to the way it works in Web OPAC: The default values in the GUI holdrequest screen, are determined by the definition in the following paragraph. The fields are editable and thelibrarian can change the dates from the GUI when placing the hold request.

The new variable in ./alephe/pc_server_defaults is pc_z37_date_to (similar to www_z37_date_to for WebOPAC). The values are in the format : <x><nnn> where the first position is the time unit code, [M]onths,[D]ays or [Y]ears, and the second is the numeric value. For example: M006 for six months.

Patron Loader (file-20)The Patron loader now also supports the following fields:

PROXY-FOR-ID PRIMARY-ID to PLIF USER-REC-PROXY-FOR-ID CHAR 12 The ID of the patron's sponsor USER-REC-PRIMARY-ID CHAR 12 This patron's primary ID

16.

Cash Export ReportThe Cash Export Report (cash-09) service can now been used to produce two formatted printouts, CashExport Report (bursar-export-report.xsl) and Cash Export Patron Report (bursar-export-patron-report.xsl).The service can now also be run to produce a report without actually exporting the sums.

17.

FinesYou can now define a minimum amount under which any fine will be ignored.

You can now add a fixed amount to any calculated fine.

18.

Hold Shelf Report (cir-06)A new sort option by Patron barcode was added for the service Hold Shelf Report (cir-06).

19.

Advance Booking from the Circulation GUIYou can now place an advance booking from the Circulation GUI (and not only from the Web OPAC, as itwas up to now). If an item has an item status set up for advance booking, the placing of a hold requestautomatically opens an advance booking schedule. The number of days visible in this advance bookingschedule is set by the variable "pc_item_schedule" defined in pc_server_defaults.

20.

Campus Hold Requests Router - Cleanup (cir-240)A new service, Campus Hold Requests Router - Cleanup (cir-240) deletes hold requests that have beenplaced on an item which is not available in its original form (either the item has been deleted or the item didnot have a process status, but now has one).

21.

Identification of a Workstation - by Station ID / IP AddressFor various functions in ALEPH (Circulation, cash, and so on), it is necessary to uniquely identify aworkstation.

There are now various alternatives for identification:

Station ID - assignment of a manual identification key.1.

22.



External IP address - the address assigned on the TCP/IP level. This can be different from the internalIP if a staff user accesses the server via firewalls and/or proxies.

2.

Internal IP address - This is the IP address of a workstation within a LAN. It can be different from theIP address defined in the TCP/IP connection due to the various elements outlined above.

3.

The system determines the identification key in the following manner:

If there is a Station ID, this is used to locate the relevant line in tab_attr_sub_library.❍

If no match is found or no Station ID is provided, then the external IP address is used.❍

If no match is found and the internal IP is different from the external IP address, the internal IPaddress is used.

❍

This hierarchical resolution order ensures that sites that are currently operating with internal addresses willcontinue to do so.

Sites that want to implement external IPs and/or station IDs will need to set them up actively, based on theirnetwork environment.

In the instances where the system registers the identity of the workstation, the station identifier will be taken,if it is used: Payment, Event Registration, Last Return. If it is not used, the station's internal IP address istaken.

In the following instances, the CATALOGER-IP variable in tab100 is consulted: Loan Librarian, ReturnLibrarian, Renew Librarian.

If the variable CATALOGER-IP is Y, either the station ID, if used, or the station's internal IP address isregistered.

If the variable CATALOGER-IP is N, the Staff User ID is used.

Hold Request / Photocopy Request: Item Availability Type TYou can now set up a type of item availability that differentiates between filling a request by batch service ormanually. This lets you fill both hold and photocopy requests for certain items on an individual basis.

23.

Handling of Multiple Hold Requests of Same Patron during LoanThe handling of multiple hold requests by a patron on the same item has been improved.

If the item is loaned to the patron, the system now deletes a hold request with status S (item waiting on thehold shelf), even if it is not on the top of the waiting list.

24.

DaemonsThere are changes in the p_switch_tab16_1/2 and p_switch_ue_06_1/2 scripts.

25.



The scripts cannot be run from the chron UNIX utility anymore but only from job_list through the jobdaemon.

Separate Cash Receipt CountersCash receipts can now use separate counters by IP address/station ID.

26.

Due Dates - Setup and Display of Due Dates in GUI Clients and Web OPACYou can control the display of due dates in GUI clients and in the Web OPAC through the variabledue_date_format.

The main reason for this change was the fact that the Z36-ORIGINAL-DUE-DATE was being changed byrenewal. The switch lets you keep the Z36-ORIGINAL-DUE-DATE as the actual original due date, if youwant. Subsequently, it lets you control the date (recall-due-date / pre-recall-due-date) displays in the WebOPAC and in GUI clients for the due-date.

You can control the display of due dates in GUI clients and in the Web OPAC through the variabledue_date_format if there is just a single Due date column. It can be set to four possible values.

1 - Display a single "effective due date", based on the variable RECALL-METHOD.❍

2 - Display the recall-due-date, if there is one (even if it is later); otherwise, display the regular duedate.

❍

3 - Always display only the z36_due_date; (for recall methods 2 and 3, this means that therecall-due-date never displays).

❍

4 - Display both: the regular due date and (if there is one), the recall-due-date.❍

The display of the due date in a GUI client is accompanied by text describing the nature of the due date.

27.

Multiple Time ZonesYou can now work with different time zones in the same ALEPH installation. The multiple time zonefunctionality is intended for use at installations that have many sites (ADM libraries), that run ALEPH on ashared central computer, and that have ADM libraries which are spread over a geographic area that includesdifferent time zones. The special multiple time zone functionality is used in order to use a local time, insteadof the central computer's system time, for some circulation activities.

28.

Automatic InputTwo new methods of automatic input have been added:

Method 3It is similar to method 1, but the total length of the input received from the barcode reader is not a parameteranymore. Only the default startingpoint (zero-based) and the default field length are required.

Method 4It enables clients with patron barcodes or patron IDs of fixed length to perform automatic left zero paddingon codes read from a barcode reader, which are shorter than the fixed length.

29.



For example, if 51111 is entered as the input for a barcode edit box, it will be automatically left zero paddedinto 0000051111.

Self CheckThe new SIP2 server replaces the Self Check server. This new server supports the 3M Standard InterchangeProtocol, versions 1.00 and 2.00.

This new interface supports the following SIP2 command messages:

23 - patron status request 11 - checkout 09 - checkin 01 - block patron 99 - SC status 97 - request ACS resend 93 - login 63 - patron information 17 - item information

Messages that are not supported:

35 - end patron session 37 - fee paid 25 - patron enable 15 - hold 29 - renew (no need - this is part of checkout) 65 - renew all

30.

Sensormatic Self CheckEnhancement for Self Check interface for Sensormatic machines: It is now possible to loan books viaSensormatic Self Check machines even if the book is already on loan.

31.

Hold Request from GUI / Item TabThe placing of a hold request from the GUI from the Item tab has now a different workflow. Highlight theitem the patron wants to request and click Hold. You must then enter the patron's ID or barcode and confirm.The patron is checked and, if OK, the hold request window is displayed.

The former workflow allowed for entering the patron immediately in the hold request window. The patronwas checked only after submitting a hold request. This meant that a staff user might fill in all the fields in thehold request window, only to find out then that the patron was not privileged to place the hold request.

32.

Modifying Hold End Date from GUIIt is now possible to modify the field Z37-END-HOLD-DATE using the Circulation GUI. The field used tobe read only. Now, if the hold request has the "S" status, the field can be edited.

33.

Patron Tabs MovedThe following tabs from the main Patron tab have been moved to the Patron tree.

34.



Global Patron Information❍

Local Patron Information❍

Address Information❍

Additional IDs❍

Each is now a separate node.

Patron Verification Type 02 Based on LDAP LookupPatron verification type 02 is now reserved for LDAP verification. An environment variable has been addedto aleph_start definitions to support this verification method:

setenv aleph_authen $alephm_dev/alephm/source/authen.

A perl script called authen_ldap.pl must be located in the directory set up in the above environment variable.Parameters are passed to the perl script on separate lines:

ID=<id> VERIFY=<verification code> IP=<server IP address>

The perl script must return an XML answer:

<xml version="1.0" ?> <bor-authenticate> <auth>Y/N<auth> <bor_authenticate>

The system should store the original form of verification code and shouldn't change it to upper caseautomatically.

Only ALEPH's internal check program (e.g. check_bor_id_00) will change the verification code to uppercase, to enable the necessary matching.

Other authentication methods, such as LDAP, will use the verification code as is.

35.

Hold Request by Bibliographic Group Available from Web OPACThis functionality includes a new "group" list filter function that allows a patron to filter by Volume or Yearand automatically jump to the hold request template if there is only a single equivalency group. If there aremore than 20 groups, then only the latest 20 volumes / years are displayed.

Once a hold requst is placed, the Campus Hold Requests Router (cir-24) service needs to be run in order toredistribute the hold request to an actual item based on the tab37_campus tables.

36.

Cash Transaction Report (cash-02)The item barcode is added to the XML output when a cash transaction is linked to an item.1.

A new parameter, Sublibrary, has been added to the Cash Transaction Report (cash-02). Thisparameter enables choosing the sublibrary/ies for which the report will be produced.

2.

37.



Call Slips for Hold Requests (cir-12)New sort routines have been added to the Call Slips for Hold Requests (cir-12) service. You can now sortaccording to the following:

Sublibrary and Collection Call Number Call Number 2 Pickup location Send action

In addition, the three sort keys are now interchangable

Any sort routine or sort key can be used in any of the sort levels. Previously, the BIB sort keys could only beused in 1 and 2.

38.

Lost Loan Credit MethodYou can now determine whether or not the refunding of cash transactions in the case of an item that wasreported as lost while on loan but later found and returned will credit amounts that were not yet paid.Already paid monies are always credited.

39.

Photocopy Request Slips (cir-22)Since checking the availability of an item for filling a photocopy request depends entirely on thesetting of PHOTO-SLIP-STYLE, the Check Availability parameter of Photocopy Request Slips(cir-22) has been removed.

1.

You can now determine which items are listed on photocopy request slips and whether or not theitem's availability is checked. There are three options:

2.

List all "like" items in the photocopy request slip. Availability is not checked.❍

List only available "like" items in the photocopy request slip. Availability is checked.❍

List the first of the available "like" items in the photocopy request slip. Availability is checked.❍

40.

Patron Address Records in PrintoutsUntil now, when sending a letter to the patron, the system first looked for a valid address record of type 02.If no such record was found, the system looked for a valid address record of type 01. If no such record wasfound, no address was printed on the letter to the patron.

Now, when no valid record is found (either type 02 or type 01), the system uses the address record with thehighest sequence number. This way letters sent to the patron always have an address.

41.

Patron Records - New, Duplicate, DeleteThe buttons for creating a new patron record, duplicating an existing patron record and deleting an existingpatron record were removed from the Patron List. These options are now available as separate entries underthe Patrons menu. Note that the options to duplicate or delete a patron record are only active when there is a

42.



patron session open.

New Feedback Message for Return in SIP2 ServerA new feedback message for Return has been added to the SIP2 self-check server function. The setup of thisfunction is independent of the new return_message parameter in tab_sip2.conf.

If this parameter is set to Y and one of the following conditions is met during return, the special message 36(that is, Return performed - please put this item into the red box.) from $alephe_root/error_eng/sip2_serverinstead of message 26 (Item returned) is displayed.

The conditions are:

The item has active hold requests (Z37-record).❍

The item has a circulation note in the item record (Z30-NOTE-CIRCULATION) - this can be used inorder to identify ILL material.

❍

The sublibrary belonging to this Station Identifier / IP-address is not the item's sublibrary. The itemhas to be transferred to the item's library (No matching entry for type 3 in column 2 oftab_attr_sub_library).

❍

The item is a "short-loan" item. An item is a short-loan item if a "reserved items schedule" is definedfor the current date for this item in tab43.

❍

In this way, the patron places items which require special handling in a particular place. This assists staffusers when they handle these items (printing transfer slips, and so on) using the Circulation GUI.

43.

Word Search for CJK in Search for Administrative Record WindowThe word search for CJK in the Search for Administrative Record window does not look for adjacent words.The system breaks a given string into characters with the Boolean AND between them.

Example: A user enters a string of characters ABCD The system breaks it into A B C D with the BooleanAND between the characters.

44.

Online RecallIt is now possible to place a recall on an item online using the Recall button on the Items List. This functionenables you to place a recall on the item without the need to place a hold request first. Apart from that, therecall process is the same as a regular recall done through the hold request.

45.

New Cash Transaction Default SublibraryFrom now when creating a new cash transaction in the GUI, the sublibrary field is filled by default with thecash library from type 5 in column 2 of tab_attr_sub_library.

46.

Editing a Record After Creating it Through the Catalog Record and Create Item UtilityAfter the bibliographic and item records are created through the Catalog Record and Create Item utility,pressing the Cancel button on the confirmation dialog will return to the editing dialog which allows the userto modify the information. Previously the Cancel would have resulted in the loss of all the information

47.



entered.

Duplicate IDs for Different PatronsIt is now possible to have duplicate IDs for different patrons. The system checks for duplicate IDs in thefollowing way: IDs that are NOT used as the key to retrieve Z303 in the GUI (N in column 5 oftab_bor_id.lng), can be duplicated for different patrons.

Duplication for the same patron is always allowed. The ID data can be the same but the verification must bedifferent so there won't be two identical sets of ID and verification.

Duplication is not possible between IDs that are not used as the key to retrieve Z303 in the GUI and thosethat are used as the key in the GUI (Y in column 5 of tab_bor_id.lng).

48.

Special Dates for Advance Booking ScheduleA new option was added to tab43 to define days where the slots are different from the schedule as a whole.This is supported by a new column that identifies the next group of definitions:

COL 1. Line Type

There are two available values in this column: P and E.

P - the following slots are defined for a period of time. This is the way the tab43 definitions worked uptill now.

❍

E - the following slots refer to the day listed in column 4 (End of Period Date).❍

It is possible to define days where the slots are different from the schedule as a whole.

P ##### 60 20040101 01 0900 01 1100;

The P stands for settings of a period and will include the date until which the definition is valid. The settingsfor the irregular slot are:

E ##### 60 20030930 00 0900 00 1700;

The E indicates that the following line is a definition of an exact date and not an end of a period as in lines oftype P. The 00 in an E type of line, indicates that the definition is for the date listed in column 4. A 00 in a Ptype of line still stands for Sunday. The slot in this example starts on 09:00 and ends at 17:00 on the sameday. Another option is to define a date that is included in the schedule period and on which no slots will beopen. To do so, leave columns 5-8 empty as follows way:

E ##### 60 20030930

This indicates that on September 30th, there are no slots available for item status 60.

It is possible to use ## instead of the year, month or day listed in column 4.

For example:

E ##### 60 2003##01

indicates that there are no open time slots for the 1st of every month in 2003.

E ##### 60 ####0930

49.



indicates that there are no open time slots on September 30th every year.

Delete Patron Records (cir-23)The service Delete Patron Records (cir-23) now produces two output files that contain the IDs of theretrieved patrons. These files can be used as input files for this service. The files are created in./ADM50/scratch.

1.

From this version on, additional output files were added (in addition to two printouts in $data_print:rejected/deleted). The service will now generate two files in $data_scratch resp. containing IDs of thepatrons processed. These files can be used later as input files to the service cir_23).

2.

In a Multi-ADM environment, the Z303 record of a patron registered to an ADM library participatingin a shared environment will be deleted unless this patron has Z305 records in another ADM library.

3.

In the event that the patron has Z305 records in another ADM library, only the local information(Z305 records) of the active library will be deleted. The Global Patron Information (Z303 record) willbe deleted only after the patron's Z305 records in all other ADM libraries have been deleted.

4.

A patron who has outstanding ILL requests (requests that are not closed or cancelled) will not bedeleted. It is not possible to override this.

5.

50.

Build Patron Indexes (cir-25)A new service, Build Patron Indexes, (cir-25), has been implemented. This service is used to entirely rebuildthe Z353 index or to add a single ADM library to the index. The service should be run only for initialcreation of the index.

51.

Fast Patron RegistrationIt is now possible to register a new patron via a fast registration form. This form contains fields pertaining tolocal patron information and address information, in addition to fields existing in the current form, such asID, barcode, name or date of birth. It is activated either by clicking the New Patron button on the right sideof the Patron Bar, or by choosing the menu item Patrons/New Patron.

In comparison to the current form, the new form contains full information on one address (including e-mail,zip code and telephone numbers), and local patron information - patron sublibrary and status (for the Z305record). On the other hand, the new form does not contain fields relating to proxies and blocks(delinquencies). Using this new form all of the patron records (Z303/Z304/Z305/Z308) are created at once.

A new flag in .\Circ\Tab\Circ.ini determines whether the old Global Patron Information form is displayed, orthe new fast registration form is displayed. If the flag is set to Y the new form is displayed. If the flag is setto N, the old form is displayed.

The Name field in the Fast Patron registration form has been visually split into two fields: Last Name andFirst Name.

The field Z303_NAME is formed as follows: Last Name, First Name (Last Name - comma - blank - FirstName).

The field Z304_ADDRESS (first line) is formed as follows: First Name Last Name (First Name - blank -

52.



Last Name).

In case of institution names, only the Last Name field can be filled.

Two sets of default values can be created in two different ways:

Z303-CON-LNG Z303-HOME-LIBRARY Z303-ILL-LIBRARY Z305-SUB-LIBRARY

The values of these fields are filled in the form and can be saved in a local file(.\Circ\Tab\patrondef.dmp) by clicking the Save Defaults button. The next time the form is activated,these fields will be filled with their default values, loaded from patrondef.dmp.

1.

Z303-ILL-TOTAL-LIMIT Z303-ILL-ACTIVE-LIMIT Z303-EXPORT-CONSENT Z303-SEND-ALL-LETTERS Z304-DATE-TO (for address type "01") Z305-BOR-TYPE Z303-PLIF-MODIFICATION

The values for these fields are taken from a new table, tab_fast_patron_register, located in the data_tabdirectory of USR00. This table contains lines in the format "FIELD=VALUE". The table containslines in the format "FIELD=VALUE". For example:

Z303-ILL-TOTAL-LIMIT=0555 Z303-ILL-ACTIVE-LIMIT=0444 Z303-EXPORT-CONSENT=N Z303-SEND-ALL-LETTERS=N Z304-DATE-TO=00000002Y Z305-BOR-TYPE=DR Z303-PLIF-MODIFICATION = A B D E 1

When these fields are created following a submission of the registration form, their values will bethose set in this table.

The default value for the field "Z304-DATE-TO" can have two formats:

Eight digits only. In this case the field is translated as a specific date with the formatyyyymmdd. For example:

Z304-DATE-TO=20041231

1.

Eight digits suffixed with an uppercase letter. In this case the value will be translated asan offset from the current date. If the suffix is Y the offset will be in years, if it is M theoffset will be in months, and if it is D the offset will be in days. For example:

Z304-DATE-TO=00000002Y

means that 2 years will be added to the current date and stored in the field

2.

■

2.



Z304-DATE-TO of the newly created patron.

The Z303-PLIF-MODIFICATION field sets which fields should be protected when updatingborrower records using the PLIF - Patron Loader (file-20) service. The field can contain a list ofcodes delimited by a space in between. Codes are:

A = Do not modify the borrower's address records (Z304).■

B = Do not modify the borrower's status.■

D = Do not modify the borrower's expiry date.■

E = Do not modify the borrower's e-mail address (Z304-EMAIL-ADDRESS) in theaddress record (Z304).

■

1 = Do not modify all borrower's records (Z303, Z304, Z305 and Z308).■

■

Export Cash Transactions (cash-10)The Export Cash Transactions (cash-10) service is used to export cash transactions of type "Debit" to acollection agency. The service produces a report of the exported transactions in the print directory of theADM library, and an XML file for export, in the ADM library's scratch directory. The exported XML fileincludes information about the cash transactions (Z31), as well as information about the owing patron(Z303/Z304/Z308) and any bibliographic information related to the transaction. The content of thebibliographic citation is controlled by the section of the edit_paragraph configuration table that is referred toin the tab_format section "cash-export".

53.

Hold Request Like CopiesOnly like copies that are requestable according to column 8 of tab15 are considered available like copies.

54.

Loan Report (cir-04)A new sort option has been added to this service. It is now possible to sort also by the local patron notes(Z305-field-1, Z305-field-2, Z305-field-3). The sort key will be the relevant note of the local patron forwhich the loan was created.

Also, all Z305 and Z30 fields can be used in this service's printout which is defined in the XSL file.

55.

Returning an ILL ItemIf an item being returned at the Circulation desk is supposed to be handled by the ILL department, a messagewill be issued warning the Circulation Librarian that the ILL department should take care of the item's return.

56.

Import Cash Transactions (cash-11)This new service updates cash transactions (Z31 records) using data from the input file supplied. Only Z31records that have been exported and have not been recalled can be updated. The update is parallel to payingthe debit via the GUI, allowing both full payment and partial payment.

Each XML record from the input file is matched to an existing cash transaction record by using the inputelements z31-id/sequence or alternatively z31-transfer-number. A report file is created, which includes a linefor each input transaction.

57.



The input file has to be an XML file of the following format :

<?xml version="1.0"?> <p-cash-11> <record> <z31-id>JOHN</z31-id> <z31-sequence>200312151806862</z31-sequence> <z31-sum>2.00</z31-sum> <z31-transfer-number>12</z31-transfer-number> <z31-payment-date>20031212</z31-payment-date> <z31-payment-hour>0901</z31-payment-hour> <z31-payment-cataloger>STF1</z31-payment-cataloger> <z31-payment-target>df-23</z31-payment-target> <z31-payment-ip>255.255.255.255</z31-payment-ip> <z31-payment-receipt-number>RCPT-501</z31-payment-receipt-number> </record> </p-cash-11>

The z31-payment-receipt-number tag is optional. If the z31-id and z31-sequence tags are empty or do notexist, the z31-transfer-number will be used for matching an existing z31 record against the record in theinput file.

Remote RegistrationWhen copying patron records from a remote library, it is possible to perform several checks on the importedrecords.

The checks should be listed in the RMT-REG section of tab_check_circ (located under . /usm50/tab). Thedefinition should appear in each of the ADM libraries from which the records are copied.

The relevant checks in this section are the ones that check the global aspects of the patron records. Forexample, the global patron record blocks, the blocks on the patron's ALEPH record etc.

58.

Scrub Patron IDs (cir-32)This new service removes the patron IDs from records that are only kept for statistical reasons. The recordsthat can be scrubbed are Z31, Z36H, Z37H, Z40 and Z35. The service will scrub all of the required recordsthat are older than the number of days specified by the user, swapping the patron ID with SCRyyyymmdd,where yyyymmdd is the execution date.

If the Cash Table (Z31) is scrubbed, only transactions that are closed or waived will be scrubbed.

If the ILL Patron Requests Table (Z40) is scrubbed, only requests that are closed or cancelled will bescrubbed.

All records can be filtered by their age, using the Number of Days to Retain parameter. When scrubbing theLoans History Table (Z36H) the records can also be filtered by the item status and the sublibrary.

59.

Hold Requests - Using Different Hold Request Forms - tab_hold_request_formIt is now possible to define the system to use different hold request forms when the patron places a holdrequest through the Web OPAC.

Two definitions are required:

60.



Create the desired settings in tab_hold_request_form with a new suffix.❍

Copy the hold request forms to files with the same names but with the suffix fromtab_hold_request_form.

❍

The new table tab_hold_request_form sets the option to configure the system to use different hold requestforms when the patron places a request through the Web OPAC.

When a request is placed, the system will look for a matching line in the table. The correct line will beselected according to one of the available parameters in this table: the item's sublibrary, item status, itemprocess status, patron status and item's availability that is determined according to theAVAILABILITY-ROUTINE variable in tab100.

If no match is found, or tab_hold_request_form does not exist, the system will display the hold request formswithout the suffix.

After a suffix is created in tab_hold_request_form for a specific combination of the available parameters,copy the following pages to new files with the same name plus the suffix:

item-hold-request-body❍

item-hold-request-head❍

item-hold-request-tail❍

Delete Paid Transactions (cash-04)This service has been removed. Paid transactions can be scrubbed by using the new service Scrub Patron IDs(cir-32).

61.

VAT and Net Sums DisplayDisplay of a cash transaction's VAT and net sum has been added to the Cash Transactions tab in the CashDetails tab (lower pane when the Cash node is chosen from the Patron tab). This is done by adding thesevalues to the file user-cash, found in USM50's pc_display_eng directory.

62.

Deleting a PatronIn addition to checking for cash transactions, loans, hold requests and photocopy requests, a check foroutstanding ILL requests is also performed when a patron is deleted, either from the GUI or from the batchservice Delete Patron Records (cir-23). If the patron has ILL requests that are not closed or cancelled,deleting this patron will not be possible.

63.

Partial WaiveA new option to cancel part of a non-credit transaction has been added to the Cash form (Patron tab / Cashnode / upper pane). To cancel part of a non-credit transaction, highlight it and click the new Partial Waivebutton. A form is displayed for you to enter a comment or a reason for cancelling the transaction, and thesum that will be cancelled. You cannot waive a credited cash transaction. If the patron wants to cancel acredited transaction, a debited transaction of the same value must be created.

Note that contrary to partial payment, in which the entered sum is the total sum (including the VAT), the

64.



partial waive sum is the net sum without the VAT.

Build/Correct VAT (cash-12)This new service updates VAT values of cash transactions. It can be run in one of two operation modes:

Build VAT - In this operation mode, all cash transactions that have a status of Open and have a VAT valueof zero are scanned. If, according to tab18.lng, they should have a VAT rate, the existing sum is calculated tobe made up of a net sum and a VAT sum. For example, an existing transaction of type 40 has a sum of 99.00,a VAT sum of 0.00 and a net sum of 99.00. Tab18.lng now has a VAT rate of 10.00 for transaction type 40.When cash-12 is run, the new transaction values will be a sum of 99.00, a VAT sum of 9.00 and a net sum of90.00.

Correct VAT - In this operation mode, all cash transactions that have a status of Open and have a VAT valueother than zero are scanned. If, according to tab18.lng, they should have a different VAT rate, the existingnet sum will be taken as the base for a new VAT calculation.

For example, an existing transaction of type 40 has a sum of 99.00, a VAT sum of 9.00 and a net sum of90.00. The tab18.lng VAT rate for transaction type 40 has been changed to 20.00. When cash-12 is run, thenew transaction values will be a sum of 108.00, a VAT sum of 18.00 and the net sum will remain 90.00.

65.

Defining the Zip Code Format for a Patron's Address in PrintoutsThe format of patrons' zip codes in printouts is now defined in the XML translation file global.trn in theform_eng directory.

Enter the line:

z302-zip ZIP-CAN S

to use the Canadian format (123 456).

Enter the line:

z304-zip ZIP-USA S

to use the USA format (12345-6789).

For any other format, do not enter any line in global.trn, and the zip code will be displayed exactly as it wasentered.

This used to be defined in the tab100 variable ADDRESS-ZIP-STYLE. This variable has been removed fromtab100.

66.

E-mail Icon

The E-mail Icon has been added to the Returns and Loans Patron Information tabs and to the GlobalPatron Information tab. It is used to send an e-mail message to the patron. The patron's e-mail address willautomatically be inserted in the To field.

67.

Circ.iniThe entry

[UserList]

1.

68.



NewUserSelect=N

is not in use anymore. It has therefore been removed from Circ.ini.

The [FastCatalog] entry in circ.ini is not in use anymore, and has therefore been deleted from Circ.ini.2.

Patron Profile Information WindowThe ADM library field has been removed from the General Information tab of the Patron Profile InformationWindow. It was no longer in use.

69.

List of Hold RequestsThe Go to Item button was added; clicking this button transfers you to the Items tab in the Circulationmodule.

70.

List of Photocopy RequestsThe Go to Item button was added; clicking this button transfers you to the Items tab in the Circulationmodule.

71.

Recall Items on LoanThe service cir-13 has been renamed from Recall Loans to Recall Items on Loan.

72.

Renew Items on LoanThe service cir-08 has been renamed from Renew Loans to Renew Items on Loan.

73.

Cash Transactions - Payment ModeWhen confirming payment of a cash transactionin the Circulation module, you can now select a paymentmode from the new Payment Mode drop-down list in the Cash Transaction form.

74.

Due Dates - Effective Due Date in Printouts and GUI HTML InformationIn XML-XSL printouts and in GUI HTML information (based on templates defined in./usm50/pc_display_eng), z36-due-date can now be translated into the "effective due date" by using thefollowing setting in a .trn file (./usm01/form_eng/global.trn or a specific translation file):

! M ! / !Tag Type S Parameters !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! z36-due-date DUE-DATE S z36-recall-date z36-recall-due-date

The translation process uses the get_effective_due_date routine: the tab100 variable RECALL-METHODand the Z36 fields Z36-DUE-DATE, Z36-RECALL-DATE and Z36-RECALL-DUE-DATE are all takeninto account in order to generate the effective due date.

75.



COURSE READING AND RESERVES

Version 16

Course Reading Items in Multi-ADM Libraries Environment●

Course Summary Report●

Instructor Summary Report●

Requesting Items●

Saving Basket Items on Server●

Services

Print Pickup List (course-02)●

Print Pickup List (course-02)In the Print Pickup List (course-02) service, the time period (z108_period) retrieve parameter, has been replaced byhold-request start date (z37_request_date).

1.

Instructor Summary ReportThere is a new report in the Course Reading module, Instructor Summary Report.

The new report contains data about two main topics: All the courses designated to a particular instructor and thebibliographic records attached to them.

This can give a good idea of an instructor's academic work, and can be useful for statistical purposes.

2.

Course Reading Items in Multi-ADM Libraries EnvironmentCourse reading items can now be filtered according to ADM libraries, which relate to the course reading library inthe library_relation table. The item is added to the Course reading item list only if Z103-LKR-LIBRARY exists.

3.

Saving Basket Items on ServerYou can now define the directory on the server in which the item from the basket will be saved. The directory isdefined in /alephe/aleph_start. In the following example, the basket items will be saved under /tmp/save_cr:



4.

Requesting ItemsAn additional option for requesting items in Course Reading is now available, Exact Copy. This option allows theuser to request a specific item for a course.

5.

Course Summary ReportCollection-code has been added to the Course Summary Report (course-summary-00) as the $04200 placeholder.

6.

Release Notes - Course Reading and Reserves - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR8A4UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00087/file/n-course-16 [3/31/2004 5:16:50 PM]

INTERLIBRARY LOAN

Version 16

Incoming ILL Request Library ID Field●

Items' Button in Incoming ILL Request Record●

Outgoing ILL - Expected Return Date●

Outgoing ILL - Due Date Calculation●

New Request ISSN Field●

Arrival Letter to Patron●

ill-drop-letter●

Services

Load Catalog Records - Parallel Load (manage-18-p)●

Synchronize Borrower Data with Supplier Data (ill-14)●

Static Status Requests Report (ill-08)●

Shelf List (ill-12)●

List of Items Returned in Circulation (ill-03)●



Load Catalog Records - Parallel Load (manage-18-p)The internal name of the Load Catalog Records - Parallel Load service has been changed frommanage-18-p to manage-180.

1.

New Request ISSN FieldThe ISSN field has been added to the New ILL Request form. This relates to the blank form for ajournal, conference or report.

2.

Arrival Letter to PatronThe request's patron note has been added as the last line of the letter to a patron that is printedwhen a required ILL item has arrived.

3.

Static Status Requests Report (ill-08)The following request statuses are now also ignored by this function: RT (Returned) and NA (NotAvailable). Previously only the following statuses were ignored: CLS (Closed), CA (Cancelled)and LC (Library Cancelled).

4.

ill-drop-letter and ill-print-letterRedundant forms of ill-drop-letter* and ill-print-letter* (for example, ill-drop-letter-l-book,ill-print-letter-l-serial) in the form_sub_library_address table of the Administrative library werereplaced by ill-drop-letter and ill-print-letter.

5.

Release Notes - Interlibrary Loan - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR8A4UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00088/file/n-ill-16 (1 of 3) [3/31/2004 5:17:02 PM]

Synchronize Borrower Data with Supplier Data (ill-14)This is a new ILL service. It enables you to update borrower data (Z303, Z308, Z304, Z302, Z305)from ILL supplier data (Z70).

This function assumes that there are records for suppliers in ILL outgoing requests and borrowersin ILL incoming requests referring to the same institution. Therefore, the data should be identical.For easy maintenance, you may use this service to change data in the supplier record only and thensynchronize that information with the relevant borrower data. This requires correspondingidentifiers in both records:

The supplier code (Z70-VENDOR-CODE) must be identical to either the user ID (Z303-ID) or theuser BARCODE (Z308-KEY-DATA where Z308-KEY-TYPE=01).

If there is a match, no comparison takes place; the supplier data always overrides the user data. If asupplier record does not have a corresponding borrower record, it will be created. This procedurelocks the library.

6.

Shelf List (ill-12)This is a new service for ILL outgoing requests. This report lists all outgoing ILL requests thathave been provided on the hold shelf but have not been picked up by the borrower. The report <ill-clear-list.xsl > produces a list only, but no status is changed.

The batch performs a check for Outgoing Requests with status RL (Request Loaned) which has noZ36 or Z36H record.

In your ADM library: You must set the variable CREATE-Z36H to Y in order to keep thecirculation history.

7.

Incoming ILL Request Library ID FieldIt is now possible to enter the ID or the barcode in order to link the incoming request to theborrower record (Z303) of the library which orders the material. Previously, only the ID could beentered.

8.

Restart Server (sys-01)This service stops a server and restarts it. The server that is stopped is selected by the user and canbe the pc_server, the www_server or the oclc_server. When run, the service will stop the existingserver running on the default port and start a new one on the same port.

9.

Rebuild HTML Pack (sys-02)This service rebuilds the html.pck file after you edit a form or a letter in the form_eng directory.For any changes to these files to appear, run this service.

10.

List of Items Returned in Circulation (ill-03)11.



This is a new ILL service for ILL outgoing requests. It enables you to produce return letters tosuppliers of items that have been returned in Circulation, but have not yet been sent back to thesupplier in ILL. It also enables you to change the request status to Returned (RT).

In your ADM library: You must set the variable CREATE-Z36H to Y in order to keep thecirculation history setting.

The list < ill-return-list.xsl > will be sent by e-mail to the supplier if the List Send Method of thesupplier record is E-MAIL and there is an e-mail address in the supplier's address record.Otherwise the list will be written in a print file only.

Items' Button in Incoming ILL Request RecordA new button has been added to the Incoming ILL Request for Admin Record window: Items.Click the Items button to display the item list of the Admin record. The Items List window enablesyou to view items information and to create hold requests on behalf of the ILL Borrower.

12.

Outgoing ILL - Expected Return DateThere is a new environment variable in pc_server_defaults:

ILL_EXPECTED RETURN_DATE

It defines the default parameter by days for expected return date of item loaned in ILL(z41-expected-return-date).

For example:

setenv ill_expected_return_date 028

If the item was received on the first of July 2003, the system will automatically display the 29th ofJuly 2003 as the expected return date.

13.

Outgoing ILL - Due Date CalculationWhen a loan for an outgoing request is processed, the system now considers tab17 (Library openhours) for calculating the due date. Note that it may occur that Z36-DUE-DATE is greater thanZ41-EXPECTED-RETURN-DATE, especially if ill_return_for_user is zero.

14.



INDEXING

Version 16

Job Failure Detection Mechanism●

Subdivisions●

Z00R●

Filing Routines●

FORCE-USE-Z07●

Expand Routines

Expand Routines - General●

expand_doc_adm_bib●

expand_doc_adm_hol●

expand_doc_bib_852_title●

expand_doc_bib_acc●

expand_doc_bib_cjk_word●

expand_doc_bib_hol and expand_doc_hol_bib●

expand_doc_bib_hol_usm●

expand_doc_bib_z30●

expand_doc_fix_abbreviation●

expand_doc_hld_stmt●

expand_doc_hol_86x●

expand_doc_hol_z30_86x●

expand_doc_issn_isbn●

expand_doc_join●

expand_doc_nsls_ccs●

expand_doc_open_cat●

expand_doc_own●

expand_doc_type●

expand_doc_uni_merge●

Services

Alphabetize Long Headings (manage-17)●

Update Headings Index (manage-02)●

Delete Unlinked Headings (manage-15)●

Delete Unlinked Headings (manage-15)Parallel processing has been implemented in this service.

1.

Update Headings Index (manage-02)A new parameter, "Run in Duplicate Mode", has been added to the Update Headings Index (manage-02) service. Thisparameter can only be set to "Yes" when running p_manage_02 in "Update headings index" mode, or after runningp_manage_102 (which copies headings from the authority file into the bibliographic file Z01).

If this parameter is set to "Yes", the job bypasses the match against the dictionary (Z01), which may cause the loading ofduplicate entries initially.

During the next step the system executes the following:

2.

Release Notes - Indexing - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00089/file/n-indexing-16 (1 of 12) [3/31/2004 5:17:08 PM]

De-duplication of duplicate headings1.

Re-organization of the Z01 table according to Z01-REC-KEY (for better performance when browsing).2.

Sorting of long headings and therefore avoiding the need to run p_manage_17 (which is often very slow).3.

Note: This process requires more disk space because when it ends, it performs a total dump and load of Z01. It also sets"last-long-acc-number" as "last-acc-number" in UTIL G/2.

If this parameter is set to "No", this service will run as in previous versions.

Note: You should only run the service with the parameter "Run in Duplicate Mode" set to Yes, only before building the Z0101(Brief records) and Z0102 (counters for logical bases) records.

Alphabetize Long Headings (manage-17)A new parameter, "Procedure to Run", has been added to the Alphabetize Long Headings (manage-17) service.

This parameter can only be set to "Re-organize entire index" when re-sorting all headings (after running p_manage_02 in"Rebuild entire headings index" mode, or after changing the rules for alphabetization in the tab00.lng table or in the tab_filingtable)

If this parameter is set to "Re-organize entire index" the job sorts the long headings according to the Z01-REC-KEY ranges.

Note: The new parameter only runs in "Re-organize entire index" mode if the "last-long-acc-number" counter is set to zero inthe Z52 table (UTIL G/2). For periodical execution of the process for sorting added headings use, continue from the lasthandled ACC sequence as defined in last-long-acc-number in UTIL/G/2 mode.

3.

expand_doc_typeFrom this version on, the specification tables used together with the expand_doc_type program are language-sensitive.If, for example, the tab_expand table is set up as follows:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> WORD expand_doc_type tab_type_config

then the system looks for the matching tab_type_config in the following order based on the language:

$data_tab/tab_type_config.<lng>1.

$data_tab/tab_type_config.<control_lng> (as defined in aleph_start)2.

$data_tab/tab_type_config (for backwards compatability)3.

1.

The expand_doc_type routine can now handle up to 15 different comparison values (previously, this was 5).2.

expand_doc_type can now be used with repetitive fields. This is especially useful for the EXIST function. For example:

!!!!!-!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!! TYP EL Electronic material 856## u EXIST

Note that the program always matches the first tag which matches the tag+subfield condition. Accordingly, the EQUAL,N-EQUAL or MATCH functions cannot be used for repetitive fields with the same subfield. This has not changed fromprevious versions. For example:

TYP Publisher 260## b EQUAL Oclc

The line above does not work with a record such as:

000000000 L 26001 $$aNew York$$bRandom House 000000000 L 26001 $$aNew York$$bOCLC

since it only takes the first line.

3.

4.

expand_doc_bib_acc5.



The expand_doc_bib_acc program has been renamed. The program is now called expand_doc_bib_multi_lng. This programadds other language fields to the record in multilingual applications.

expand_doc_ownA new expand program, expand_doc_own, has been implemented. This program appends to all fields in the record thecontents of the OWN field. The contents are added under subfield $1.

6.

expand_doc_open_catA new expand program, expand_doc_open_cat, has been implemented. This program creates a virtual CDATE field based onthe first CAT field of the record.

7.

expand_doc_bib_cjk_wordThe expand_doc_bib_cjk_word routine in 15.2 has been replaced by the tab100 variable, CJK-SEGMENT-METHOD.

Note: this determines whether word indexing of CJK characters uses a segmentation dictionary, or simply treats each characteras a word.

8.

expand_doc_adm_holA new expand program, expand_doc_adm_hol, has been implemented. This program can be used in the tab_expand table ofan ADM library in order to add HOL data to the ADM record.

The parameters in column 3 of tab_expand can be up to 10 comma-separated fields (5 characters each, can include hashes, forexample, 85### If column 3 is blank, then all fields from the HOL record are added to the ADM record.

To exclude a specific field, precede the list of fields with a dash - (for example, -85### -86###).

Example of expand_doc_adm_hol in tab_expand (ADM library):

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_adm_hol 85###86###

9.

expand_doc_bib_hol_usmexpand_doc_bib_hol_usm: A new parameter, UPPRESS_SF_Z, which controls the display of the 852 subfield $z in the new866 field, has been added.

If, for example, the tab_expand table is set up as follows: then the 852 subfield $z is not displayed in the new 866 field.

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_bib_hol_usm SUPPRESS_SF_Z

10.

expand_doc_bib_852_titleA new expand program, expand_doc_bib_852_title, has been implemented. This program expands the subfields $a,$b, $c ofthe Main Title field (245 MARC 21 field) into the 852 MARC 21 field ($$a,$$b, $$c) and creates a new CLN field. Forexample, if the bibliographic record contains the following fields:

24510 L $$aWall shadows; :$$ba study in American prisons, 852 L $$bUELEC$$hhE183.8.B7$$iL494

then the expand_doc_bib_852_title program creates the following new CNL field:

CLN01 L $$hhE183.8.B7$$iL494$$1Wall shadows; : $$2a study in American prisons,

If there are multiple 852 fields, then each one is taken and the same 245 field is added to them.

11.

expand_doc_fix_abbreviationThe expand_doc_fix_abbreviation expand program has been enhanced. From this version it is possible to specify whether thefield with the abbreviation is duplicated in a new field with the non-abbreviated form of the word or whether the abbreviation isreplaced in the original field with the new form.

12.



Use the parameter column in tab_expand (col. 3). The available values are ADD and REPLACE. ADD adds a new field to therecord with the non-abbreviated form and REPLACE replaces the abbreviated form with the new form in the original fieldwithout duplication. If the column is left blank, the system duplicates the field (as ADD).

The following is an extract from tab_expand:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_fix_abbreviation REPLACE

expand_doc_adm_bibThe expand_doc_adm_bib expand program has been enhanced. From this version on, it is possible to include or excludespecific BIB fields in the expanded ADM record, by using column 3 of tab_expand of the ADM library.

The parameters in Column 3 of tab_expand are up to 10 comma-separated fields (5 characters each, can include hashes, e.g.,100##), to be included or excluded in the ADM record. To exclude specific fields, the list of fields to be excluded should bepreceded by a dash - , e.g., -245##,100##.

If column 3 is blank, then ALL fields from the BIB record are added to the ADM record.

In the following example, the 260## and 100## fields will be excluded from the expanded ADM record

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_adm_bib -260##,100##

13.

expand_doc_issn_isbnA new expand program, expand_doc_issn_isbn has been implemented. This program creates virtual 020/022 fields from the020/022 fields that contain characters within parentheses. The program removes both the parentheses and the characters.

For example, if the bibliographic record contains the following field:

020 L $$a0226123693 (pbk. : v. 2 : alk. paper)

then the program creates the following new virtual field:

020 L $$a0226123693

14.

expand_doc_hol_86xThe expand_doc_hol_86x expand program has been enhanced as follows:From this version, if the holdings record includes an 866/7/8 field with the same sequence number in subfield $8 as thesequence number registered in subfield $8 of the 863/4/5 field, then no other 866/7/8 field will be generated by the program.

If the holdings record includes an 866/7/8 field with sequence number 0 registered in subfield $8, then no other 866/7/8 fieldwill be generated by the program.

15.

expand_doc_hld_stmtA new expand program, expand_doc_hld_stmt has been implemented.

The expand_doc_hld_stmt routine generates 863/4/5 enumeration and chronology data in HOL records, using itemrecords that are linked to the HOL record. The fields that are generated can then be used to create compressed holdingsstatements for display.

1.

As an expand routine, the compressed holdings statements are built on-the-fly when the record is displayed. Note that asimilar program, fix_doc_hld_stmt, can be applied in the cataloging module (after setting the tab_fix and the fix_doc.engtable of the HOL library (XXX60). When the fix_doc_hld_stmt program is performed, the 863/4/5 fields are added to theHOL record.

2.

16.



This routine is relevant to HOL libraries only. Note that this routine is relevant only if the 85x/85xX Publication Patternfields reside in the HOL document record.

3.

The following item records are taken into consideration when generating the 863/4/5 fields:

Items that have HOL no. in the Hol. Link field.■

Items for which the enumeration field is equal to or greater than the value entered in subfield $$a of S63/4/5(Starting Point field) in the HOL record. If there is no S63/4/5 field, enumeration in the item record is not checked.See paragraph 5 for more details.

■

Item groups:All items which share the same Linking Number identifier in $$8 and the same Copy-ID are taken intoconsideration for a single holdings statement; if one HOL record has more than one linked Copy-ID, eachCopy-ID creates a separate holdings statement. See paragraph 5 for more details.

■

4.

"Starting Point" and "Copy-ID":A special field, S63/4/5 in the HOL record, defines the item's Starting Point and the Copy-ID for generating a holdingsstatement. This field should be used by libraries that already have holdings statement fields for item records. Use fieldS63/4/5 with subfield $$a for the volume's Starting Point and subfield $$t for Copy-ID.

For example: if the field "S63" contains in subfield $a the value "3", only items with the first enumeration level of "3"(or higher) will be included in the holdings statement.

If the field "S63" subfield $t contains the value "2", only items with the value "2" in the copy number field(Z30-COPY-ID) will be included in the generated holdings statement.

S63 L $$a3 $$t2 C6340 L $$81.1$$a3$$b2-4$$i2002$$j03-07$$wg$$t2$$9Y C6340 L $$81.2$$a4$$b1-2$$i2003$$j01-03$$wg$$t2$$9Y C6340 L $$81.3$$a4$$b4-5$$i2003$$j07-09$$wg$$t2$$9Y

Note: it is possible to have several "S63" fields in the HOL record. In this case, a set of holdings statement (863/4/5)fields will be created for each "S63" field that includes subfield $t (copy-ID).

For example:

86340 L $$81.13$$a1$$i20000-2000$$t1$$9Y 86340 L $$81.14$$a2$$b1-3$$i2001$$j01-05$$wg$$t1$$9Y 86340 L $$81.15$$a2$$b5-6$$i2001$$j09-11$$t1$$9Y 86340 L $$82.13$$a1$$i2000$$t2$$ $$9Y 86340 L $$82.14$$a2$$b1$$i2001$$j01$$wg$$t2$$9Y 86340 L $$82.15$$a2$$b3$$i2001$$j05$$wg$$t2$$9Y

5.

The following procedures are performed by the routine:

Holdings statements (863/4/5 fields) which have $$9 with the value "Y" are deleted.

(Note: $$9Y is used to denote that the holdings statement field should be regenerated each time the procedure isused. When a holdings statement field (863/4/5) is generated, it always includes $$9Y. If the library has holdingsstatement fields that it wants to retain when running the procedure, the fields should contain $$9N.

1.

Sets of "considered" item records (as defined in section 4 above) are compressed to create ranges by enumerationand chronology.

For example:

86340 L $$82.1$$a1$$b1-6$$i2000$$j01-06$$t00001$$9Y

2.

6.



86340 L $$82.2$$a2$$i2001$$t00001$$9Y

Each range is written in a separate 863/4/5 field, with the correct break indicator in $$w, if needed. Subfield $$wwith the value "g" indicates a gap break (i.e., there are issues that did not arrive). Subfield $$w with the value "n"indicates a non-gap break (i.e., there are issues that were not published).

For example:

C6340 L $$82.3$$a3$$b2-5$$i2002$$j03-09$$wg$$t1

In the above example, subfield $$w contains the value "g" to indicate that there is a gap break. Issues no. 1 and no.6 of Volume no. 3 did not arrive.

Break indicator ($$w) is generated for items that are not included in the summary holdings statement. These areItems with the process status of: NA or NP, or items that were mapped to be considered as if they have processingstatus NA or NP, using the tab_hld_stmt table of the administrative library (XXX50).

Since different institutions might use different codes to describe the process-status Not Arrived or Not Published,tab_hld_stmt is used to map those different codes into "NA" or "NP".

By using this table, we can also map items that have a particular sublibrary and/or collection, and/or item status,and/or item process status, and/or break indicator to be considered as NA or NP. Those items will be excludedfrom the holdings statement.

For example, a library that might want to exclude missing items from the holdings statement should map theprocess status MI (missing) as NA in tab_hld_stmt, as follows:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!!!-!!!!!-!!-!!-!-!! ##### ##### ## MI # NA

3.

expand_doc_hld_stmt must be listed in col.2 of tab_expand; for example:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_hld_stmt WEB-FULL expand_doc_hld_stmt

The routine will create 863/4/5 tags in UTIL F/4/doc and in WEB FULL display.

Note: It is possible to define alternative field tags instead of 863/4/5 fields in order to differentiate between863/4/5 fields already present in the record, and field tags generated by the routine.

For example, if tab_expand is defined as follows:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_hld_stmt CMPRS_TAG=C63

The holdings statement field tag will be C63:

C6340 L $$81.1$$a1$$i2000$$t2$$9Y C6340 L $$81.2$$a2$$b1-5$$i2001$$j01-09$$wg$$t2$$9Y C6340 L $$81.3$$a3$$b2-4$$i2002$$j03-07$$wg$$t2$$9Y

This feature can be used if and when you are checking the generated data and want to separate it from data that hasactually been written in the record.

4.

Expand RoutinesFrom this version on, you can define several expand routines by using the following tables: tab_expand, tab_merge,tab_merge_overlay. The expand routines are:

expand_doc_adm_bib❍

expand_doc_adm_hol❍

17.



expand_doc_bib_hol❍

expand_doc_hol_bib❍

tab_expand in the tab directory of the library can be configured through the parameters column (Col. 3) to specify the routinename to be applied.

Column 3 syntax is as follows: MERGE-TYPE=<routine name listed in the first column in the tab_merge table of thelibrary>.

The following is an extract from the tab_expand table:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> WEB-FULL expand_doc_hol_bib MERGE-TYPE=WEB-FULL

tab_merge of the tab directory of the library contains:

Column 1 of tab_merge that should match column 3 of tab_expand

Column 2 of tab_merge which identifies the merge program to be used.

Column 3 displays the merge section to be used from the tab_merge_overlay table.

The following is an extract from tab_merge table:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> WEB-FULL merge_doc_overlay 99

tab_merge_overlay of the tab directory of the library is used to define how the record is displayed.

The table contains the merge set used in tab_merge column 3.

The following is an extract from tab_merge_overlay table:

!1 2 3 4 !!-!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 99 1 Y ##### 99 2 Y 245## 99 2 Y 1####

The above example uses expand_doc_hol_bib, which presents the bibliographic record in the expanded holdings record. Thefields from the bibliographic record that will be expanded are 245## and all fields beginning with 1, such as 100## and 130##

It is now also possible to expand the record that is merged into the expanded record. For example: in expand_doc_lib1_lib2you can expand the lib2 record and merge it into the lib1 record. You do this by using a special section in the format"LIB1-LIB2" in the tab_expand table of LIB2

Here is an example:

In the case of expand_doc_hol_bib, if the section "HOL-BIB" is defined in the tab_expand table of the BIB library, the BIBrecord is first expanded by using this section, and only then are its fields added to the expanded HOL record or merged into it(according to the content of Column 3 of the tab_expand table in the HOL library).

If "MERGE-TYPE=" is used in Column 3 of tab_expand for expand_doc_adm_hol or expand_doc_bib_hol, it is possible thatmore than one HOL record is merged into the ADM or BIB record. For example, in expand_doc_bib_hol, if more than oneHOL record is linked to the BIB record, the first HOL record will be merged into the BIB record; then, the second HOL recordwill be merged into the already merged BIB record, and so on.



expand_doc_nsls_ccsA new expand program, expand_doc_nsls_ccs, performs the following action for each 852 line of an NSLS record:

It places the value "CCS" in an 852 field's $$:a if the 852 field;s $$:b has one of the following values: ALQ, DBK, WBK,ALK, CPQ, CLKK, DPK, DUK, EAK, MUK, GCK, HUK, LFK, LVK, LNK, MJK, NIK, NBK, PRK, PHK, RLK, WLK,WNK or ZIK. This is needed for the Circulation Status link in NSLS.

The following line must be present in tab_expand:

WEB-FULL expand_doc_nsls_ccs

18.

expand_doc_bib_hol and expand_doc_hol_bibThe expand_doc_bib_hol and expand_doc_hol_bib parameters in Column 3 of tab_expand can now contain up to 10comma-separated fields (five characters each, including hashes, for example, 85###). If Column 3 is blank, then all fields fromthe HOL record are added to the ADM record.

To exclude a specific field, precede the list of fields with a dash - (for example, -85### -86###).

19.

expand_doc_uni_mergeexpand_doc_uni_merge adds "-<N>" as a second indicator for each tag to determine the number of its occurrences. Thisnumber is not added to LDR, FMT - it is only added to a numeric field.

20.

expand_doc_joinColumn 4 in expand_doc_join (the new subfield code column) has been enhanced. Previously, it worked according tothree methods:

Take one or more subfields from the text and substitute them with the corresponding number of new subfields. Forexample:

Take abc and change to xyz

1.

Take all of the text (or several subfields) and change them to one new subfield. For example:

Take abcd and change to x

2.

Take all but a few subfields (- sign) and change them to one subfield.

Take -cd and change to x

3.

Now there are two additional methods for building virtual subfields:

Take a few subfields (or all the text) and change them to fewer new subfields. It changes all of them to the firstone. For example:

Take abcd and change to xy. It takes the abcd and changes it to x.

1.

Take all but a few defined subfields and change them to a few new subfields, changing the text to the first newsubfield. For example:

Take -abcd and change to xy. It takes all text except for abcd and changes it to x.

2.

Here is an example of a possible configuration in tab_expand_join which adds virtual fields to a bibliographic record,through the expand_doc_join procedure.

MAY00 260## abc xyz 245## abcd t

1.

21.



MOD00 260## abc s 245## abcd t DEZ00 260## -a d 245## abcd t GOS00 260## abc gd 245## abcd t ROD00 260## -b os 245## abcd t

Entering the TYPE=ALL parameter in Column 3 of the $data_tab/tab_expand table creates a virtual field out of two ormore MARC fields.

Here is an example of the _tab/tab_expand table with the definition for this functionality:

! 1 2 3 !!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!> U39-DOC expand_doc_join TYPE=ALL

This functionality also uses the used tab_expand_join table of the library's tab directory. The tab_expand_join tabledetermines which fields and which of its subfields should be joined, their order and what the resulting field should becalled. The difference is that this program builds a new virtual field for every combination of the field specified in thetable. For example, if three fields are to be joined and the first occurs three times, the second occurs three times and thethird occurs two times in the record, then 18 new virtual fields are built by this program.

2.

Job Failure Detection MechanismA job failure detection mechanism has been added to indexing that is run with parallel processes.

When a failure is detected, the entry in the cycles table is changed to "!", and all unhandled ("-") entries become "*". The job issuspended, and the relevant structured error message is written into a file named <cycles_table_name>.err (for example,p_manage_05.err) in the data scratch directory.

22.

SubdivisionsIn previous versions, when the system did not find a match between a subject heading in the bibliographic library and a headingin the authority library, the subdivisions (subfields $v, $x, $y and $z) from the bibliographic heading were automaticallystripped. The system continued searching for a match without them in order to find the more general term.

From this version on, this is not carried out automatically by the system but is setup-dependent. This was done to avoid thedisplay of these "general" headings in all logical bases. In previous versions, when the system found a match resulting from thestripping of the subdivisions, the matched heading (preferred and non-preferred forms) was added to the bibliographic headingslist and displayed in all logical bases, disregarding the bibliographic record that caused the inclusion of the heading. From thisversion, according to the setup, the system enriches the bibliographic headings list with the general heading but also evaluateswhether or not the heading should be included in the logical base. Following is the setup:

The 6XX field must be sent to the XYZ index in the tab11_acc table as follows:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 !!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-! 6#### XYZ -vxyz6 6#### XYZ -vxz6 6#### XYZ -xyz6 6#### XYZ -yz6 6#### XYZ -z6

1.

The XYZ index code must be added to the tab00.lng table as follows:

! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 !-!!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!-!!-!-!---!!-!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! H XYZ ACC 11 00 00 Subjects -vxyz

2.

The XYZ index code must be be added to the tab_aut table as follows:

! 1 2 3 4 5 6 !!!!!-!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!! XYZ 2 USM10

3.

The XYZ index must be defined in the tab20 table feeding back to the SUB index as in the following sample lines:4.

23.



! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 !-!!!!!-!!!!!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!!!!! 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w !!! * -wi5 0 SEEF 1 XYZ SUB 150## 0 2 450## w - -wi5 0 SEEF 1 XYZ SUB 151## 0 2 451## w !!!n -wi5 0 SEEF .../...

The XYZ index is intended for internal purposes. The bibliographic records are actually indexed there. Through this, thefollowing is accomplished:

The system finds the "general" authority headings from the XYZ index, and through the tab20 table this heading is addedto the subjects index list (SUB).

❍

The logical bases are sensitive to the "general" heading by the following mechanism:If the bibliographic heading has an authority link, but does not have attached records, the system searches for the sameheading on the XYZ headings index. If the XYZ heading would be included in the logical base headings, then theheading is displayed in the base.

❍

Z00RA new expand routine, Z00R, has been implemented. This routine enables the staff user to add expanded information to theZ00R records. The Z00R table contains separate Z00R records for each of the fields of the database documents.

24.

FORCE-USE-Z07A new tab100 variable, FORCE-USE-Z07, determines whether or not a Z07 record is triggered for a record when the linkedrecords from other libraries are updated. For example, if the variable is set to Y in the administrative library, a Z07 will betriggered for the administrative record when the linked bibliographic and/or holdings records are modified. This new featuredoes not affect the previously (and continuing) automatic creation of a Z07 record in the BIB library when a linked Z30 recordis updated.

25.

expand_doc_hol_z30_86xThe expand_doc_hol_z30_86x expand routine has been removed. Its functionality is replaced by the expand_doc_hld_stmtexpand routine.

26.

Filing RoutinesA new filing routine has been implemented: norm_author. This routine normalizes name entries and can be used forbuilding entries for a merge index. It retains the first word and the first character of the second word, removingpunctuation.

For example: $$aSmith, John, $$d1923- -> $$aSmith J

1.

Abbreviation: This routine works only with characters in the 7-bit ASCII range.2.

A new filing routine has been implemented: none. This routine builds the call number key as the call number itself.3.

A new filing routine has been implemented: end_sub_punctuation. This routine deletes characters listed in column 4 ofthe tab_filing table from each subfield comprising the heading. This routine is mainly used for generating text display.

4.

27.


http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582Q...6E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00089/file/n-indexing-16 (10 of 12) [3/31/2004 5:17:08 PM]

A new filing routine has been implemented: cut_prefix. This routine removes any string at the start of a line that iscontained in parentheses. For example:

(OcoLC)12345 -> 12345

5.

to_blank: this routine has been changed to work with Unicode values. It is now possible to enter a Unicode value withthe prefix U+ as a character to be replaced by a blank. For example:

61 N to_blank !"()-{}<>;:.?,/\@*%=^_`~U+3000U+3001

6.

A new section, 55, has been added to tab_filing to support Icelandic style name sorting:

55 icelandic_z303_name 55 char_conv BORROWER-NAME-KEY 55 to_lower 55 pack_spaces

7.

The expand_num program has been enhanced. From this version, the maximum number of digits of a number (fornumeric filing) can be specified as a one or two-digit number by using the parameters column in tab_filing (col. 4).

Note: If column 4 is left blank, then a default of 7 digits is used.

Following is a sample of the tab_filing table:

!1 2 3 4 !!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 11 F expand_num 13

8.

The suppress filing program has been enhanced. Until now, the program used to drop all text contained within the <<and >> characters, including the characters themselves. Now you can add comma-delimited parameters to the suppressroutine in tab_filing. If no parameters are provided, the suppress routine acts as before. Here is an example fromtab_filing:

!1 2 3 4 !!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 94 suppress 88-89,<<>>

If the parameter 88-89 is specified, the control characters U+0088 and U+0089 will be used instead of << and >>. Theparameter <<>> acts the same way as the default.

If both parameters are specified, the input text will undergo suppression twice: once with << and >> as delimiters, andagain - with U+0088 and U+0089 as delimiters (or vice versa).

The following parameter combinations are allowed:

<<>> The same as the default1.

88-89 Suppression only with U+0088 and U+0089 as delimiters.2.

88-89,<<>> (2) and then (1)3.

<<>>,88-89 (1) and then (2)4.

9.

expand_doc_bib_z30Expand_doc_bib_z30 has been enhanced in order to replace expand_doc_bib_loc_mab. The following parameters havebeen added:

CONF - Defines a special configuration table which can be used instead of the default "expand_doc_bib_z30"routine. Now the expand program can run with different configuration tables for different functions. For example:

U39-DOC expand_doc_bib_z30 CONF=exl_test_z30

If CONF is not set, the default expand_doc_bib_z30 routine will be used.

■

TAB15 - Y/N; Defines whether or not Column 10 of tab15.lng is consulted. For example:

WEB-FULL expand_doc_bib_z30 TAB15=Y

■

10.



If TAB15 does not appear in Col. 3 of tab_expand, an item which has an N setting in the corresponding line inCol. 10 of tab15.lng (USM50) is not displayed.

TAB15=N: All items will be displayed regardless of their value in Col. 10 of tab15.

TAB15=Y: If an item has an N value in Col.10 of tab15.lng (USM50), than the item is not displayed.

TAG - expand doc_bib_z30 creates a new virtual field - Z30-1 (for copy items) or Z30-2 (for issue items) - thatcontains the item's information. The TAG parameter lets you create new virtual fields for other functions. Forexample:

U39-DOC expand_doc_bib_z30 TAG=LOC

If this parameter is not set, Z30-1 and Z30-2 will be used.

■

If none of the above parameters is set, expand_doc_bib_z30 works as before.



ITEMS

Version 16

Item Barcode Checksum Routines●

Item Form●

Item Tree●

Items Filter●

pc_tab_col.lng●

Select an ADM Library●

Sorting Routines●

Services

Rebuild Call Number Index (item-06)●

Smart Barcode export (export-03)●

Inventory List (item-07)●

Item Barcode Checksum RoutinesNew item barcode create routines have been added:

Item barcode - works in conjunction with the last-barcode-number counter in UTIL/G/2❍

Item barcode - by Z30-REC-KEY (ADM+Seq. - checksum_create_z30_by_doc_no)❍

Item barcode - site-specific ICL (works in conjunction with barcode-sequence counter inUTIL/G/2 - checksum_create_z30_icl)

❍

1.

pc_tab_col.lngA new entry has been added: PC_ALL_ITEM_HISTORY, to enable the viewing of all the historyof an item. This entry has been added to support the addition of a new column (col. 6) to the ItemHistory list which contains the item's barcode.

2.

Sorting RoutinesA new sorting routine, sort 04, for issues in tab_z30_sort has been implemented:

This routine sorts the issues by sublibrary, then by enumeration and chronology. If thechronology or enumeration data is missing, then the routine sorts the issues by sublibrary,description and sequence number.

1.

A new sorting routine, sort 06, for issues and non-issue items has been implemented:

For issues: This routine sorts the issues by sublibrary when the preferred sublibrary is

2.

3.

Release Notes - Items - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...Y9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00090/file/n-items-16 (1 of 4) [3/31/2004 5:17:20 PM]

according to its IP. tab_attr_sub_library type 7 defines which sublibrary will be first in thelist.

In addition the sort is built according to: sublibrary name, collection code, chronological-i,chronological-j, chronological-k, description and copy-id.

For non-issues: This routine sorts the non-issues items by sublibrary when the preferredsublibrary is according to its IP. tab_attr_sub_library type 7 defines which sublibrary will befirst in the list. In addition the sort is built according to sublibrary name + collection code +item description + copy number.

A new sorting routine, sort 08, for issues has been implemented:

This routine sorts the issues by 85x, like routine 07, with the addition of Z30-COPY-ID. Thesort parameters are: 85x-type, sublibrary, collection, linking-number, copy-id.

If 85x-type is 4 or 5 the sort parameter is supp-index-o.

If one of the chronological fields is not blank and one of the enumeration fields is not blankthen the sort parameters are chronological and enumeration.

If all the chronological fields are blank the sort parameter is description.

3.

Rebuild Call Number Index (item-06)This service has been changed and no parameters are required anymore. It runs on the entiredatabase and an item record is only updated if one of the call numbers has been changed (due to achange in the filing).

4.

Smart Barcode Export (export-03)A new service, Smart Barcode Export (export-03), has been added. This service prepares a fileintended for transfer to an external program for printing barcode labels. The data included in thefile is set in a configuration table, and can be output in XML or fixed table format.

5.

Inventory List (item-07)A new service, Inventory List (item-07), has been added. This service creates an inventory list todocument all items which have arrived within a defined period, usually one year. Order, invoice,and inventory information is brought together in one place. Thus, the inventory list serves as proofof holdings of a title. An inventory list consists, at the minimum, of the order slip, which issupplemented by the inventory number, the invoice number and the inventory date. The list is thenbound together sorted in ascending order by inventory number.

In the Inventory List the bibliographic data and the item information are now displayed in separatecolumns. The format of the bibliographic data is defined via the tables:

6.



bib_format in the tab directory of the administrative library in edit_paragraph.lng andedit_field.lng in the tab directory of the bibliographic library.

Select an ADM LibraryA new option, Select ADM Library, has been added to the ALEPH menu in the Catalogingmodule.

This option enables you to select an ADM Library of the connected bibliographic library.

Selecting this options allows you to use the item utilities which are located under the Items menu:

1. Print Label2. Process status Change.

The default library is determined in the [ADMLibrary] section of the Cat.ini file of the Catalogingmodule.

For example:

BIB Library=ADM Library

Selecting a different ADM library updates the INI file.❍

If there is no ini definition, the first ADM library listed in the $alephe_tab/library_relationtable is selected.

❍

If the INI file contains a wrong ADM library (not related to the BIB), then the first ADMlibrary listed in $alephe_tab/library_relation table are selected and the INI file is updatedaccordingly.

❍

7.

Item TreeA new node, All Items History, was added to the Item Tree in the Cataloging and Circulationmodules.

This node shows all the history of the ADM record, in contrast to the History node under a specificitem which shows only the item's history.

8.

Item FormThe Publication schedule sequence field has been removed from the Serial Information tab on theItem Form. The field is not relevant anymore.

9.

Items FilterA new filter for items in the Cataloging Overview tree, record manager and Full + link in the

10.



Search tab is based on the Items control/Expand item information (ITEM-SHOW) permission. Thefilter can be denied for a particular sublibrary.



PRINTING

Version 16

Cash Transaction Type and Credit/Debit Fields●

cash-site-payment.xsl●

LOAN-STA XML Translation Mode●

patron-delete-approved.xsl and and patron-delete-rejected.xsl●

photo-request-slip.xsl●

Print Forms●

Translation Files - Extension Changed●

Print FormsPrint forms are now defined in the library's ./tab/form_<lng> directory.

The print forms are packaged using UTIL I/6, creating a file called html.pck.

The client checks whether the print forms on the client are older than the html.pck file, and if so,copies the html.pck files.

The client does not automatically copy all form_<lng>html.pck files. It copies only theform_<lng>s that are listed in the ./alephe/tab/html_template_lng file.

1.

Translation Files - Extension ChangedTranslation files for printouts (under usm01/form_lng) now have a different extension. Theextension was changed from .xml to .trn. This was done in order to differentiate translation filesfrom other XML files.

There is no change in functionality.

2.

LOAN STA XML Translation ModeThe Loan STA XML translation mode has been added to global.trn:

z36-status LOAN-STA S z36-rec-key

The field "z36-status" in the printout XML files is translated according to the/alephe/error_eng/loan_status_heading table and the due date of the z36 record. This ensures thatthe status will be more accurate by concatenating the relevant values.

3.

photo-request-slip.xslThe slip number has been added to photo-request-slip.xsl. Now the photocopy request slip willinclude the slip number, just as the hold request slip does. For this purpose a translation ofz38-number has been added to global.trn.

4.

patron-delete-approved.xsl and patron-delete-rejected.xslA column, "Has Loans ?", was added to both of the reports (Patrons Deleted and Patrons not

5.

Release Notes - Printing - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...Y9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00091/file/n-print-16 (1 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:17:22 PM]

Deleted) that are created by the service Delete Patron Records (cir-23). This way an indication isgiven in the report if patron deletion failed because of existing loans.

cash-site-payment.xslThe net sum and the VAT sum have been added to the report for both the credit column and thedebit column. The summary and balance rows also show the summary and balance of the net sumand the VAT sum.

6.

Cash Transaction Type and Credit/Debit FieldsThe cash transaction type (z31-type) and credit/debit (z31-credit-debit) fields have been translatedin the global.trn file, so that reports that include this data will show readable strings instead ofvalue codes.

7.

Release Notes - Printing - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...Y9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00091/file/n-print-16 (2 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:17:22 PM]

SEARCH

Version 16

Brief Records / My Records●

Expand Button in AUT Library●

External Links in Full View●

Full + Link Display●

Full Screen Mode●

Include Expanded AUT Data●

Language Filter in Find Function●

Logical Bases in Browse List●

Multi-base CCL Search●

Ordinal Number of Displayed Records●

Saving Fields Used for Last Search by Base●

Saving Last Sort of Fields by Base●

Saving Last Tab Selection in Find Node●

Search Find Pane●

Search GUI●

Separate Display of Linked Records●

Sort According to Specific Heading Codes●

Unicode Mode●

Word Search for CJK●

Search GUIThe Search GUI has been discontinued in Version 16. Search functionality is now available in all GUIs (via the Searchicon on the Main Tab at the top of the Navigation Pane). This has eliminated the need for the Mini search function.

1.

Brief Records / My RecordsThe list of hits in the Brief Records display now supports multiple selection. Saving, sending and printing is now possiblein the same way as from the Brief List. Entries from the My Records list can now be cleared from the list.

2.

Unicode ModeIn Search query fields, you can activate a special mode which enables you to enter text by its Unicode values. The F11shortcut key allows you to toggle between regular and Unicode entry mode. This parallels the way it functions in theCatalog Editor window. The message Unicode Mode is displayed in the operations bar.

3.

Separate Display of Linked RecordsSometimes a BIB record has numerous bibliographic links to other BIB records. The Full view in the lower pane in Searchcan now display a single line, pointing to a set of records, instead of numerous linked lines. The set will be shown in theBrief list table.

You can determine, after how many link lines the single line, pointing to a set, is displayed.

To do so, define the number in column 16 of edit_doc_999.lng for the bibliographic links. If the column stays empty, thedefault is 99 links.

In Column 15, you can determine a Brief list format for every bibliographic link. If a format is not defined in the table, theprogram displays the default format type.

4.

Release Notes - Search - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00092/file/n-sear-16 (1 of 4) [3/31/2004 5:17:32 PM]

Here is an example:

! 1 1 1 !1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 2 13 4 15 16 !!-!!!!!-!-!!!!!!!!!!-!-!-!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!-!-!-!!!-!-!!!!!-!-!!-!! ## UP D LUplink Y Q E 00 02 ## PAR D LParall Y Q E 00 02 ## DN D LDown Y Q E 00 02

Multi-base CCL SearchIn the Multi-base CCL Search tab from the Find node, the Library checklist check status is saved and stored. It is loadedthe next time you open the Search function after closing the GUI module.

5.

Saving Fields Used for Last Search by BaseWhen searching in the Find node, each search saves the searched fields by Search base.

6.

Saving Last Sort of Fields by BaseWhen displaying records in the Show tab, the last sort of fields by Search base is saved.

7.

Search Find PaneAdvanced Search:To chose a base, use the combo box. In this pane, you can make logical search using three fields. Each field is in alogical AND/OR/NOT relation with it's neighboring field, depending on the selection in the radio buttons. Thesearch fields are according to the base chosen. The Clear button clears the edit fields.

❍

Multi-base CCL Search:To choose a base use the combo box. The fields change according to your choice . You can specify for all bases inthe library which fields will appear in the Fixed Query. If no such lines for a base, the "Anywhere in the record"field appears. All fields are in a logical "AND" relation with each other. The Clear button sets the base to the firstselection, and sets the fields according to the base.

❍

Multi-field Search:The Multi-field Search enables you to search for records, using pre-set indexes. If you fill in more than one field, aBoolean and operation is performed. The more fields you fill in, the more precise the query results will be. TheClear button clears the edit fields.

❍

All three of the above search query types can appear as tabs in the Find node. You can customize which of the threeappear in your GUI.

8.

Full Screen ModeThe Full Screen option enables you to enlarge a window containing a selected record. This option is activated when theShow option is selected, either by clicking the Show button or clicking the Show node in the navigation pane.

To view a record in Full Screen mode, you select the Full Screen option from the View menu or click the Full Screenicon on the upper right of the screen. When you select this option, the lower pane is not displayed and the record takes upthe upper and lower pane. If you select this option once more, the navigation pane is not shown and the record takes up thewhole screen.

To turn off the Full Screen mode, you select again the Full Screen option from the View menu or click the FullScreen icon on the upper right of the screen.

9.



Logical Bases in Browse ListUntil now, a search retrieved all the headings and did not filter the list by a logical base.

From now on, the headings list displays only the headings that are relevant for the logical base that the Browse is set to.You can see the references and untraced headings that are connected to records in the logical base.

All headings in a heading list that belongs to an active library will also be displayed under a base code, which belongs tothe active library.

To facilitate this, a line for the active library must be present in ./alephe/tab/tab_base.<lng>. This line should not haveanything registered in column 9.

10.

Saving Last Tab Selection in Find NodeWhen searching records in the Find node, the last tab that was used before closing the module is saved in alephcom.ini insection [SearchFind] under SelTab. Tab names are written in [SearchFind] under FindTypes.

For example:

[SearchFind] FindTypes=S,C,F SelTab=C

In this example the Multi-base CCL Search tab was used last and will be selected by default the next time the Find node ischosen.

11.

Expand Button in AUT LibraryThe Expand button in the Browse node is no longer active if the base is or belongs to an AUT library. As the Expandbutton is used to display a linked AUT record from a BIB heading, the function does not make sense in an AUT library.

12.

Ordinal Number of Displayed RecordsThe ordinal number of displayed records has been added to the Full display in the Show node. You can see the ordinalnumber of a displayed record and the total number of records in the selected set above the buttons on the right side of thewindow.

13.

Word Search for CJKThere are now two ways in which the system searches in Chinese:

If the adjacent option is selected, the system looks for the exact string.

Example: A user enters a string of characters, ABCD. The system looks for the exact string, ABCD.

1.

If the adjacent option is not selected, the system breaks a given string into characters with the Boolean ANDbetween them.

Example: A user enters a string of characters ABCD. The system breaks it into A B C D with the Boolean ANDbetween the characters.

2.

14.

Language Filter in Find FunctionThe pre-set filter for language has been removed from the Find function in the Search GUI interface, as the samefunctionality can be achieved by including language codes in the Find query, or by using a language code to refine asearch.

15.

Sort According to Specific Heading CodesYou can now display a list of records sorted by a specific heading code in the Show node The following line must bepresent in pc_server_defaults:

16.



setenv pc_sort_field_<heading code> "DISPLAY"

Example: The line setenv pc_sort_field_lcc "DISPLAY" appears in pc_server_defaults. A user browses by LCclassification number and gets a list sorted by ascending LC classification numbers. When he moves selected records tothe Show node, the sorting stays the same (that is a sort by ascending LC classification numbers).

Include Expanded AUT DataFrom now on, the 3XX block of UNIMARC Authorities can be expanded into the list of headings, specifically the 300,305, 310, 320 and 330 fields. This can be done by selecting the Include Expanded AUT Data check box.

17.

External Links in Full ViewIt is now possible to use spaces in a file path in an external link in the Full view of the Search function. In previousversions, quotation marks (" ") were needed to build the link if the path included spaces.

Here is an example where there are a number of spaces in the file path:

856 L $$dC:\Documents and Settings\nancyp\My Documents\16 DEV$$f6767.doc$$zDOC -spaces$$9doc

18.

Full + Link DisplayYou can display all documents linked to a certain heading from the Full + link tab by clicking Show Like, if the Find linkoption is activated for the highlighted tag. If more than 5000 records are linked to the heading, the system processes thefirst 5000 and displays up to 1000 linked documents. If less than 1000 linked documents are displayed, a message appears.Note that the base filter is activated after the 5000 linked records are processed.

19.



SERIALS

Version 16

Issue Check In - Group Node●

Open Items from the Schedule Form●

Prediction Patterns●

Routing List Window●

Routing List Members●

Publication Pattern Fields●

Arrival Form●

Items List●

Templates●

Printouts●

Services

Delete Publication Schedules (serial-20)●

Merge and Deduplicate Serial Pattern Files (serial-53)●

Open Expected Issues (serial-11)●

Open Publication Schedule (serial-10)●

Print Claim Letters (serial-44)●

Test Pattern Opening (serial-12)●

Import 85x Records (serial-52)●

Routing List WindowA new option that changes the sort order of the routing groups has been added to the Routing Listwindow. In order to move the highlighted routing group up a level in the list (giving it a higherpriority), click Up. To move the routing group down a level, click Down.

1.

Routing List MembersThe number of members per routing list is limited to 98. When trying to register the 99th memberof a routing list, a message pops up, saying that up to 98 members can be defined.

2.

Publication Pattern FieldsSubfield $o is also used in the 853X field and specifies the item's material type.

For example, use ISSBD for an item that is already bound.

If subfield $o is not defined, the default value of the item's material type will be "ISSUE".

❍

Subfield $t❍

3.

Release Notes - Serials - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...4UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00093/file/n-ser-16 (1 of 4) [3/31/2004 5:17:46 PM]

From this version, subfield $t is supported and used only in the 853/4/5 fields as a captionfor the copy ID.

Subfield $yFrom this version, multiple occurrences of $y (Regularity pattern) in 853/4/5 are allowed. Ifyou wish to add additional occurrences of $y, use the HOL or ADM record in the catalogingmodule.

❍

Prediction PatternsALEPH supports two types of publication prediction pattern records, which are called Scheduleand Pattern. A single BIB record can have related prediction data in either Schedule or Patternformat. Pattern format can be defined in either the ADM record, or one or more HOL records, butnot both.

The Pattern records use the MARC21 Caption and Pattern fields (853/4/5), and a proprietaryEnumeration and Chronology field (853X/4X/5X), which is based on the MARC21 Enumerationand Chronology fields. Note that in version 16, the variable MULTI-85X in tab100 has beenremoved. This is because the system, which uses the prediction fields 853/4/5 and 853X/4X/5X inthe HOL or ADM record, no longer creates Publication Schedule (Z17) records.

Chronology Code Definition: From this version on, the lowercase "d" represents both a date anda specific day of the week.

4.

Arrival FormTwo new fields were added to the Arrival Form: Issue Date and Exp. Arrival Date.

Issue DateThis is the date on which this issue was or is expected to be published. It is automaticallycalculated by the system when issues are opened in the Serials function or by a batch process.When an issue item (Material Type beginning with ISS) is created and if the issue date is zero, theissue date is automatically set to the current date. If, however, the item process status is "NO" (notordered), the issue date is left as zero.

Note that when duplicating an item for an unpredicted title it should be linked to a subscription andthe expected issue date should be placed manually.

Exp. Arrival DateThis is the expected date of arrival of the issue, taking into account the delay between the issuedate and the date of receipt.

When duplicating an item for an unpredicted title, it should be linked to a subscription, in orderthat the Exp. Arrival Date will be calculated. Any value entered in this field is overridden by theIssue-Date + the value appearing in the First Claim field of the Subscription Info (2) tab.

5.



Open Items from the Schedule FormFrom this version on, when the Open Items option is used, the system creates not only the firstitem, but all the items for the selected cycle.

6.

TemplatesThe templates: top_level_enum_lacking.mrc and all_levels_enum_lacking.mrc were updated inthe ADM and HOL libraries.

7.

Open Publication Schedule (serial-10)The Open Publication Schedule (serial-10) service has been removed. The service was removedbecause of the removal of the Publication Schedule record (the Z17 Oracle table).

8.

Open Expected Issues (serial-11)The Open Expected Issues (serial-11) service has been removed. The functionality of this serviceis now performed by the Open Expected Issues (serial-13) service (serial-13 was formerly theOpen Expected Issues and Publication Schedule service).

9.

Delete Publication Schedules (serial-20)The Delete Publication Schedules (serial-20) service has been removed. The service was removedbecause of the removal of the Publication Schedule record (the Z17 Oracle table).

10.

Test Pattern Opening (serial-12)A new service, Test Pattern Opening (serial-12), has been implemented. This service checks serialpatterns, and tries to open the next cycle based on the level-x field for records listed in the inputfile.

The level-x file contains enumeration and chronology information for the next volume/cycle thatwill be opened.

The service handles two types of input files: files containing doc numbers or files in ALEPHSequential format. It produces two output files:

Rejected file - contains erroneous patterns.❍

Report file - contains a short description of the pattern of the expected issues.❍

11.

Import 85x Records (serial-52)From this version, prediction fields pairs (853/853X, 854/854X 855/855X), exported from ADMrecords can be loaded to HOL records. You can set whether patterns will be loaded to the ADM orHOL records by choosing the relevant Load Type. If HOL has been selected, the patterns areloaded to each HOL record to which a subscription is linked. If ADM has been selected, thepattern is loaded to ADM without checking for a subscription.

12.



Merge and Deduplicate Serial Pattern Files (serial-53)A new service, Merge and Deduplicate Serial Pattern Files (serial-53), has been implemented.

This service merges serial pattern files (up to 10 files) and deduplicates identical records.

13.

Items List

In the "Loans" column, in addition to the number of loans, it is now possible to add anasterisk to indicate that the item is currently out on loan.

1.

From this version on the Items List pane has the same columns as the Check-In pane. Notethat the columns in both panes are controlled by different identifiers in the pc_tab_col table.

2.

14.

PrintoutsFrom this version on the following printouts can include address information from the linkedpatron record:

item-issue-label❍

copy-info❍

15.

Issue Check In - Group NodeA new tab, Vendor/Sublibrary, has been added to the Group List (Serials Tab / Group node /Upper Pane). This tab displays one line for all items that share the same enumeration, chronology,vendor and sublibrary.

16.

Print Claim Letters (serial-44)A new option , ZZ (space as a value), has been added to the list in the Item Process Status section.Choose the ZZ (space as a value) option to include items that do not have a process status value.

17.



BATCH SERVICES

Version 16

Items Services●

pc_b_lng Directory●

Online Check Box●

Services Help Files●

Items ServicesSince the Items module is now a function within other modules, the Items services are accessedthrough the various modules' Services menu. The menu-items.xml file was therefore removed.

1.

pc_b_lng DirectoryThe following menu files have been removed from the ./alephe/pc_b_lng directory:menu-admin.xml, menu-jobmgr.xml, menu-search.xml and menu-serials.xml. This files were notin use in this version.

2.

Services Help FilesThe help files for the services have been moved from ./alephe/pc_b_eng/*.html to./aleph/pc_b_eng/*.html. This ensures that with each new ALEPH version, the help for theservices will be up to date.

Note that for custom services, it is still possible to place help files under ./alephe/pc_b_eng/. Thesystem will first search in ./aleph/pc_b_eng and if the help file does not exist it will then search in./alephe/pc_b_eng.

3.

Online Check BoxSome services include an Online check box. Check this box in order to the run the jobimmediately, thereby circumventing the batch queue.

4.

Release Notes - Batch Services - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR8A4UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00094/file/n-batch-16 [3/31/2004 5:18:10 PM]

STAFF PRIVILEGES

Version 16

Staff Privileges Window●

User Library: Password Control●

Staff Privileges WindowA new checkbox has been added at the top of the window. By marking the checkbox the list can befiltered to display only users with the same User Library as the connected user.

When selecting the Budgets or Sublibraries/Order Unit buttons, the Choose Administrative Librarywindow is displayed. The administrative library displayed in this window is the administrativelibrary assigned to the connected user.

1.

User Library: Password ControlThe User Library field in the User Password Information form is a new level which has beenadded to Password Control. The User Library field can limit a user to create/update users within aspecific group of libraries. The group of libraries is based on an ADM library. The ADM groupsare set up in the PAS line in the ./alephe/library_relation configuration table. For example:

PAS USM50 USM01 USM10 USM60 USM20 USM30 PAS USM51 USM01 USM10

USM50 and USM51 are ADM libraries. The group of libraries related to ADM50 includesUSM01, USM10, USM60, USM20 and USM30; the group of libraries related to USM51 includesUSM01 and USM10.

The value in this field is selected from a drop-down list. The list contains the one ADM library thathas been assigned to the staff user who is authorized for creating/updating passwords andauthorizations for the library. Each system also has at least one 'super' staff user who is authorizedto create staff users who can create/update passwords.

The drop-down list for this super user includes all the ADM libraries. A staff user with 'ADMIN'in this field can be assigned privileges in all the libraries.

When the staff privileges function is opened, the system displays a list of users, giving usernameand the libraries for which the user has been assigned authorizations. The list can be set to displayall users or only users that belong to the same ADM group as the logged in user. This functionalityhas been added in order to facilitate autonomy and control for a single ADM library within aMulti-ADM environment.

In a Multi-ADM environment, when selecting the New/Modify/Duplicate user functionalities forcreating/updating staff user passwords and authorizations for the library, the user can be assignedas a proxy for a staff user who belongs to the same ADM library as the new/modified user.

2.

Release Notes - Staff Privilegies - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR8...9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00095/file/n-privileges (1 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:18:12 PM]

Selecting the Access Rights function displays a list of libraries to which the user can be assigned.The list of libraries displayed depends on the ADM library assigned in the User Library field.

Release Notes - Staff Privilegies - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR8...9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00095/file/n-privileges (2 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:18:12 PM]

TASK MANAGER

Version 16

Connect To●

File List●

jobmgr.ini●

Services●

Task Manager Functionality●

Task Manager FunctionalityThe Task Manager functionality is now invoked in GUI modules through the menu option ALEPH/ Task Manager. Task Manager does not exist as a separate GUI module.

1.

Connect ToYou can now choose the library on which the Task Manager is run, indepently of the library themodule is connected to. Select a library from the drop-down list in the Connect to field at thebottom of the Task manager window.

The list of libraries available is taken from the PAS relation line in the ./alephe/tab/library_relationaccording to the ADM library (for example USM50) of the active user in the GUI. If it is anADMIN user (that is, superuser), the list will include all ALEPH libraries.

2.

File ListSorting of both local and remote lists takes place simultaneously.

3.

jobmgr.iniThe jobmgr.ini entries have been moved to alephcom.ini.

4.

ServicesThe Task Manager services are now available in the Circulation and Acquisitions Servicesmenues under the Manage Database Tables submenu.

Count (manage-06)■

Organize (manage-08)■

Export Database Tables (file-03)■

Import Database Tables - Without Checks (file-04)■

Import Database Tables - With Character Conversion (file-04-cv)■

Import Database Tables - With Checks (file-06)■

Check for Duplicate Keys (file-09)■

1.

The service Sort Printouts by Patron Name (print-50) is now available in the Circulation2.

5.

Release Notes - Task Manager - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00096/file/n-task-16 (1 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:18:18 PM]

Services menu under the Notices to Patrons submenu.

Release Notes - Task Manager - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...UY9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00096/file/n-task-16 (2 of 2) [3/31/2004 5:18:18 PM]

UNION CATALOG

Version 16

Circulation Status●

Grouping of Library Information●

Match Algorithm for ISBN/ISSN and 010●

Send BIB Request●

X-Server●

Services

Purge Identical Records (union-07)●

Purge Identical Records (union-07)A new service, Purge Identical Records (union-07) has been implemented. The process finds duplicate SID fields andselects the most recent version of a record using the 005 field. Earlier versions of the same record are purged(removed completely from the database). If 005 fields are equal, the record with the newest system number isselected.

The service contains the following steps:

The service goes over the SID fields and writes the numbers of all records that are identical (that is have thesame SID). A line per group of identical records is created in the union_07_a file.

Here is a typical line in the file:

000004968000022398

This line contains two record numbers that have the same SID: 000004968 and 000022398

1.

For each line, the service finds the latest record created and this is the version that will be kept in the database.A new file, union_07_b, is created, containing a line for every group of identical records. The preferred recordnumber will be the first one in the line followed by a blank and a list of all the identical record numbers thatwill be deleted.

The preferred record will contain the latest date in the 005 field. If two records have the same 005 field, thelatest created record will become the preferred one.

2.

The service creates a report, union_07.report, displaying the records. system numbers, SID and 005 of everyrecord in a group. The preferred record is printed first and all of its identical record numbers will follow.

Here is a typical paragraph in union_07.report:

Preferred: 000022398 005 L20010604205500.0 SID L$$bCSLD$$cAAL19 Duplicate: 000004968 005 L20010604205500.0 SID L$$bCSLD$$cAAL19

3.

Finally, the duplicate records are completely deleted from the database.4.

We recommend that you run this service following the first load of records into the union catalog after after your sitehas gone into production.

1.

X Server2.

Release Notes - Union Catalog - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...Y9V66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00097/file/n-union-16 (1 of 4) [3/31/2004 5:18:21 PM]

There is a new method of retrieving circulation status information by using ALEPH's X server. To define this methodof retrieving data, use the following setup:

A configuration file, named according to the 852 $$a field of a bibliographic record, must be located under$alephe_gate. The file name must be written in lowercase letters with the suffix .conf.

For example, a bibliographic record containing the line

852 L $$aLAD

must have a corresponding file named lad.conf in $alephe_gate.

❍

The following fields must be defined in the configuration file:

Z58-BASE-REMOTE - the name of the bibliographic library used as the base library for retrieving theitems.

Example:

Z58-BASE-REMOTE USM01

■

Z58-HOST-NAME - IP and Web server port of the library from which the items are brought.

Example:

Z58-HOST-NAME 10.1.235.11:8991

■

Z58-CIRC-PROGRAM - the name of the program that is used for displaying the circulation status

Example:

Z58-CIRC-PROGRAM www_f_union_circ_www_x

■

Z58-ACCESS-METHOD - access method for item retrieval

Example:

Z58-ACCESS-METHOD X-SERVER

■

❍

The X server has a user/password mechanism in version 16 and higher. If the items are brought from anALEPH 16 version, a staff user with proper permissions should be created in the BIB library as follows:

user name: WWW-X-CIRCpassword : WWW-X-CIRCpermissions: at least X-SERVER Interface/MAIN - allowed and X-SERVER Interface/CIRC-STATUS-allowed

In earlier ALEPH versions, no such user is needed.

❍

The number of items displayed is controlled by the environment variable www_no_items_display inwww_server.conf.

If the local library is not accessible, the information will be taken from the embedded holdings (852 field/s) andthe message Information is unavailable will appear in the Circulation status column.

❍

This method can work with different ALEPH versions. Contact Ex Libris for more information.

Match Algorithm for ISBN/ISSN and 010The match algorithm comparing the ISBN/ISSN and 010 fields was updated. The serial comparison (by ISSN) nowworks as follows:

3.



$$a is compared to $$a$$a is compared to $$y$$a is compared to $$z$$y is compared to $$a$$y is compared to $$y$$y is compared to $$z$$z is compared to $$a$$z is compared to $$y$$z is compared to $$z Comparing any two subfields, regardless of the order gives the same score in the algorithm.

The Non-serials comparison (by ISBN) works now as follows:

$$a is compared to $$a$$a is compared to $$z$$z is compared to $$a$$z is compared to $$z

This comparison applies to 010 field too (for all record types). As a result, the following changes should be applied totab_cdl_mo_weights:

"010aa" was changed to "010aa match""010az" was changed to "010az match""010z#" was changed to "010zz match""010mismatch. was deleted"010aa mismatch" was added"010az mismatch" was added"020z#. was changed to "020zz"

Send BIB RequestA new button option, Send Bib Request, was added to the basket-short-head-no-save page of the union library. Toenable this option add the following lines to the union library's basket-short-head-no-save Web page:

<a href='javascript:open_window("&server_f?func=basket-bib-req-cdl");' title="Send Bib Request" class="bar"> Bib. Request</a> </td> <td class="bar" align="center" nowrap> | </td> <td class="bar" align="center" nowrap>

4.

Circulation StatusIn order for the Circ status link from the union catalog to work, the following line must be defined in the tab_expandtable of the union library:

WEB-FULL expand_doc_union_holding DIRECT=N,SORT=1,JUMP-TO=Y

Note that the Circ status link can be modified by editing the following line in the ./alephe/error_eng/www_f_headingfile:

9944 L Circ status

5.

Grouping of Library InformationLibrary information can be grouped together by using expand_doc_merge_union. This expand routine adds the '8'subfield to all the holdings fields: SID, 852, 856, 866.

expand_doc_merge_union takes fields from all equivalent records, and adds them to the preferred record. The fields

6.



taken are determined in the $data_tab/tab_merge_union table of the union library. Here is an ideal setup of the table:

90 1 Y ##### 90 1 N SID## 90 1 N 852## 90 1 N 856## 90 1 N 866## 90 2 Y SID## 90 2 Y 852## 90 2 Y 856## 90 2 Y 866##

At first, the program should take all fields in the preferred record without taking the SID, 852, 856 and 866 fields. Itshould only take the SID, 852, 856 and 866 fields afterwards.

Subfield 8 can contain up to three numbers separated by a period.❍

Subfield 8 of the SID field contains only one number. The second SID will receive a consecutive number.❍

Subfield 8 of field 852 contains two numbers. The first is the one that appears in subfield 8 of the related SIDfield and the second is a consecutive number of the 852 fields related to the same SID.

❍

Subfield 8 of the 856/866 fields contains three numbers. The first is the number which appears in subfield 8 ofthe related SID field. The second is the number appearing in subfield 8 of the related 852 field and the third is aconsecutive number of the 856/866 fields related to the same 852 field.

❍

SID $$81$$bLC$$c85020855$$9000019529 SID $$82$$bIRB$$c1158828$$9000019530 852 $$82.1$$aIRB$$bmain$$jHN110.5 .C58 1986 SID $$83$$bSDB$$c1947175$$9000019531 852 $$83.1$$aSDB$$bcs$$hHN110.5$$i.C58 1986 852 $$83.2$$aSDB$$bnnet 85641 $$83.2.1$$zSelect PREVIEW to browse pages. $$u http://www.netlibrary.com/urlapi.asp?action=summary&v=1&bookid=22555

In the example above, the first SID does not have a related 852 field. The second SID has one 852 field and the thirdSID has two 852 fields. The second 852 field has a related 856 field.



WEB OPAC

Version 16

Assigning Extensions to Document Formats●

Basket-mail HTML Page●

Borrower Information Pages●

CCL Search●

Change of Placement of Icons Directories●

Cover Images (Syndetics)●

CSS Files for Different Bases●

Default Holdings Sublibrary●

Drop-down List for Selecting Bases to Search●

Due Date Column Display●

Electronic Location●

Filtering Data by "Range on data" - Enhancement●

Forgot Password●

Format 777●

Hold Requests From a Depository●

HTTPs●

ILL Modes - Internal and External●

Logical Base Counter●

Login and Password Pages●

Multi-base Search (find-m)●

"No. of Requests" Column Display●

Patron Retrieval by Concatenation of ID and Verification●

ILL Cancel Request by Patron (ILL External Mode only)●

Permute Search●

Photocopy Request●

Refine Window Enhancement●

Right-to-Left Text in Web OPAC Files●

Save / Mail●

Save Basket Items on Server●

SFX Base URL●

SFX Link Button●

Sign-in Window●

Simple URL Links●

URL Links in the Brief Display of Records●

Word Search for CJK●

URL Links in the Brief Display of RecordsAn option for displaying and using a URL link has been added to the Brief Display format of records in the Web OPAC. It uses subfield u, usually a URL - of fields such as856##, 505##, 520##, 555##, 583##, 545##, 530## and so on, which are specified under the new function "SHORT-VIEW" in ./xxx01/ta b/tab_buf_z403.

For example:

SHORT-VIEW get_buf_z403_bib 856##u,*,D,

SHORT-VIEW get_buf_z403_bib 505##u,*,D,

1.

ILL Cancel Request by Patron (ILL External Mode only)A new option, Cancel Request, has been added to the expand details window of the LPatron's Library Card-ILL Active Requests and ILL Total Requests. This option allows thepatron to submit cancellations on requests which have the status of NEW, UNF (unfilled) or WAP (waiting for processing). Note that this option is available only for systemswhich are set to work with ILL External mode.

2.

Multi-base Search (find-m)The search results are now shown in a separate page instead of in the Previous Searches page. If records have been found in one base only, they appear in the Brief view.

3.

CSS Files for Different BasesDifferent CSS files can be used for different bases, with no need to duplicate HTML pages (if the only difference between pages for different bases is style definitions, then thereis no need to duplicate the page, adding a base extension. It is enough to define a different CSS file). When preparing the page for loading, the string "exlibris.css" will bechanged to "exlibris-<base>.css" (for example, exlibris-usm01.css ). If such a file (or soft link) does exist under $httpd_root/htdocs, it will be used. Otherwise, the defaultexlibris.css file will be used.

4.

Save / MailA new format is available for the save/mail option (both from the Full and the Brief view). Format 998 lets you save records in ALEPH sequential format.1.

A new interface enables saving or sending via e-mail a set of records from the Brief display, Full display, e-Shelf and Basket. The interface enables the user to choose theformat of the records and the appropriate encoding.

2.

5.

Release Notes - Web OPAC - 16

http://ram19:8991/N/TQP6A4DT1F88X3RGP34582QR...66E589NJ4AU37661EYY-00098/file/n-opac-web-16 (1 of 8) [3/31/2004 5:18:53 PM]

The Holdings: section in the Save/Mail windows is relevant only for Union libraries.

The selected encoding to the encoding section must reside in the $alephe_unicode/ tab_character_conversion_line table.

To implement the new interface, the following Web files must be defined accordingly in alephe/www_f_eng:

basket-course■

basket-mail■

basket-short-head■

basket-short-head-no-save■

eshelf-full-mail■

eshelf-mail■

full-mail■

include-replace-hash■

replace-textarea-hash-js■

short-mail■

The Save/Mail form invoked when Save/Mail is clicked can now be set up to allow the user to select different encoding options for records sent by e-mail.

To enable this function:

Remove the line CHARACTER_CONVERSION=NONE from all Web OPAC-related forms in the usm01/form_lng directory.1.

Set up character conversion for printouts for both Data and Form in mail-related HTML pages.

Example (full-mail):

<td class=td2 id=small > <input type="radio" name="encoding" value="UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI" $$1100-C"UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI">ASCII (recommended / default) </td> <td class=td2 id=small > <input type="radio" name="encoding" value="NONE" $$1100-C"NONE">Unicode / UTF-8 (non-Roman character sets) </td> <td class=td2 id=small > <input type="radio" name="encoding" value="UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL" $$1100-C"UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL ">ISO 8859-1 (Roman character sets) </td>

You can define as many options as you like as long as they are also defined in the $alephe_unicode/tab_character_conversion_line configuration table.

2.

You can modify the encoding of the subject line of the e-mail message sent by the user by editing the UTF_TO_WEB_SUBJECT section in the$alephe_unicode/tab_character_conversion_line configuration table.

Example:

UTF_TO_WEB_SUBJECT ##### # line_utf2line_sb unicode_to_8859_1

The above setting will save or send records by e-mail in the appropriate encoding but most mail programs will not show it without manual selection of the correct encodingby the recepient.

In order to avoid this, your ALEPH installation includes an example script, $alephe_tab/send_mail.example, that shows how this can also be solved.

The following section controls the encoding passed from the Web page:

switch ($4) case "NONE": echo "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8" >> $TMPDIR/send_mail.$$ breaksw case "UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL_ASCI": echo "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=US-ASCII" >> $TMPDIR/send_mail.$$ breaksw case "UTF_TO_WEB_MAIL": echo "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=ISO-8859-1" >> $TMPDIR/send_mail.$$ breaksw case default: echo "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8" >> $TMPDIR/send_mail.$$ breaksw

endsw

You can use this example script to create an appropriate charset= section inside the SMTP header. The same applies to the subject line though it can only hold onepre-defined value for charset.

3.



If you are using send_mail.example as your mailing program, rename it as $alephe_tab/send_mail and make sure it has execution permission as follows:

chmod +x $alephe_tab/send_mail

Note: Any change in the tab_character_conversion_line conversion table relating to the WEB sections must also be reflected in this script.

HTTPsIn order to facilitate work with HTTPs, the following changes have been made:

The tag <input type="hidden" name="ssl_flag" value="Y"> has been added to the HTML pages that use SSL.1.

The CSS link: <link rel="stylesheet" href="&server_httpd/exlibris.css" TYPE"text/css"> was changed to: <link rel="stylesheet" href="http://ram19:8991/exlibris.css"TYPE"text/css">.

2.

The CSS link was moved from the pages to the <include>meta-tags.3.

The following lines were added to the www_server.conf table:4.

setenv server_css "http://10.1.235.19:$HTTPD_PORT" setenv server_css_ssl "https://10.1.235.19:443"

Note: Users that have migrated from 15 to 16 and want automatic page update, please contact Ex Libris Support.

6.

Borrower Information PagesA new JavaScript function was added to the borrower information pages (bor-*). Now the User information pages are not saved in the browser's history. Clicking on the browser'sBack button does not display these pages.

7.

Change of Placement of Icons DirectoriesFor each application, the icons' directory is placed under the directory that contains the HTML pages.

A directory called icon was added under www_f_eng, and icons were copied as appropriate from www_eng.

For each directory in www_f_eng, &icon_path_&lng/icon with &icon_path, and &icon_path_eng/icon were replaced with &icon_path.

A definition was added to prof_master: wficon, pointing to the icon directory under wf.

New definitions under $httpd_root/htdocs -> were created to support the aleph/a16.0_1/alephe tree structure, and under that directory, the www_f_eng directory was created, anda softlink was made to the corresponding icon directory.

8.

Due Date Column DisplayThe display in the Due date column of the Holdings window was previously taken from alephe/error_eng/www_f_heading, error codes 0350 - 0359. Now the display of the Duedate column of the Holdings window is taken from $alephe_error_eng/circ_status_holding.

In addition, codes 8000 - 8012 were moved from $alephe_error_eng/global and put into $alephe_error_eng/circ_status_holding.

A new Heading code was also added to $alephe_error_eng/circ_status_holding: code 8013. When the item has a Z30-ITEM-PROCESS-STATUS, this message appears with theprocess status description taken from tab15.eng. If there is no Z30-ITEM-PROCESS-STATUS, message number 8012 appears as before.

9.

Cover Images (Syndetics)A new service allows libraries that work with Syndetics bibliographic enrichment data to add cover image displays to the Full View. The cover image stems from the record'sISBN. This service is initialized by adding the value ICON to the edit_doc_999.lng table.

For example:

## ICON D LCover Image Y E W

In addition, an OPAC user can click on the cover image to display a new floating window containing additional information about the item.

10.

"No. of Requests" Column DisplayThe "No. of requests" column in the Holdings window can show (with the proper settings) the number of Hold requests for an item that has like copies, in the following way:

<Number of Original hold requests (Total number of hold requests for the item/ Total number of like-copy items including the original)>

An item which belongs to a document that has three items is requested. The items are like copies and available. If there is no restriction on exact copies only, then two additionalhold requests are created automatically. The information in the "No. of requests" column of the requested item is as follows: 1 ( 1 / 3 ).

In addition, if another patron requests the same item, the following line is displayed in the item's request window:

"There is a total of 1 requests on 3 items"

To implement this functionality, the following placeholder ($1600) should appear in ./alephe/www_f_eng/item-global-body as follows:

 <td class=td1>$0900 $1600</td>

11.

Sign-in WindowThe Web OPAC login file in /alephe/www_f_lng, which supports the sign-in window, has been changed. The following HTML script was deleted:

<tr> <td class=td2 width=20%>Library Branch:</td> <td class=td2> <select name=bor_library width=170> <option value=USM50 $$0300-S"USM50">USM50 Library</option> <option value=USM51 $$0300-S"USM51">USM51 Library</option> <option value=UNI50 $$0300-S"UNI50">UNI50 Library</option>

12.



</select> </td> </tr>

The script is not relevant anymore because of the USR00 library. When a user signs in, the ADM library that is linked to the BIB database is determined by the ADM librarydisplayed in the user's My Library Card window.

Right-to-Left Text in Web OPAC FilesIn order to provide support in the Web OPAC files for right-to-left text, the following syntax is used: $AL<NN>.

An example from full-999-body is shown below:

<tr> <td class=td1 id=bold width=15% valign=top nowrap> $0100 </td> <td class=td1 $AL02> $0200 </td> </tr>

Bi-directional text support depends on the definition of the direction_support environment parameter in www_server.conf:

setenv direction_support Y

13.

Word Search for CJKThere are now four options for a search in Chinese:

Exact String: The system looks for the exact string.

Example: A user enters a string of characters ABCD. The system looks for the exact string ABCD.

1.

Dictionary Search: The system looks for the longest word in the string that matches a word in the dictionary (Z113).

Example: ABCD and XY are words in the dictionary. A user enters a string ABCDXY. The system looks for ABCD and XY.

If there is no word in the string that matches a word in the dictionary, the search will resemble Character Search (see below).

2.

Character Search: the system breaks a given string into characters with the Boolean AND between them.

Example: A user enters a string of characters ABCD. The system breaks it into A B C D with the Boolean AND between the characters.

3.

Exact Search: The system looks for the words entered in the indexes. A word is a string between spaces.

Example: a user enters words with spaces such as ABCD XY. The system looks for the words.

The file extensions must be changed. The relevant library extension must be added instead of top.

For example: find-b-top is renamed as find-b-nlc01

This applies to:

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-b-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-b-list-head-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-b-permute-head-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-c-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-m-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-d-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-a-top

./alephe/www_f_eng/find-r-top

4.

14.

SFX Link ButtonThe tab_sfx table, found in the BIB library's data_tab, now defines which icon is displayed for the SFX link. The table determines what SFX services are available when arecord is found in a specific base.

If one of the services is available, the table also controls which icon will be displayed. This control is done by defining, in column 3, into which index on the HTML page,the icon set in column 2 will be inserted. The index has to be used on the HTML page for it to be displayed. For example, if the tab_sfx rows state :

USM01 www_f_sfx 11 N getAuthorEmail USM01 www_f_sfx_em 12 N getCitedJournal

then if the SFX service getAuthorEmail is available for a record found in USM01, the www_f_sfx icon will be inserted into index 11. For the full-set-head HTML page todisplay this icon, use the following definition:

<td class="bar" align="center" valign="bottom" nowrap> $1100 $1200 </td>

instead of :

1.

15.



<td class="bar" align="center" valign="bottom" nowrap> <ahref='javascript:open_window("&server_f?func=service-sfx&doc_number=$0600&line_number=0000&service_type=RECORD");'>

<img src="&icon_path/f-sfx.gif" border=0 alt="SFX services"></a> </td>

If none of the services is available, a dimmed and unavailable SFX link button will be inserted into index 11 of the HTML page.

If the searched base is not found in tab_sfx, the www_f_sfx icon will be inserted into index 11 of the HTML page.

If more than one SFX service is required, columns 1-4 do not have to be repeated. For example :

USM01 www_f_sfx 11 N getAuthorEmail getCitedJournal

means that either getAuthorEmail or getCitedJournal have to be available for the www_f_sfx icon to be displayed.

The SFX link button is now displayed for items of material-type starting with "ISS" (such as ISSUE, ISSBD, and so on).2.

Two icons are defined in www_server.conf:

The www_f_sfx icon is used where tab_sfx does not define a set of required SFX services.■

The www_f_sfx_dim icon is used where tab_sfx does define a set of required SFX services, but they are not available.■

Any other icon can be defined in www_server, just as all icons are defined in this file. The icons can then be used in tab_sfx for records that have the required SFXservices.

3.

Assigning Extensions to Document FormatsYou can now assign a special file extension to any document format. This file extension is used automatically when documents are saved on the computer in Web OPAC.

The document formats and their extensions are determined in the tab_mime_type table in $alephe_tab.

16.

Format 777There is a new format for the Save/Mail option in the Web OPAC, 777. This format converts bibliographic records into "ISI ResearchSoft Tagged Output Format". This is theformat used to import records into reference managers such as Endnote. The conversion is driven by the new edit_doc_777 table in the bibliographic library's tab directory. In thistable, the ALEPH-tags that should be exported are defined. When a record is saved or mailed in this format, the program uses a new form, www-set-mail-777-00.

17.

Basket-mail HTML PageThe title of this Web file has been changed due to a change in the functionality. The title used to include "print". Now the print functionality is separate.

18.

Saving Basket Items on ServerYou can now define the directory on the server in which the item from the basket will be saved. The directory is defined in /alephe/aleph_start.

In the following example, the basket items will be saved under /tmp/save_cr:



19.

Electronic LocationUp to now, the EXT entry in the edit_field.lng table was used to edit the display of electronic locations. Now, 856 is used as an entry in edit_field.eng, just like any other field inedit_doc_999.lng.

If the 856 entry appears without subfields in edit_field.lng (that is, only the following line appears: 1 # 856## D), the display will be determined according to the followingalgorithm:

Use subfield z, or if missing use subfield u, or if missing compose by usingsubfields a,p,d and f as done for URL creation.

20.

Default Holdings SublibraryThe Select search sub-library in the bor-profile-display Web file has been changed to Select default holdings sublibrary due to the confusion it caused regarding the functionalityof the sublibrary.

This functionality determines the default holdings sublibrary in the event that ITM5 (in edit_doc_999.lng) is used.

21.

Login and Password PagesThere is a new multi-ADM environment option. As a consequence of the implementation of the multi-ADM environment, the bor_library variable in the following pages shouldNOT be set to the usr_library (for example, USR00) but to a valid administrative unit (such as USM50).

HTML files that should be modified:

./alephe/www_f_eng/bypass-passwd

./alephe/www_f_eng/login

./alephe/www_f_eng/login-item

./alephe/www_f_eng/login-request

22.



Example:

Change the line:

input type="hidden" name="bor_library" value="USR00"

to:

input type="hidden" name="bor_library" value="USM50"

or give a list of available administrative units:

<tr> <td class=td2>Library Branch: </td> <td class=td2> <select name=bor_library width=170> <option value=USM50 ##0800-S"USM50">USM50 Library </option> <option value=USM51 ##0800-S"USM51">USM51 Library </option> <option value=USM52 ##0800-S"USM52">USM52 Library </option> <option value=UNI50 ##0800-S"UNI50">UNI50 Library </option> </select> </td> </tr>

Forgot Password?Until now, if the Forgot Password mechanism failed, a patron was passed through to the system as guest. To prevent confusion, if the Forgot Password mechanism now fails(that is, the user ID does not exist), the system returns the patron to the login page, displaying the appropriate error message.

23.

Drop-down List for Selecting Bases to SearchA new drop-down list for selecting bases to search, entitled Base to Search, has been added to the following Web search files:

Window Web File Name

Basic Search find-b

Basic Search - no results find-b-list-head

Multi-field Search find-a

Advanced Search find-d

CCL Search find-c

Results List - in the bottom short-tail

The content of the drop-down list is a list of logical bases, taken from tab_base.lng, and it is defined in ./alephe/www_f_lng/base-list-include. The file must be suffixed with adash and the library/base name, for example, base-list-include-usm01.

The drop-down list automatically selects the current base entry by using the place holder $9000 when calling the base-list-include fileHere is an example taken from the find-a Web file:

<includep;>base-list-include\FXX\9000\

The base selection drop-down list, added at the bottom of the Results List page, enables you to repeat the search (represented in CCL syntax, which can be changed) in a differentbase.

24.

SFX Base URLThe sfx-base-url variable is now ADM library-sensitive. This means that different URLs can be defined for different ADM libraries, in the following manner:

setenv sfx_base_url http://demo.exlibrisgroup.com:9003/demo setenv sfx_base_url_usm50 http://demo.exlibrisgroup.com:9004/demo setenv sfx_base_url_usm51 http://ram47:8888/exlibris

When a patron logs into the Web OPAC, his session identifiers include which base URL will be used for the SFX link. The base URL will be set in the following manner :

If there is a Web cookie named "BASE-URL", the value of that cookie should contain the SFX host name and instance, in the format http://host-name:port/instance. In thatcase, the value of the cookie will set the base URL, and the www_server.conf variable is irrelevant.

❍

If there is no Web cookie, the ADM-specific www_server.conf variable will be used, according to the patron's profile ADM library. For example, if the patron has theADM library USM50 set as the ADM library in his profile (or his group profile or ALEPH profile), the www_server.conf variable sfx_base_url_usm50 will be used to setthe patron's base URL.

❍

If there is no matching ADM-specific www_server.conf variable, the sfx_base_url variable will set the base URL.❍

25.

Patron Retrieval by Concatenation of ID and VerificationIt is now possible to retrieve a patron by using the ID (that is, Z308-KEY-DATA) and the password/verification (Z308-VERIFICATION).

Z308-KEY-DATA comprises of a patron name (for example, "ED"), a concatenation character (for example, a hyphen "-") and the verification (for example, "X"):

Z308-KEY-DATA : ED-X Z308-VERIFICATION : X

This lets a patron log in with his user name and the verification. The program looks for Z308-KEY-DATA "ED-X".

26.



In order to enable this, the following configurations must be set:

The concatenation character must be defined in ./alephe/aleph_start:

setenv bor_id_concat_char -

❍

Column 8 in tab_bor_id.lng must be set to "N" for the codes used for this purpose, to prevent patrons from changing their verification.❍

Simple URL LinkThere is a new option for presenting clickable URLs embedded in the text. This can be done by adding S to column 10 of edit_doc_999.lng.

27.

Permute SearchWhen searching for more than one word in adjacency mode, the system also used to list the string of words in the first line. Now results appear next to the first line, even ifthe words are not adjacent.

For example, when a search is performed for Animal Behavior in adjacency mode, the Permute Search window will present results next to the string even if the words arenot adjacent.

1.

A change has been made in the find-b-permute-head HTML page from:

<th class="text3">Request permutation</th>

to:

<th class="text3">Request permutation (No Adjacency)</th>

to indicate that all permute searches are without adjacency.

2.

28.

CCL SearchEvery time the CCL Search page is accessed, the "Base to search" field will automatically be filled with the name of the current base.

In addition, if the "CCL" link is activated from the "Basic Search" page after a search query is performed with no results, the CCL command text box is populated with the searchstring and the appropriate adjacency option is selected, according to the choice made in the "Basic Search" query.

29.

Refine Window EnhancementSearch limits (filters) have been added to the Refine window (short-refine) that appears when users click the Refine button from a Results List. These filters include filtering bylanguage, year, format, and location.

For filters to be included in the Refine window, the following lines must be present in the ./alephe/www_f_eng/short-refine file:

<hr> <include>find-include-filter <hr>

30.

Hold Requests From a DepositoryThere is a now a special HTML screen for hold requests from a depository. It is composed of the following new files which have been added to .alephe/www_f_lng:

item-hold-request-head-depoitem-hold-request-body-depoitem-hold-request-tail-depo

31.

Filtering Results by "Range on data" - EnhancementUp until now, it was possible to filter only by an entire field's content. It is now possible to also specify a subfield (./alephe/www_f_eng/short-filter-r):

<select name=field_code> <option value="245__a" $$0500-S"245__a">Title</option> <option value="100" $$0500-S"100">Author </option> <option value="110" $$0500-S"110">Corporate Author</option> <option value="111" $$0500-S"111">Meeting</option> <option value="260__a" $$0500-S"260__a">Place of publication</option> <option value="260__b" $$0500-S"260__b">Publisher</option> </select>

Use underscore ("_") instead of hash ("#") to specify "any indicator".❍

If no indicators are specified (as in "100", "110", and "111" in the example above), this implies - "##" - any indicators. Note that "100__" is equivalent to "100", and may beused for improved clarity).

❍

If no subfield is specified, the entire field's content is checked.❍

Only one subfield code is allowed.❍

32.

Logical Base CounterThe counter for logical bases mechanism (Z0102 table) can now be used with up to 200 bases. Previously, it could be used with up to 100 bases.

33.

Photocopy RequestThe HTML file for the photocopy request screen (item-photo-request) has been divided into three: item-photo-request-head; item-photo-request-body; item-photo-request-tail.

34.

ILL Modes - Internal and ExternalThe following new switch in aleph_start determines the ILL mode of operation:

setenv ill_mode EXTERNAL

This switch, when set to EXTERNAL, will cause the Web OPAC to use external ILL modules. If ALEPH's ILL capabilities are to be used, this parameter must be set to

35.



INTERNAL.

The following new switch in aleph_start determines the host and port number on which the external ILL module can be found:

setenv ill_ext_server ram47:12001

This switch is used only if ill_mode is set to EXTERNAL.